2009 SLK Manual PDF

Operator’s Manual
SLK
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Symbols ! Highlights hazards that may result in dam-
age to your vehicle.
Trademarks®:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of i Helpful hints or further information you
Bluetooth SIG Inc. may find useful.
RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler. X This symbol points to instructions
RHomeLink®
for you to follow.
is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. X A number of these symbols appear-
ing in succession indicates a mul-
RiPod® is a registered trademark of Apple tiple-step procedure.
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-
tries. Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
RLOGIC7® is a registered trademark of Har-
man International Industries, Incorporated. YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is con-
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks tinued on the next page.
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
RWindows is a registered trademark of system, are printed in the type
Microsoft Corporation in the United States shown here.
and other countries.
The following symbols are found in this Oper-
ator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.

Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstra-
tion of your trust in our company name. Fur-
thermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an
automobile that will be as easy as possible to
operate and provide years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations con-
tained in this manual. They are designed to
acquaint you with the operation of your
Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company

Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
2
Index
1, 2, 3 ... Passenger front air bag off indica- Aquaplaning

tor lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 48, 306 see Hydroplaning
911 Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Air conditioning refrigerant and Aspect ratio (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
A lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Audio/DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ABS (Antilock Brake System) . . . . . . . 59 Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Air pressure Audio and telephone operation . . . 128
Messages in the multifunction dis- see Tire inflation pressure Audio AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Air pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Accessory weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Air pump (electric) . . . . . . . . . . 318, 326 CD mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Air bag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 AIRSCARF neck-level heating . . . . . . . 75 Media interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) . . . . . . . 209 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 MP3 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Emergency calls (Telephone) . . . . . 176 Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Alarm system Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
see Headlamps see Anti-theft systems Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Additives Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 324 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 80
Address change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Messages in the multifunction dis- Automatic central locking . . . . . 69, 124
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Automatic climate control
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 see Climate control system
Emergency call upon deployment . 209 Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 357 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 82
Front, driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror . . 79 Automatic interior lighting control . . 86
Front, passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Antilock Brake System Automatic locking when driving . . . 124
Head-thorax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 see ABS Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . . 102
Knee bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Messages in the multifunction dis- Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 63 Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 102
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Emergency operation (limp-home
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3
Index
Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Batteries, SmartKey C

Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Checking condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 CAC (Customer Assistance Center) . . 21
Gearshifting malfunctions . . . . . . . 106 Battery, Vehicle California retail buyers and les-
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 sees, important notice for . . . . . . . . . 18
Kickdown (manual shift program) . 106 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Calls (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 169
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Messages in the multifunction dis- Can holders
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 103 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 see Cup holders
Program mode indicator . . . . . . . . 103 Bead (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Capacities and recommended
Program mode selector switch Beverage holders fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105 see Cup holders Carpets, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Steering wheel gearshift control . . 103 Brake fluid Central locking
Transmission position indicator . . . 100 Messages in the multifunction dis- Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 124
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 100 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Locking/unlocking from inside . . . . 69
AUX socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Brake lamps Central locking/unlocking switch . . . 69
Axle oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 312 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
B Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Brake pads Indicator lamp, passenger front
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 air bag off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Backrest Messages in the multifunction dis-
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Infant and child restraint systems . . 56
see Seats Occupant Classification System
Backup lamps Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
High-performance brake system . . 255 (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Messages in the multifunction dis- Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Child safety
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 see Children in the vehicle
Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs Chrome-plated exhaust tip, clean-
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . 60 ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4
Index
Climate control Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 D

see Climate control system Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Dashboard
Air conditioning, cooling . . . . . . . . 193 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 see Instrument cluster
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 355 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . 197 Vehicle status message memory . . 118 Date, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Control system submenus . . . . . . . . 111 Daytime running lamp mode . . . 83, 122
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 196 Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Deep water
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 see Standing water
Deactivating system . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Defogging (windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Defroster
Maximum cooling MAX COOL . . . . 197 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Residual engine heat (REST) . . . . . 197 Convenience submenu Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 124 Delayed shut-off
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 121 Coolant Exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . 357 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cold tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . 248 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Delete button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Collapsible tire (spare wheel) . . . . . 348 Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Department of Transportation
Collapsible wheel chock . . . . . . . . . . 268 Messages in the multifunction dis- see DOT
COMAND system play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285, 287 Difficulties
see separate COMAND system Corner-illuminating front fog lamps . 85 While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
operating instructions Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 With starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Digital clock
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 see Clock
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 108 Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Dimensions (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 119 Customer Assistance Center Direction of rotation (tires) . . . . . . . 231
Control system menus . . . . . . . . . . . 111 see CAC Displays
AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Audio/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Maintenance service indicator . . . . 258
5
Index
Messages in the multifunction dis- Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Through standing water . . . . . . . . . 256 Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Driving and parking Emergency calls
Outside temperature . . . . . . . 110, 121 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 256 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Emergency operations
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 125 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Gear selector lever, unlocking . . . . 309
Vehicle status message memory . . 118 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Vehicle system settings . . . . . . . . . 118 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . 308
Disturbance in reception . . . . . . . . . 163 ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Driving systems Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Doors Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Trunk lid, emergency release . . . . . . 70
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . 66 Driving tips, automatic transmis- Trunk lid, unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 66 sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Emergency Tensioning Device
Messages in the multifunction dis- see ETD
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 E Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Opening from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . 213 Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . 77, 124 System warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Unlocking (Mechanical key) . . . . . . 308 Electrical system Engine
DOT (Department of Transporta- Improper work on or modifications . 20 Brake-in recommendations . . . . . . 220
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Driving Electronic Stability Program Malfunction indicator lamp
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 see ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 304
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Emergency, in case of Maximum engine speed . . . . . . . . . 343
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 253 Battery, jump starting . . . . . . . . . . 330 Messages in the multifunction dis-
In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . 85 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6
Index
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 F Front seat head restraints

Turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 see Head restraints
Engine coolant Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 253
see Coolant First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Engine oil Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Capacities, fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Lowering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Fuel consumption statistics . . . . . . 125
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . . . 322 Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 221
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 348 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 303
Messages in the multifunction dis- TIREFIT (tire repair kit) . . . . . . . . . . 318 Premium unleaded gasoline
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 353, 355
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Fluids Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Recommended engine oils and oil Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . 352 Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 60 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Messages in the multifunction dis- Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Hydraulic fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Fuel tank
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Manual transmission oil . . . . . . . . . 352 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Washer and headlamp cleaning Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ETS (Electronic Traction System) . . . . 61 G
Express operation Messages in the multifunction dis-
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . 36, 214
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Gasoline
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Front air bags see Fuel
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 79
see Air bags GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . 248
Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front lamps
see Headlamps
7
Index
Gear range H High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 84, 312

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 101 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Halogen headlamps Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 see Headlamps High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . . 312
Shifting into optimal . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning . . 264 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 High-performance brake system . . . 255
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . . 85 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Headlamps Messages in the multifunction dis-
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 99 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . 81 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . 82 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transmission position indicator . . . 100 Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 312 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 100 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 309 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
I
Gearshift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Generator High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Identification number, vehicle
see Alternator High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 84 (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Global locking/unlocking Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 92
see Key, SmartKey Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Infant and child restraint systems
Gross Axle Weight Rating Headliner, cleaning and care of . . . . 264 see Children in the vehicle
see GAWR Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Inflation pressure
Gross Vehicle Weight Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 see Tires, Inflation pressure
see GVW Head-thorax air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Inside door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 68
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 107
see GVWR Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . . . . . . 248 Height adjustment Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster, Illumination
8
Index
Instrument panel Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 302

see Instrument cluster Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Instruments and controls Messages in the multifunction dis- Fuel tank reserve . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 303
see Cockpit play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Passenger front air bag off
Emergency accident lighting . . . . . . 87 Restoring to factory setting . . . . . . . 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 45, 306
Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Selective setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 300
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 72 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 301
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 80 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Interior storage spaces Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 106 Language, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
see Storage compartments Kilopascal (air pressure unit) . . . . . . 248 License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Intermittent wiping Knee bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Messages in the multifunction dis-
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
L Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
J Light alloy wheels, cleaning . . . . . . . 263
Labels
Lighter
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
see Cigarette lighter
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Emission control information . . . . . 342
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lamps, exterior
Daytime running lamp mode . . . . . . 83
K Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Key, Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Messages in the multifunction dis-
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Key, SmartKey Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Battery check lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Lamps, indicator and warning
Checking batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Loss of
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 298
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Battery (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Global locking (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . 67 Service and Warranty Information
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Global unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . . . 67 booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Engine malfunction . . . . . . . . . 29, 304
9
Index
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Menus Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293

Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 see Control system menus Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Mirrors High-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 80 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 79 License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 79 Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Low-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
M MON (Motor Octane Number) . 221, 355 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Motor Octane Number Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Passenger front air bag . . . . . . . . . 274
see MON
Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Calling up service indicator . . . . . . 259 Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Clearing service indicator mes- Reverse lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
sage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Resetting service indicator . . . . . . 259 SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Vehicle status messages . . . . . . . . 271
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Multifunction display messages
Service indicator message . . . . . . . 258 Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . 259 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Manual headlamp mode (Low- Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 295
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
beam headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Tire pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 295
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 295
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Gearshift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Maximum loaded vehicle weight . . . 248 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285, 287 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Maximum load rating (tires) . . . . . . . 248 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Maximum permissible tire infla- Display malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Multifunction steering wheel
tion pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Media interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Engine service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . 77, 124
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10
Index
Gearshift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 OCS (Occupant Classification Sys- PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 see Passenger front air bag off
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 indicator lamp
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Passenger front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Oil Messages in the multifunction dis-
N see Engine oil play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Oil level Passenger front air bag off indica-
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
see Engine oil, Checking level tor lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 45, 306
Nets, parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
On-board computer Passenger safety
Night security illumination . . . . 84, 123
see Control system see Occupant safety
Normal occupant weight . . . . . . . . . 248
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Number, vehicle identification
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Phone
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Ornamental moldings, cleaning . . . . 262 see Telephone
Outside temperature Plastic parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
O see Displays Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Occupant Classification System Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
see OCS Power seats
Occupant distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 P see Seats
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Power washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Paintwork, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Door windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Parcel nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 51 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Infant and child restraint systems . . 56
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Messages in the multifunction dis- Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Passenger front air bag off indica-
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Problems
tor lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 306
Parking position While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 49
Transmission position . . . . . . . . . . 100 With vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
11
Index
Production options weight . . . . . . . . 249 Reminder, Seat belt Messages in the multifunction dis-
Program mode selector switch see Seat belts, Telltale play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 102 Remote control Operating manually . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 105 see Key, SmartKey Wind screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Proximity key Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . . 213 Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 345
see Key, SmartKey Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 19, 210
PSI (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 RON (Research Octane Number)
Push-start Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 355
see Tow-start High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 312 Roof
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 312 see Retractable hardtop
R License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 312 Route guidance
RACETIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 see Navigation system
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Rubber parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Standing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 S
Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 21 Safety
Rear fog lamp Research Octane Number Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 58
see Fog lamps see RON Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Rear lamps Reserve fuel Reporting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
see Tail lamps Safety belts
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 198 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 see Seat belts
Recommended tire inflation pres- Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 303 Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 249 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 107, 119 Seat belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle Restraint systems Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 see Occupant safety Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Refrigerant, air conditioning . . . . . . 355 Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Proper use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
Index
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Steering column

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 see Multifunction steering wheel,
Telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 300 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Adjusting
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Selective setting (SmartKey) . . . . . . 67 Steering wheel
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 see Multifunction steering wheel
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Shelf behind roll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Steering wheel gearshift control . . . 103
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Side marker lamps Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . . 213
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . . 77 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . 30, 204
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Messages in the multifunction dis- Storing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Submenus
Selective setting Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 see Control system submenus
see Key, SmartKey Sidewall (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Selector lever Side windows
see Gear selector lever see Power windows T
Self-test SmartKey
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 see Key, SmartKey Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Overspeed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Service Snow tires Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
see Maintenance see Winter tires Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Service, parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 345 Messages in the multifunction dis-
Service and warranty information . . . 18 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Service intervals SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tar stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
see Maintenance System, Service Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 301
indicator Messages in the multifunction dis- Technical data
Service life (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 355
Settings Standing water, driving through . . . 256 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Capacities fuels, coolants, lubri-
Control system menus and sub-
cants etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Starting difficulties (engine) . . . . . . . . 92
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Factory setting (SmartKey) . . . . . . . 67
13
Index
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Messages in the multifunction dis-
Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 177 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 295
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Tire repair kit
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Temperature see TIREFIT
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Interior temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 345
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . . 355 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 121 Advanced TPMS low tire pressure
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Tightening torque telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Washer and headlamp cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 230
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 TIN (Tire Identification Number) . . . 249 Direction of rotation, spinning . . . . 231
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Tire and Loading Information Plac- Important notes on tire inflation
Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Tire and loading terminology . . . . . . 247 Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237
Initiating an emergency call man- TIREFIT Information placard . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Messages in the multifunction dis- Tire Identification Number Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 see TIN Load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Tire inflation pressure Messages in the multifunction dis-
Roadside Assistance button . . . . . 210 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 295
SOS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Important notes on . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Ply composition and material used 249
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . 213 Placard on driver’s door B-pillar . . . 231 Problems under-/overinflation . . . . 236
System self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Retreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 169 Tire load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Rims and tires (technical data) . . . 345
Answering/ending a call . . . . . . . . 127 Tire ply composition and material Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Emergency calls “911” . . . . . . . . . . 176 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Hands-free microphone . . . . . . . . . . 36 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14
Index
Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 249 Transmission gear selector lever U

Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 see Gear selector lever
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 247 Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Traveling abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 250
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tread (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Units, Settings
Tire Identification Number . . . . . . . 249 Tread depth (tires) . . . . . . . . . . 230, 251 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . 230, 249 Unleaded gasoline, premium . . . . . . 355
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TPMS low tire pressure/malfunc- Trip odometer, resetting . . . . . . . . . . 108 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
tion telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 305 Trunk Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 249 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Messages in the multifunction dis-
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 251 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 V
Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . 230, 249 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Vehicle maximum load on . . . . . . . 250 Trunk lid emergency release . . . . . . 70 Vehicle
Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 308 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 345 Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 249 Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Top tether Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Additional in mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Total load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Locking/unlocking manually . . . . . 308
Towing eye bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Lowering (wheel change) . . . . . . . . 328
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Messages in the multifunction dis- Modifications and alterations,
Tow-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 332 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Transmission Vehicle jack
see Automatic transmission or see Jack
Manual transmission Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 227
15
Index
Vehicle loading Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Wheels, sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Vehicle maximum load on the tire . . 250 Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen Windows
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 see Power windows
Vehicle status message memory . . . 118 Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Wind screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vehicle washing Windshield
see Vehicle care Cleaning wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 263
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
W Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 358
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Warning sounds
Windshield wipers
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt . . . 53
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 315
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Winter driving
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Warranty coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Washer fluid
Winter driving instructions . . . . . . . 252
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 345
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Wood trims, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Mixing ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wear pattern (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
16
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Product Information Operator’s Manual Vehicle equipment
Notes Your vehicle may have some or all of the
Please observe the following in your own best
equipment described in this manual. There-
interest: This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal fore, you may find explanations for optional
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- of useful information. We urge you to read it equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and carefully and familiarize yourself with the have any questions about operating any
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle before driving. equipment, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
vehicle model. For your own safety and longer service life of Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper
We have tested these parts to determine their the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instruc- procedures.
reliability, safety and special suitability for tions and warnings contained in this Opera- Optional equipment is also described in this
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. tor’s Manual. Ignoring them could result in manual, including operating instructions
We are unable to make an assessment for damage to the vehicle or personal injury to wherever necessary. Since they are special-
other products and therefore cannot be held you or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- order items, the descriptions and illustrations
responsible for them, even if in individual ure to follow instructions is not covered by herein may vary slightly from the actual equip-
cases an official approval or authorization by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ment of your vehicle.
governmental or other agencies should exist. We continuously strive to improve our prod- If there are any equipment details that are not
Use of such parts and accessories could uct, and ask for your understanding that we shown or described in this Operator’s Man-
adversely affect the safety, performance or reserve the right to make changes in design ual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use and equipment. Therefore, information, illus- will be glad to inform you of correct care and
them. trations and descriptions in this Operator’s operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- Manual might differ from your vehicle. and Maintenance Booklet are important
approved conversion parts and accessories documents and should be kept with the vehi-
are available at any authorized Mercedes- cle.
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive com-
prehensive information on permissible tech-
nical modifications and expert installations.
17
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Service and warranty information Important notice for California retail gory (1) has been subject to repair four
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz or more times and you have directly noti-
The Service and Warranty Information book- fied us in writing of the need for its repair,
automobiles
let contains detailed information about the or
warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, Under California law you may be entitled to a
including: replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- repair of the same or different substantial
RNew Car Limited Warranty
sonable number of repair attempts Mer- defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
REmission System Warranty total of more than 30 calendar days.
cedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized
REmission Performance Warranty repair or service facilities fail to fix one or Written notification should not be sent to a
RCalifornia,
more substantial defects or malfunctions in dealer, it should be addressed to
Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
the vehicle that are covered by its express Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
warranty. During the period of 18 months
Island, and Vermont Emission Control Sys- Customer Assistance Center
from original delivery of the vehicle or the
tem Warranty One Mercedes Drive
accumulation of 18 000 miles (approximately
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Laws) whichever occurs first, a reasonable number
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Maintenance
occurs: The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- necessary maintenance work which should
tion results in a condition that is likely to be performed at regular intervals.
cause death or serious bodily injury if the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- you when you take the vehicle to an author-
tion has been subject to repair two or ized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The
more times, and you have directly noti- service advisor will record each service in the
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing booklet for you.
of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
18
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to send
Program provides factory-trained technical in the “Change of Address Notice” found in If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the the Service and Warranty Information Book- countries, please be aware that:
toll-free Roadside Assistance number let, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Cus- Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) tomer Assistance Center (in the USA) at not be readily available,
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
Runleaded gasoline for vehicles with cata-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus- (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner lytic converters may not be available; the
tomer Assistance Representatives 24 hours use of leaded fuels will damage the cata-
a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
lysts,
For additional information refer to the Mer- If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all lit-
erature with the vehicle to make it available Rgasoline may have a considerably lower
cedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
to the next operator. octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
brochure (in the USA) or the Roadside Assis-
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to engine damage.
tance section of the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet (in Canada) in your vehi- send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available
cle literature portfolio. found in the Service and Warranty Informa- for delivery in Europe under our European
tion Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Cus- Delivery Program. For details, consult an
tomer Assistance Center (in the USA) at authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service In the USA:
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
19
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel to make you and others aware of various
a sudden significant vibration or ride dis- risks. You should not remove any of these
G Warning! turbance, or you suspect that damage to warning labels unless explicitly instructed
Work improperly carried out on electronic your vehicle has occurred, you should turn to do so by information on the label itself.
components and associated software on your hazard warning flashers, carefully Removal of any of these labels may cause
could cause them to cease functioning. slow down, and drive with caution to an you and others to be unaware of certain
Because the vehicle’s electronic compo- area which is a safe distance from the road. risks which may result in an accident and/
nents are interconnected, any modifica- Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ or personal injury.
tions made may produce an undesired wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
effect on other systems. Electronic mal- appears unsafe, have it towed to the near-
functions could seriously impair the oper- est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
ating safety of your vehicle. other qualified maintenance or repair
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- facility for further inspection or repairs.
ter for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on Proper use of the vehicle
the vehicle could also have a negative Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
impact on the operating safety of the vehi- familiar with the following information and
cle. rules:
Some safety systems only function while Rthe safety precautions in this manual
the engine is running. You should therefore
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
never turn off the engine while driving.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
G Warning!
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running G Warning!
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, Various warning labels are attached to your
may cause serious damage and impair the vehicle. These warning labels are intended
20
Introduction
Reporting safety defects

Problems with your vehicle Reporting safety defects 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
If you should experience a problem with your For the USA only: You can also obtain other information about
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may The following text is published as required of motor vehicle safety from
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. http://www.safercar.gov.
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
immediately to have the problem diagnosed “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
and corrected if required. If the matter is not of 1966”.
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at Reporting safety defects
one of the following addresses: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
In the USA: which could cause a crash or could cause
Customer Assistance Center injury or death, you should immediately
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
One Mercedes Drive
ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
In Canada: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Customer Relations Department safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
21
Introduction
Vehicle data recording

Vehicle data recording mation that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diag-
nose vehicle systems after a collision and to
continuously improve vehicle safety. Daimler
may access the information and share it with
others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis pur-
poses
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription serv-
ice agreement for details regarding the infor-
22
At a glance
Exterior view ....................................... 24

Cockpit ................................................. 26
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
Storage compartments ....................... 30
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 32
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 36
Door control panel .............................. 37
23
At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
24
At a glance
Exterior view
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page Function Page
1 Trunk 6 Retractable hardtop 199 d Tires and wheels 229,

345
Locking and unlocking 66 7 Windshield
Checking tire inflation pres-
Opening and closing 69, Cleaning with wiper fluid 88 sure 237
70
Cleaning 263 Spare wheel 348
Valet locking 71
8 Wipers 87 Flat tire 317
Vehicle tool kit 268
Wiper blades, replacing 315 e Rear lamps 312
2 Rear window defroster 198
Wiper blades, cleaning 263 f Rear towing eye 333
3 Fuel filler flap 221
9 Hood 223
Fuel requirements 355
Engine oil 224
4 Doors
Coolant 227
Locking and unlocking 66
a Front lamps 312
Opening 68
b Front towing eye 333
Locking and unlocking
manually 309 c Headlamp cleaning system 85
5 Exterior rear view mirrors 79
25
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit
Function Page Function Page
1 Steering wheel gearshift c Steering wheel adjustment,

control (automatic trans- electrical 77
mission) 103
Heated steering wheel 78
2 Multifunction steering 32,
wheel 108 d On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
3 Horn
e Hood lock release lever 223
4 Instrument cluster 28,
107 f Exterior lamp switch 81
5 Lever for Voice Control Sys- g Combination switch

tem, see separate operat-
• Turn signals 84
ing instructions
6 Overhead control panel 36 • Wipers 87
7 Sun sensor (automatic cli- • High beam 84

mate control)
h Door control panel 37
8 Glove box 204
j Cruise control lever 184
9 Center console 34
a Starter switch 72
b Steering wheel adjustment,

manual 77
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function Page Function Page Function Page
1 Multifunction display H Combination low tire L Left turn signal indi-

with: 110 pressure/TPMS malfunc- 237, cator lamp
tion telltale, USA only 305
Trip odometer 108 v Electronic Stability
< Seat belt telltale 53, Program (ESP®) warning
Main odometer 110 300 lamp 302
Gear range indicator (auto- A High-beam headlamp K Right turn signal indi-
matic transmission) 101 indicator lamp 84 cator lamp
Program mode indicator 3 Fuel gauge with: ; Brake warning lamp,
(automatic transmission) 103
USA only 299
4 Fuel tank reserve
Outside temperature indi-
warning lamp (the arrow 3 Brake warning lamp,
cator or digital speedome-
indicates that the fuel filler Canada only 299
ter (depending on selected
flap is on the right-hand
setting in the control sys- 112,
side) 303 6 Reset button for:
tem) 120
4 Clock 108 • Resetting trip odometer 108
Set speed for cruise control 184
2 Tachometer with: 5 Speedometer with: • Resetting all settings 119
? Engine malfunction 1 Supplemental 7 Knobs for instrument

indicator lamp, USA only 304 Restraint System (SRS) 41, cluster illumination 107
indicator lamp 301
± Engine malfunction
- Antilock Brake Sys- 59,
indicator lamp, Canada only 304
tem (ABS) indicator lamp 298
29
At a glance
Storage compartments
30
At a glance
Function Page
1 Glove box 204
2 Door pocket
3 Trunk
Luggage cover 202
4 Door pocket
5 Cup holders 205
6 Parcel net in passenger

footwell 203
7 Ashtray 206
8 Storage tray
9 Storage compartment 204
a Storage compartment
between seat backrests 205
31
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page Function Page
1 Multifunction display 110 Press button æ or ç
2 Press button s • to select submenus in

the Settings menu 119
• to take a call 126
• to set values
• to dial1 126
• to operate the RACE-
• to redial1 126 TIMER2 114
Press button t • to set the volume
• to end a call 126 3 Press button è or ·
to select next/previous
• to reject an incoming
menu 108
call 126
1 Function only available in telephone menu.

2 AMG vehicles only.
32
At a glance

Function Page Function Page
Press button j or k Press and hold button

briefly j or k
• to move within a menu • to select previous or

next track with quick
• to select previous or search or to select pre-
next track, scene or vious or next station in
stored station within station list or wave
Audio/DVD menu 116 band within Audio/
DVD menu 116
• to switch to the phone
book and select a name • to start the quick
or number within Tele- search in the phone
phone menu 126 book within Telephone
menu 126
33
At a glance
Center console
Center console Function Page Function Page
Upper part 1 Cup holders 205 9 Seat heating switch,
driver‘s side 75
2 Audio system 128
a AIRSCARF switch, driver‘s
or side 75
COMAND system (see sep- b Passenger front air bag off
arate operating instruc- indicator lamp 46
tions)
c Climate control 187
3 AIRSCARF switch, passen-
ger side 75 Automatic climate control 187
4 Seat heating switch, pas- Rear window defroster

senger side 75 switch 198
5 Central unlocking switch 69 d Cigarette lighter 207
6 Hazard warning flasher e Ashtray 206

switch 85
7 Central locking switch 69

Alarm system indicator
lamp 63
8 Electronic Stability Pro-

gram (ESP®) switch 60
34
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Function Page
1 Gearshift lever (manual

transmission) 97
Gear selector lever (auto-
matic transmission) 98
2 Retractable hardtop switch 199
3 Tow-away alarm off switch 64
4 Parking brake lever 95
5 Storage compartment 204
6 Passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror button 79
7 Driver’s side exterior rear

view mirror button 79
8 Exterior rear view mirror

adjustment button 79
9 Program mode selector

switch (automatic trans-
mission) 102
35
At a glance
Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel Function Page
1 Interior lighting switch 86
2 Automatic interior lighting 86
3 Right reading lamp switch 86
4 Tele Aid (emergency call

system) button 210
5 Garage door opener 214
6 Sensor for auto-dimming

rear view mirrors 80
7 Interior rear view mirror 79
8 Hands-free microphone for

Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone
9 Left reading lamp switch 86
36
At a glance
Door control panel

Door control panel Function Page
1 Inside door handle 68
2 Power window switch, pas-

senger-side window 89
3 Power window switch,

driver’s side window 89
37
38
Safety and security
Vehicle equipment .............................. 40

Occupant safety .................................. 40
Panic alarm .......................................... 58
Driving safety systems ....................... 58
Anti-theft systems .............................. 62
39
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment Occupant safety G Warning!
Modifications to or work improperly con-
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- Introduction
ducted on restraint system components or
tures, standard or optional, potentially In this section you will learn the most impor- their wiring, as well as tampering with inter-
available for your vehicle at the time of pur- tant facts about the restraint system compo- connected electronic systems, can lead to
chase. Please be aware that your vehicle nents of the vehicle. the restraint systems no longer functioning
might not be equipped with all features The restraint systems are as intended.
described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
RSeat belts
(ETDs), for example, could deploy inadver-
RChild restraints tently or fail to deploy in accidents although
Additional protection potential is provided by: the deceleration threshold for air bag
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never
modify the restraint systems. Do not tam-
- Air bags
per with electronic components or their
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) software.
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
- Seat belt force limiter
restraint systems for infants and children,
RAir bag system components with see “Children in the vehi-
- Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp cle” (Y page 55).
- Passenger seat with Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
40
Safety and security
Occupant safety
SRS indicator lamp have the system checked; otherwise the Air bags
SRS may not deploy when needed in an
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
accident, which could result in serious or G Warning!
the ignition is switched on and in regular Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
intervals while the engine is running. This tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal
and unnecessarily which could also result
facilitates detection of system malfunctions. impacts (front air bags, knee bags) or side
in injury.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument impacts (head-thorax air bags). However,
In addition, improper work on the SRS cre-
cluster comes on when the ignition is no system available today can completely
ates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative
switched on and goes out no later than a few eliminate injuries and fatalities.
or causing unintended air bag deployment.
seconds after the engine has been started. The deployment of the air bags temporarily
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
The SRS components are in operational read- performed by qualified technicians. Con- releases a small amount of dust from the
iness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju-
the engine is running. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system rious to your health, nor does it indicate a
A malfunction in the system has been to accommodate a person with disabilities, fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
detected if the 1 indicator lamp: contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- some temporary breathing difficulty for
Rfails to go out after approximately 4 sec- ter or call our Customer Assistance Center people with asthma or other breathing trou-
onds after the engine is started at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes ble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
(1-800-367-6372) for details. of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Rdoes not come on at all If you have any breathing difficulty but can-
Rcomes on after the engine was started or not get out of the vehicle after the air bag
while driving inflates, then get fresh air by opening a win-
dow or door.
G Warning!
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp G Warning!
comes on while driving or does not come To reduce the risk of injury when the front
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected air bags inflate, it is very important for the
a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly driver and passenger to always be in a prop-
recommend that you contact an authorized erly seated position and to wear their seat
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to belts. Z
41
Safety and security
Occupant safety
For maximum protection in the event of a contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
collision always be in normal seated posi- Center. you make the buyer aware of this safety
tion with your back against the seat back- RDo not lean your head or chest close to information. Be sure to give the buyer this
rest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure the steering wheel or dashboard. Operator’s Manual.
it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering G Warning!
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside There is a possibility of a head-thorax air
speed and force, a proper seating position
the rim can increase the risk and poten- bag related injury if occupants, especially
and correct positioning of the hands on the
tial severity of hand/arm injury when the children, are not properly seated or
steering wheel will help to keep you at a
driver’s front air bag inflates. restrained when next to a head-thorax air
safe distance from the air bag. Occupants
who are not wearing their seat belt, are not RAdjust the passenger seat as far as pos- bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
seated properly or are too close to the air sible rearward from the dashboard when impact in order to do its job.
bag can be seriously injured or killed by an the seat is occupied. To help avoid the possibility of injury,
air bag as it inflates with great force instan- ROccupants, especially children, should please follow these guidelines:
taneously: never place their bodies or lean their (1) Occupants, especially children,
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in heads in the area of the door where the should never place their bodies
a position that is as upright as possible head-thorax air bag inflates. This could or lean their heads in the area of
with your back against the seat backrest. result in serious injuries or death should the door where the head-thorax
RMove
the head-thorax air bag be deployed. air bag inflates. This could result
the driver seat as far back as pos-
Always sit as upright as possible, wear in serious injuries or death
sible, still permitting proper operation of
the seat belt properly and use an appro- should the head-thorax air bag
vehicle controls. The distance from the
priately sized infant restraint, toddler be deployed.
center of the driver’s chest to the center
restraint, or booster seat recommended
of the air bag cover on the steering wheel (2) Always sit as upright as possible,
for the size and weight of the child.
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or properly use the seat belts, and
more. You should be able to accomplish Failure to follow these instructions can for children 12 years old and
this by adjusting the seat and steering result in severe injuries to you or other under, use an appropriately
wheel. If you have any difficulties, please occupants. sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recom-
42
Safety and security
Occupant safety
mended for the size and weight In case of other types of impacts and impacts use seat belts installed or supplied by an
of the child. below air bag deployment thresholds, air authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. RAir bags and ETDs contain Perchlorate
will then be protected to the extent possible
If you believe that, even with the use of material, which may require special han-
by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly
these guidelines, it would be safer for your dling and regard for the environment.
fastened seat belt is also needed to provide
passenger seat occupants to have the pas- Check with your local government’s dis-
the best possible protection in a rollover.
senger side head-thorax air bag deacti- posal guidelines. California residents,
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts. see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard-
vated, then deactivation can be carried out Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
upon your written request at an authorized ousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm.
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional air bags. RAir bags and ETDs are designed to func-
cost. tion on a one-time-only basis. An air bag
It is important to your safety and that of your
Please contact an local authorized Mer- or ETD that is deployed must be replaced.
passenger that you replace deployed air bags
cedes-Benz Center or call the Customer and repair any malfunctioning air bags to RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800- make sure the vehicle will continue to provide They could tear.
FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or Cus- supplemental crash protection for occu- RDo not make any modification that could
tomer Service (in Canada) at pants. change the effectiveness of the seat
1-800-387-0100 for details.
belts.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain Safety guidelines for the seat belt, RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this
frontal impacts (front air bags, knee bags) and Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
may severely weaken them. In a crash
in side impacts (head-thorax air bags) which and air bag
they may not be able to provide adequate
exceed preset deployment thresholds. Only
G Warning! protection.
in the event of such a situation will they pro-
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that RNo modifications of any kind may be
vide their supplemental protection.
have been subjected to stress in an acci- made to any components or wiring of the
The driver and passenger should always wear dent must be replaced and their anchor- SRS. This includes changing or removing
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible ing points must also be checked. Only any component or part of the SRS, the
for the air bags to provide their supplemental
installation of additional trim material,
protection. Z
seat covers, badges, etc. over the steer-
43
Safety and security
Occupant safety
ing wheel hub, passenger front air bag from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Front air bags
cover, outboard sides of the seat Center.
backrests, door trim panels, or door
G Observe Safety notes, see
RGiven the considerable deployment page 43.
frame trims, and installation of additional speed, required inflation volume, and the
electrical/electronic equipment on or material of the air bags, there is the pos-
near SRS components and wiring. Keep sibility of abrasions or other, potentially
area between air bags and occupant free more serious injuries resulting from air
of objects (e.g. packages, purses, bag deployment.
umbrellas, etc.).
RAir bag system components will be hot G Warning!
after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch Only use seat covers which have been
them. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
RNever place your feet on the instrument your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always may interfere with or prevent the deploy-
keep both feet on the floor in front of the ment of the head-thorax air bags. Contact 1 Driver air bag
seat. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for 2 Passenger air bag
RIn addition, improper repair work on the availability. 3 Knee bag (passenger side)
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS If you sell your vehicle, we strongly recom- 4 Knee bag (driver’s side)
inoperative or causing unintended air bag mend that you inform the subsequent owner The front air bags are designed to provide
deployment. Work on the SRS must that the vehicle is equipped with SRS and increased protection for the driver and pas-
therefore only be performed by qualified refer them to the applicable section in the senger against the risk of injuries to the head
technicians. Contact an authorized Mer- Operator’s Manual. and thorax.
cedes-Benz Center.
Driver and passenger air bags and knee bags
RFor your protection and the protection of
are deployed:
others, when scrapping the air bag unit Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
or ETD, our safety instructions must be
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
followed. These instructions are available
threshold
44
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rif the system determines that air bag The passenger air bag 2 will only be Head-thorax air bags
deployment can offer additional protection deployed if:
to that provided by the seat belt G Observe Safety notes, see
Rthe system, based on OCS weight sensor page 43.
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is in readings, detects that the passenger seat
use is occupied
Rindependently of the head-thorax air bags Rthe 75 indicator lamp in the
The front air bags in this vehicle have been center console is not lit (Y page 48)
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
the air bags to have different rates of inflation threshold
that are based on the vehicle deceleration
rate as assessed by the air bag control unit. Knee bags
On the passenger side, the front air bag The driver side knee bag 4 is located on the
deployment is additionally influenced by the driver side lower instrument panel. The pas-
passenger’s weight category as identified by senger side knee bag 3 is located on the 1 Head-thorax air bag
the Occupant Classification System (OCS) passenger side below the glove box. They are
(Y page 46). designed to operate together with the front When deployed, the head-thorax air bags are
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the air bags in certain frontal impacts exceeding designed to provide increased protection for
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required a preset deployment threshold. The knee the head and thorax (but not for the arms) on
for second stage inflation of the air bag. bags operate best in conjunction with prop- the side of the vehicle on which the impact
erly positioned and fastened seat belts. occurs.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset deploy- The head-thorax air bags are deployed:
ment thresholds. You will then be protected Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
by the fastened seat belts. Rinside impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
The front air bags will not deployed in the ment threshold
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
Rif the system determines that air bag
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt Z
the front air bags.
45
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is in Occupant Classification System lamp as an indication of whether or not the
use passenger is properly positioned.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Rindependently of the front air bags automatically turns the passenger front air G Warning!
Rindependently of the ETDs bag and passenger-side knee bag on or off If the 75 indicator lamp illu-
based on the classified occupant weight cat- minates when an adult or someone larger
The passenger head-thorax air bag 1 will
egory determined by weight sensor readings than a small individual is in the passenger
only deploy if the OCS senses that the pas-
from the passenger seat. seat, have the passenger re-position him-
senger seat is occupied and the impact
The system does not deactivate the passen- self or herself in the seat until the
exceeds a preset deployment threshold.
ger head-thorax air bag and the Emergency 75 indicator lamp goes out.
The head-thorax air bags are not deployed in
Tensioning Devices (ETDs). In the event of a collision, the air bag control
side impacts which do not exceed the sys-
Occupants must sit with the seat belt prop- unit will not allow passenger front air bag
tem’s deployment threshold.
erly fastened in a position that is as upright deployment when the OCS has classified
G Warning! as possible with their back against the seat the passenger seat occupant as weighting
Only use seat covers which have been backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for classified. If the occupant’s weight is trans- old child in a standard child restraint or if
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers ferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by the passenger seat is classified as being
may interfere with or prevent the deploy- leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be empty.
ment of the head-thorax air bags. Contact able to properly approximate the occupant’s When the OCS senses that the passenger
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for weight category. seat occupant is classified as being up to
availability. or less than the weight of a typical
i If your seat, including the trim cover and
12-month-old child in a standard child
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way,
restraint, the 75 indicator
take the vehicle to an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center. lamp will illuminate when the engine is
started and remain illuminated, indicating
Only seat accessories approved by Mer- that the passenger front air bag is deacti-
cedes-Benz may be used. vated.
Both the driver and the passenger should When the OCS senses that the passenger
always use the 75 indicator seat is classified as being empty, the
46
Safety and security
Occupant safety
75 indicator lamp will illumi- If the 75 indicator lamp is illu- The infant or child restraint must be prop-
nate when the engine is started and remain minated, the passenger front air bag is erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt
illuminated, indicating that the passenger deactivated and will not be deployed. fully in accordance with the child seat man-
front air bag is deactivated. If the 75 indicator lamp is not ufacturer’s instructions.
When the OCS senses that the passenger illuminated, the passenger front air bag is Occupants, especially children, should
seat occupant is classified as being heavier activated and will be deployed: always sit as upright as possible, wear the
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old Rin
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
the event of certain frontal impacts
child seated in a standard child restraint or sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment booster seat recommended for the size and
as being a small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult), the threshold weight of the child.
75 indicator lamp will illumi- Rindependently of the head-thorax air bag Children can be killed or seriously injured
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the by an inflating air bag. Note the following
If the passenger front air bag is deployed,
engine is started and then, depending on important information:
the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
occupant weight sensor readings from the RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit technology designed to deactivate the
75 indicator lamp illuminated, passenger front air bag in your vehicle
the passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe passenger’s weight category as iden-
when the system senses the weight of a
With the 75 indicator lamp tified by the OCS. typical 12-month-old child or less along
out, the passenger front air bag is acti- with the weight of a standard appropriate
vated. For information about air bag display mes- child restraint on the passenger seat.
When the OCS senses that the passenger sages (Y page 274).
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on
seat occupant is classified as an adult or G Warning! the passenger seat will be seriously
someone larger than a small individual, the Children 12 years old and under must be injured or even killed if the passenger
75 indicator lamp will illumi- seated and properly secured in an appro- front air bag inflates in a collision which
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the priate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or could occur under some circumstances,
engine is started and then go out, indicating booster seat recommended for the size and even with the air bag technology installed
that the passenger front air bag is acti- weight of the child. in your vehicle.
vated. Z
47
Safety and security
Occupant safety
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint 12-month-old child, the passenger front
on the passenger seat, make sure the air bag may or may not be activated.
75 indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, indicating that the passenger Deployment of the driver front air bag does
front air bag is deactivated. Should the not mean that the passenger front air bag also
75 indicator lamp not illu- should have deployed.
minate or go out while the restraint is The OCS may have determined:
installed, please check installation. Peri- Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
odically check the 75 indi- weight up to or less than that of a typical
cator lamp while driving to make sure the 12-month-old child seated in a standard
75 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint – both instances where the 1 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
nated. If the 75 indicator system suppresses deployment of the pas-
lamp goes out or remains out, do not senger front air bag even though the impact The 75 indicator lamp 1 will be
transport a child on the passenger seat met the criteria and was of sufficient
until the system has been repaired. illuminated, except with the SmartKey
severity to deploy the driver front air bag removed from the starter switch or with the
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on Rthat the seat was occupied by a small indi- starter switch in position 0.
the passenger seat will be seriously vidual (such as a young teenager or a small
injured or even killed if the passenger G Warning!
adult) or a child who weighs more than the
front air bag inflates. weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a If the 1 indicator lamp and the
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing standard child restraint – both of which are 75 indicator lamp are lit at the
child restraint on the passenger seat, instances where the system may suppress same time, there is a malfunction in the
move the seat as far back as possible, deployment of the passenger front air bag OCS. The passenger front air bag will be
use the proper child restraint recom- even though the impact met the criteria and deactivated in this case. Have the system
mended for the age, size and weight of was of sufficient severity to deploy the checked as soon as possible by qualified
the child, and secure child restraint with driver front air bag technicians. Contact an authorized Mer-
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the cedes-Benz Center.
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only have the seat repaired or replaced at
For children larger than the typical an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
48
Safety and security
Occupant safety
In order to ensure proper operation of the the 75 indicator lamp will illumi- Seat belts
air bag system and OCS nate and not go out.
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in G Warning! Safety notes
a position that is as upright as possible If the 75 indicator lamp does The use of seat belts and infant and child
with your back against the seat backrest. not illuminate, the system is not function- restraint systems is required by law in all 50
RWhile seated, an occupant should not ing. You must contact an authorized Mer- states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. ter-
position him/herself in such a way as to cedes-Benz Center before seating any child ritories and all Canadian provinces.
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted on the passenger seat. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
from the seat bottom as this may result For more information, see the “Practical occupants should have their seat belts fas-
in the OCS being unable to correctly hints” section (Y page 306). tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
approximate the occupant’s weight cat- For information on infants and children trav-
egory. G Warning!
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint
RRead and observe all warnings in this Never place anything between seat cushion systems for infants and children, see “Chil-
chapter. and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces dren in the vehicle” (Y page 55).
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom
of the child seat must make full contact G Warning!
with the passenger seat cushion. An incor- Always fasten your seat belt before driving
Occupant Classification System Self- off. Always make sure your passenger is
rectly mounted child seat could cause inju-
test properly restrained. You and your passen-
ries to the child in case of an accident,
After turning the SmartKey in the starter instead of increasing protection for the ger should always wear seat belts.
switch to position 1 or 2 the child. Failure to wear and properly fasten and
75 indicator lamp illuminates. If Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for position your seat belt greatly increases
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the installation of child seats. your risk of injuries and their likely severity
passenger seat and the system classifies the in an accident.
occupant as an adult, the 75 If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after can be considerably more severe without
approximately 6 seconds. your seat belt properly buckled. Without
If the seat is not occupied and the system your seat belt buckled, you are much more Z
classifies the passenger seat as being empty,
49
Safety and security
Occupant safety
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be G Warning! that could result in serious injuries in
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were case of an accident.
or killed. highly stressed in an accident must be REach occupant should wear their seat
In the same crash, the possibility of injury replaced and their anchoring points must belt at all times, because seat belts help
or death is lessened if you are properly also be checked. reduce the likelihood of and potential
wearing your seat belt. The air bags can Only use seat belts which have been severity of injuries in accidents, including
only protect as intended if the occupants approved by Mercedes-Benz. rollovers. The integrated restraint system
are properly wearing their seat belts. Do not make any modifications to the seat includes SRS (driver front air bag, knee
belts. This can lead to unintended activa- bags, passenger front air bag, head-
G Warning! thorax air bags), Emergency Tensioning
tion of the ETDs or to their failure to activate
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat when necessary. Device (ETD) and seat belt force limiters.
backrest in an excessively reclined position The system is designed to enhance the
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
as this can be dangerous. You could slide protection offered to properly belted
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide occupants in certain frontal (front air
not be able to provide adequate protection.
under it, the seat belt would apply force at bags, knee bags and ETD) and side (head-
the abdomen or neck. That could cause Have all work carried out only by qualified
thorax air bags and ETD) impacts which
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat back- technicians. Contact an authorized Mer-
exceed preset deployment thresholds.
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint cedes-Benz Center.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
when the wearer is in a position that is as
arm, against your neck or off your
upright as possible and the seat belt is
Proper use of seat belts shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body
properly positioned on the body.
would move too far forward. That would
G Warning!
G Warning! increase the chance of head and neck
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY injuries. The seat belt would also apply
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
RSeat belts can only work when used prop- too much force to the ribs or abdomen,
than there are seat belts available. Make
erly. Never wear seat belts in any other which could severely injure internal
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
way than as described in this section, as organs such as your liver or spleen.
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
person at a time. section is located as close as possible to
50
Safety and security
Occupant safety
the middle of the shoulder (it should not on the hips to avoid any possible pres- Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder sure on the abdomen. highly stressed in an accident must be
portion of the seat belt under your arm. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible is as upright as possible. Benz Center.
on your hips and not across the abdo- RCheck your seat belt during travel to
men. If the lap belt is positioned across make sure it is properly positioned. Fastening the seat belts
your abdomen, it could cause serious
RNever place your feet on the instrument
injuries in a crash. G Warning!
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or break- Always fasten your seat belt before driving
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
able objects in or on your clothing, such off. Always make sure your passengers is
seat.
as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these properly restrained. You and your passen-
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant ger should always wear seat belts.
might cause injuries.
restraints, toddler restraints, or children Failure to wear and properly fasten and
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted in booster seats, always follow the child position your seat belt greatly increases
snugly. Take special care of this when seat manufacturer’s instructions.
wearing loose clothing. your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one G Warning! If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. can be considerably more severe without
around a person and another person or They could tear. your seat belt properly buckled. Without
other objects at the same time.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in your seat belt buckled, you are much more
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In the door or in the seat adjustment mecha- likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
a crash, you would not have the full width nism. This could damage the seat belt. ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
of the seat belt to distribute impact Never attempt to make modifications to or killed.
forces. The twisted seat belt against your seat belts. This could impair the effective- In the same crash, the possibility of injury
body could cause injuries. ness of the seat belts. or death is lessened if you are properly
RPregnant women should also always use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may wearing your seat belt. The air bags can
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion severely weaken them. In a crash, they may only protect as intended if the occupants
should be positioned as low as possible not be able to provide adequate protection. are properly wearing their seat belts.
51
Safety and security
Occupant safety
G Warning! serious or even fatal injuries. The seat back- X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
Children 12 years old and under must be rest and seat belt provide the best restraint of the seat belt outlet.
seated and properly secured in an appro- when the wearer is in a position that is as X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
priately sized infant restraint, toddler upright as possible and the seat belt is across the top of your shoulder and the lap
restraint, or booster seat recommended for properly positioned on the body. portion across your hips.
the size and weight of the child. For addi- X Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it
tional information, see section “Children in clicks.
the vehicle”.
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in Releasing the seat belts
the child restraint.
X Press the seat belt release button
G Warning! (Y page 52).
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Allow the retractor to completely rewind
than there are seat belts available. Make the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
Never use a seat belt for more than one that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot
person at a time. get caught or pinched in the door or in the
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat
G Warning! 1 Loop for seat belt guidance belt and impair its effectiveness, and/or
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat 2 Latch plate cause damage to the door and/or door trim
backrest in an excessively reclined position 3 Buckle panel. Such damage is not covered by the
as this can be dangerous. You could slide 4 Seat belt release button
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
under it, the seat belt would apply force at Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the abdomen or neck. That could cause Center.
52
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system warning chime stops sounding, the seat The ETD is designed to activate in the follow-
belt telltale < stops flashing but contin- ing cases:
When the engine is started, the seat belt tell-
ues to be illuminated. Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
tale < will always illuminate for 6 seconds
to remind you and your passenger to fasten After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime the system’s preset deployment threshold
your seat belts. is reactivated and the seat belt telltale Rif the restraint systems are operational and
< is flashing again if the vehicle speed
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when functioning correctly, see 1 indicator
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
the engine is started, an additional warning lamp (Y page 41)
chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 sec- The seat belt telltale < will only go out if Rin certain vehicle rollovers if the system
onds or until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. both the driver’s and the passenger’s seat determines an additional degree of protec-
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are tion
passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
seat occupied) is not fastened with both door is opened. The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts are
doors closed, For more information, see “Practical fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
hints” (Y page 300). buckle).
Rthe seat belt telltale < remains illumi- In an impact, ETDs remove slack from the
nated for as long as either the driver’s or seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
passenger’s seat belt is not fastened. Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
seat belt force limiter
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds limiters, when activated, are employed to
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and help reduce the peak force exerted by the
< starts flashing and a warning chime seat belt force limiters. seat belts on occupants during a crash.
sounds with increasing intensity for a max- i ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
imum of 60 seconds or until the driver’s and position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
passenger’s seat belt are fastened.
ETDs do not pull occupants back toward
If you and/or your passenger release the the backrest.
seat belt during driving, the seat belt tell-
tale < starts flashing and the warning G Warning!
chime sounds as described before. An ETD that was activated must be
If the driver’s or the passenger’s seat belt replaced. Z
remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the
53
Safety and security
Occupant safety
For your safety, when disposing of the ETD G Observe Safety notes, see
allways follow our safety instructions. page 72.
These are available at any authorized Mer- Observe the following points:
cedes-Benz Center. RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
Correct driver seat adjustment the front air bag in steering wheel 1 as
possible, while still permitting proper oper-
G Warning! ation of vehicle controls.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle RAdjust seat 3 to a comfortable seating
control all seat, head restraint, steering position that still allows you to reach the
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as accelerator/brake pedal safely.
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
RSeat 3 must be adjusted so that you can
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
correctly fasten and position your
seat belt 2.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
is as nearly upright as possible.
1 Steering wheel RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
2 Seat belt edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
3 Seat your legs.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
X Properly position seat 3 (Y page 73) and
close to the head as possible and the cen-
head restraint (Y page 74).
ter of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under seat 3 or near
any moving parts while seat 3 is being
adjusted.
54
Safety and security
Occupant safety
X Properly position steering wheel 1 Children in the vehicle G Warning!
(Y page 77) manual adjustment, When leaving the vehicle, always remove
(Y page 77) electrical adjustment. Safety notes the SmartKey from the starter switch.
G Observe Safety notes, see If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
Always take the SmartKey with you and
page 76. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
vehicle:
Make sure: tended in the vehicle, even if they are
X Secure the child using an infant or child secured in a child restraint system, or with
RYou can reach steering wheel 1 with your restraint appropriate to the age and size of access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
arms slightly bent at the elbows. the child. unsupervised access to a vehicle could
RYou can move your legs freely. X Make sure the infant or child is properly result in an accident and or serious per-
RAll displays (including malfunction and indi- secured at all times while the vehicle is in sonal injury. The children could
cator lamps) on the instrument cluster are motion. Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
clearly visible. Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
X
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
Correctly fasten and position your
cold
seat belt 2 (Y page 51).
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident
G Observe Safety notes, see with vehicle equipment that can be oper-
page 49. ated even if the SmartKey is removed
Make sure: from the starter switch or removed from
RSeat belt 2 is always fitted snugly. the vehicle, such as seat adjustment,
steering wheel adjustment, or the mem-
RAdjust seat belt 2 so that the shoulder ory function.
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. If children open a door, they could injure
other persons or get out of the vehicle and
RPlace the lap portion of seat belt 2 as low injure themselves or be injured by following
as possible on your hips. traffic.
Z
55
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Do not expose the child restraint system to The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s seat belt retractor for secure fastening of Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
metal parts, for example, could become child restraints. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and
very hot, and the child could be burned on To fasten a child restraint, follow child 210.2.
these parts. restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull A statement by the child restraint manufac-
the shoulder belt out completely and let it turer of compliance with these standards can
G Warning! retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch- be found on the instruction label on the
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the eting sound can be heard to indicate that the restraint and in the instruction manual pro-
passenger compartment unless they are special seat belt retractor is activated. The vided with the restraint.
firmly secured in place. seat belt is now locked. Push down on child When using any infant restraint, toddler
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo restraint to take up any slack. restraint, or booster seat, make sure to care-
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle fully read and follow all manufacturer’s
of: and let the seat belt retract completely. The instructions for installation and use.
Rstrong braking maneuvers seat belt can again be used in the usual man- Please read and observe warning labels
Rsudden
ner. affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
changes of direction
Ran
G Warning! infant or child restraints.
accident
Never release the seat belt buckle while the G Warning!
For more information on loading, please refer vehicle is in motion, since the special seat Children 12 years old and under must be
to the “Storage compart- belt retractor will be deactivated. seated and properly secured in an appro-
ments” (Y page 204) chapter. priate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
The use of infant or child restraints is required
booster seat recommended for the size and
by law in all 50 states, the District of Colum-
weight of the child.
Infant and child restraint systems bia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian prov-
inces. The infant or child restraint must be prop-
G Observe Safety notes, see Infants and small children should be seated
erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt
page 55. fully in accordance with the child seat man-
in an appropriate infant or child restraint sys-
We recommend all infants and children be ufacturer’s instructions.
tem, which is properly secured by a lap-
properly restrained at all times while the vehi- shoulder belt in accordance with the manu- Occupants, especially children, should
cle is in motion. facturer’s instructions for the child restraint, always sit as upright as possible, wear the
56
Safety and security
Occupant safety
seat belt properly and use an appropriately installed, please check installation. Peri- During an accident, they could be crushed
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or odically check the 75 indi- between the occupant and seat belt.
booster seat recommended for the size and cator lamp while driving to make sure the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
weight of the child. 75 indicator lamp is illumi- significantly increased if the child restraints
Children can be killed or seriously injured nated. If the 75 indicator are not properly secured in the vehicle
by an inflating air bag. Note the following lamp goes out or remains out, do not and/or the child is not properly secured in
important information: transport a child on the passenger seat the child restraint.
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag until the system has been repaired. Children too big for a toddler restraint must
technology designed to deactivate the A child in a rear-facing child restraint on ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
passenger front air bag in your vehicle the passenger seat will be seriously tion shoulder belt across chest and
when the system senses the weight of a injured or even killed if the passenger shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
typical 12-month-old child or less along front air bag inflates. may be necessary to achieve proper seat
with the weight of a standard appropriate RIf you place a child in a forward-facing belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
child restraint on the passenger seat. child restraint on the passenger seat, until they reach a height where a lap/
RA move the seat as far back as possible, shoulder belt fits properly without a boos-
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
use the proper child restraint recom- ter.
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger mended for the age, size and weight of When the child restraint is not in use,
front air bag inflates in a collision which the child, and secure child restraint with remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
could occur under some circumstances, the vehicle’s seat belt according to the the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
even with the air bag technology installed child seat manufacturer’s instructions. from becoming a projectile in the event of
in your vehicle. For children larger than the typical an accident.
RIf
12-month-old child, the passenger front
you install a rear-facing child restraint
air bag may or may not be activated.
on the passenger seat, make sure the
75 indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, indicating that the passenger G Warning!
front air bag is deactivated. Should the Infants and small children should never
75 indicator lamp not illu- share a seat belt with another occupant.
minate or go out while the restraint is
57
Safety and security
Driving safety systems

Panic alarm i Canada only: Driving safety systems
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Introduction
the following two conditions: This section contains information about the
1. This device may not cause interference, following driving safety systems:
and RABS (Antilock Brake System)
2. this device must accept any interfer- RBAS (Brake Assist System)
ence received, including interference
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
i In winter operation, the maximum effec-
Any unauthorized modification to this tiveness of most of the driving systems
device could void the user’s authority to described in this section is only achieved
1 Â button operate the equipment. with winter tires, or snow chains as
X
required.
i USA only: Activating: Press and hold button 1 for at
This device complies with Part 15 of the least 1 second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- An audible alarm and flashing exterior Safety notes
lowing two conditions: lamps will operate briefly.
G Warning!
1. This device may not cause harmful
i Without the antenna on the left rear side The following factors increase the risk of
interference, and
of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey sig- accidents:
2. this device must accept any interfer- naling range for the panic alarm is consid- RExcessive speed, especially in turns
ence received, including interference erably reduced. The panic alarm then only
that may cause undesired operation. RWet and slippery road surfaces
functions if the SmartKey is held in close
Any unauthorized modification to this proximity towards the antenna base. RFollowing another vehicle too closely
device could void the user’s authority to X Deactivating: Press button 1 again. The driving safety systems described in this
operate the equipment. section cannot reduce these risks or pre-
or
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
58
Safety and security

on the vehicle. They cannot increase brak- ABS brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the
ing or steering efficiency beyond that regulating mode.
afforded by the condition of the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. page 58. pedal while you feel the pulsation.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can G Warning! Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
prevent accidents. Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with steady brake pedal pressure instead. namely braking power and the ability to steer
the driving safety systems described in this Pumping the brake pedal defeats the pur- the vehicle.
section must never be exploited in a reck- pose of the ABS and significantly reduces
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
less or dangerous manner which could braking effectiveness.
tion of hazardous road conditions and func-
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of tions as a reminder to take extra care while
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
others. driving.
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- lock during braking. This allows you to main-
vailing road and weather conditions and tain the ability to steer your vehicle. Emergency brake maneuver
keep a safe distance to other road users
The ABS is functional above a speed of X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
and objects on the street.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent pedal.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driv- of road surface conditions.
ing safety systems may also switch off.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will G Warning!
Observe indicator and warning lamps that If the ABS malfunctions, other driving
respond even to light brake pressure.
may come on as well as messages in the safety systems such as the BAS or the
multifunction display that may appear. The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the ESP® are also switched off. Observe indi-
ignition. It goes out when the engine is run- cator and warning lamps that may come on
ning. as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
Braking If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may
lock during hard braking, reducing steering
At the instant one of the wheels is about to capability and extending the braking dis-
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the tance.
59
Safety and security

For more information, see “What to do ESP® G Warning!
if …?” (Y page 298).
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
page 58. ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the
BAS instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is follows:
G Observe Safety notes, see operational as soon as the engine is running
RWhen
and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of driving off, apply as little throttle
page 58.
adhesive friction between the tires and the as possible.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
road surface) and handling. RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
very quickly, the BAS automatically provides The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spin- pedal.
full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
the braking distance. brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limit- prevailing road conditions.
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
ing the engine output, the ESP® works to
Failure to observe these guidelines could
the emergency braking situation is over. stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery
The ABS will prevent the wheels from lock- prevent accidents resulting from excessive
road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the
ing. speed.
vehicle during braking and steering maneu-
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes vers.
function again as normal. The BAS is then ! Because the ESP® operates automati-
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- cally, the engine and ignition must be shut
deactivated.
ment cluster comes on when you switch on off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0
G Warning! the ignition. It goes out when the engine is or 1) when the parking brake is being
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system running. tested on a brake test dynamometer or
still functions, but without the additional The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- when the vehicle is being towed with the
brake boost available that the BAS would ment cluster flashes when the ESP® is front axle raised.
normally provide in an emergency braking engaged. Active braking action through the ESP®
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
may increase.
system which is not covered by the Mer-
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
60
Safety and security

! The ESP® will only function properly if you Switching off the ESP® When you switch off the ESP®
use wheels of the recommended tire size
G Warning!
Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
as specified in the “Technical data” section
The ESP® should not be switched off during Rthe engine output is not limited, which
of this Operator’s Manual.
normal driving other than in the circum- allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
i The cruise control switches off automati- stances described below. Disabling the sys- into surfaces for better grip
cally when the ESP® engages. tem will reduce vehicle stability in driving Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a spin-
For more information, see the “Practical maneuvers. ning wheel
hints” section (Y page 272) and Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
(Y page 300). wheel is mounted. are braking
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off Ryou cannot activate the cruise control
Electronic Traction System (ETS)
the ESP® in driving situations in which it Rthe cruise control switches off if activated
G Observe Safety notes, see would be advantageous to have the drive
page 58. wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) is a better grip such as: more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
component of the ESP®. The ETS improves Rwhen driving with snow chains warning lamp v in the instrument clus-
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available trac- Rin deep snow ter flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
tion, especially under slippery road condi- stabilize the vehicle.
Rin sand or gravel
tions by applying the brakes to a spinning
wheel. G Warning!
When you switch off the ESP®, the ETS is still Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
enabled. aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning.
61
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Anti-theft systems
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the Immobilizer
drivetrain which is not covered by the Mer- The immobilizer prevents unauthorized per-
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. sons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Switching on the ESP® SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
X Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP® warn- SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster
1 ESP® switch goes out. Activating
You are now again in normal driving mode
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
X With the engine running, press ESP® switch with the ESP® switched on.
switch.
1 until the ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off. Deactivating
X Switch on the ignition.
G Warning!
When the ESP® warning lamp v is illu- i Starting the engine will also deactivate
minated continuously, the ESP® is switched the immobilizer.
off or is not operational due to a malfunc- In the event that the engine cannot be
tion. Vehicle stability in standard driving started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
maneuvers is reduced. charged), the system is not operational.
Adapt your speed and driving to the pre- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
vailing road conditions and to the non-oper- Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
ating status of the ESP®. USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
62
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system sound three times, a door or the trunk may
provided that you have subscribed to the not be properly closed.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a Tele Aid service and that it has been acti- Close the respective element and lock the
visual and audible alarm is triggered when vated properly, and that the necessary vehicle again.
someone opens: mobile phone, power supply and GPS cov-
Ra door X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
erage are available.
SmartKey.
Rthe trunk
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
Rthe hood acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
Rthe glove box that the alarm system is disarmed.
Rthe storage compartment under the arm- i The vehicle will lock and the alarm system
rest will rearm automatically again after approx-
The alarm will stay on even if the activating imately 40 seconds unless you open a door
element (a door, for example) is immediately or the trunk.
closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Rthe vehicle is raised Tow-away alarm
1 Indicator lamp
Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the Smart- and audible alarm will be triggered when
key
Key. someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Ra door is opened from the inside
The turn signal lamps flash three times and To cancel the alarm after it has been trig-
Rthe trunk is opened with the emergency gered, see “Canceling the
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
release button indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator alarm” (Y page 64).
To cancel the alarm after it has been trig- lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 sec-
gered, see “Canceling the system is armed. onds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
alarm” (Y page 64). tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 sec- provided that you have subscribed to the
times and the acoustic warning does not Z
onds, a call to the Response Center is ini- Tele Aid service and that it has been acti-
63
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
vated properly, and that the necessary Canceling the alarm
mobile phone, power supply and GPS cov-
erage are available. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the Smart-
X Press the k or j button on the
Key.
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm is armed automatically
after about 30 seconds.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until 1 Indicator lamp
you lock the vehicle again.
2 Tow-away alarm off switch
X Switch off the ignition.

Disabling tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, dis-
switch.
able the tow-away alarm feature before tow-
ing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface i You cannot disable the tow-away alarm
subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto feature with the ignition switched on.
train.
X Press button 2.
Indicator lamp 1 comes on briefly.
X Exit and lock the vehicle.
The tow-away alarm remains disabled until
you lock the vehicle again.
64
Controls in detail
Vehicle equipment .............................. 66 Manual transmission .......................... 97

Locking and unlocking ....................... 66 Automatic transmission ..................... 98
Starter switch positions ..................... 72 Instrument cluster ............................ 107
Seats .................................................... 72 Control system .................................. 108
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 76 Audio system .................................... 128
Mirrors ................................................. 79 Driving systems ................................ 184
Memory function ................................. 80 Climate control system .................... 187
Lighting ................................................ 81 Rear window defroster ..................... 198
Wipers .................................................. 87 Retractable hardtop ......................... 199
Power windows ................................... 89 Loading and storing .......................... 203
Driving and parking ............................ 91 Useful features ................................. 205
65
Controls in detail

Vehicle equipment Locking and unlocking RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- Notes RUse the mechanical key to unlock the
tures, standard or optional, potentially G Observe Safety notes, see driver’s door and the trunk.
available for your vehicle at the time of pur- page 55. RUse the mechanical key to lock the vehi-
chase. Please be aware that your vehicle When unlocking or locking the vehicle with cle.
might not be equipped with all features the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
described in this manual. RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
battery connections checked at an
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
its signal volume, contact an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center. If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mer-
lamps flash once, an acoustic signal sounds cedes-Benz Center.
once, the locking knobs in the doors move up,
and the anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
SmartKey
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times, an acoustic signal sounds Your vehicle comes supplied with two Smart-
three times, the locking knobs in the doors Keys, each with remote control and a remov-
move down, and the anti-theft alarm system able mechanical key.
is armed. The SmartKey locks and unlocks centrally:
All doors and the trunk must be closed. Rthe doors
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle Rthe trunk lid
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the Rthe fuel filler flap
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is Rthe glove box
drained. Rthe storage compartment under the arm-
rest
66
Controls in detail

i USA only: Factory setting
This device complies with Part 15 of the X Global unlocking: Press button k.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
1. This device may not cause harmful within approximately 40 seconds of unlock-
interference, and ing if neither door nor trunk is opened.
2. this device must accept any interfer-
X Global locking: Press button j.
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this Selective setting
SmartKey
device could void the user’s authority to If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
1 j Lock button operate the equipment. to reprogramm the SmartKey so that pressing
2 i Unlock button for trunk lid
button k only unlocks the driver’s door,
3 k Unlock button i Canada only:
interior lockable storage compartments and
4 Battery check lamp This device complies with RSS-210 of the fuel filler flap.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
i Without the antenna on the left rear side the following two conditions:
k and j simultaneously for approx-
of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey sig- 1. This device may not cause interference, imately 5 seconds until battery check lamp
naling range is considerably reduced. Hold and 4 (Y page 67) flashes twice.
the SmartKey in close proximity towards
2. this device must accept any interfer- The SmartKey will then function as follows:
the antenna base when locking or unlock-
ing the vehicle. X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
that may cause undesired operation of
the device. flap: Press button k once.
X Global unlocking: Press button k
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to twice.
operate the equipment. X Global locking: Press button j.
67
Controls in detail

Checking SmartKey batteries Loss of the SmartKey
X Press button j or k. If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
Battery check lamp 4 (Y page 67) comes you should do the following:
on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
batteries are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the battery check lamp does not come on X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries mechanical key to your car insurance com-
are discharged. pany immediately.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 311). X Have the mechanical lock replaced if nec-
essary. 1 Locking knob
i You can obtain the required batteries at
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be 2 Inside door handle
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
glad to supply you with a replacement. If the vehicle has previously been locked with
i If the batteries are checked within signal the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
range of the vehicle, pressing button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Opening the doors from the inside
j or k will lock or unlock the vehicle To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 64).
accordingly. You can open a locked door from the inside. X Pull on inside door handle 2 on the respec-
Open door only when conditions are safe to
tive door.
do so.
If the door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Opening a door causes its window to open
slightly. It will fully close when the door is
shut.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked

with ice or if the vehicle battery is dis-
charged. If you cannot shut a door, do not
force it or you could damage the door or
68
Controls in detail

side window. Fix whatever is affecting the Locking and unlocking from the inside You can open a locked door from inside at any
window before trying to shut the door. time. Open door only when conditions are
G Observe Safety notes, see safe to do so.
page 55. If the vehicle was previously locked with the
Automatic central locking You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside central locking switch:
using the central locking switches. This can
The doors and the trunk lock automatically Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
be useful, for example, if you want to lock the
when the vehicle is set into motion. the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
vehicle before starting to drive.
You can open a locked door from the inside. door is opened from the inside
The central locking switches do not lock or
Open door only when conditions are safe to Rand the SmartKey is set to selective set-
unlock the fuel filler flap or the interior stor-
do so. tings, only the door opened from inside is
age compartments, such as the glove box.
The doors are designed to unlock automati- unlocked
cally after an accident if the force of the
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
impact exceeds a preset threshold.
with the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the
The vehicle locks automatically when the igni- central unlocking switch.
tion is switched on and the wheels are turning
at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock Opening the trunk
yourself out when the vehicle is pushed or
towed or is on a test stand. G Warning!
You can deactivate the automatic central Make sure the trunk is closed when the
locking using the control system engine is running and while driving. Among
(Y page 124). 1 Central locking switch other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
2 Central unlocking switch
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
X Locking: Press central locking switch 1.
You can open the trunk when the vehicle is
If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. stationary and the retractable hardtop is fully
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking switch opened or closed.
Z
2.
69
Controls in detail

A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft Closing the trunk
(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
G Warning!
! Always make sure there is sufficient over-
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
head clearance.
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk 1 Handle
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be X Lower the trunk lid using handle 1.
especially careful when small children are
around. X Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on
trunk lid.
1 Handle G Observe Safety notes, see
page 55.
X Press and hold button i on the Smart- Trunk lid emergency release
Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
Key. You may lock yourself out. With the emergency release button, the trunk
The trunk lid is unlocked and opens slightly. If the vehicle was previously centrally locked lid can be opened from inside the trunk.
or with the SmartKey, the trunk lid will lock auto-
X Pull on handle 1. matically when closed. All turn signal lamps
The vehicle must be unlocked. flash three times to confirm locking.
X Lift the trunk lid and swing it open. i When the hardtop is retracted, it must be
completely lowered in the trunk before the
trunk can be closed (Y page 199).
70
Controls in detail

If the vehicle has previously been centrally X Close the trunk.
locked with the SmartKey, opening the trunk X Remove the mechanical key from the
from the inside using the emergency release SmartKey (Y page 308).
button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 64).
lock.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to posi-
Valet locking tion % and remove the mechanical key in
To deny any unauthorized person access to that position to lock the trunk.
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehi- The trunk remains locked even when the vehi-
1 Emergency release button cle, lock it separately with the mechanical cle is centrally unlocked.
key. Leave only the SmartKey less its You can only cancel the separate trunk lock-
X Briefly press emergency release button mechanical key with the vehicle. ing mode by means of the mechanical key.
1.
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly. lock.
X Push up the trunk lid to fully open. X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
The emergency release button unlocks the to neutral position $ and remove the
trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in mechanical key in that position to unlock
motion. the trunk.
Illumination of the emergency release button: You can now open the trunk.
RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after
opening the trunk.
RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after $ Neutral position
closing the trunk.
% Locked
The emergency release button does not
unlock the trunk, if the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or disconnected.
71
Controls in detail
Seats
Starter switch positions and turn signal indicator lamps unless acti- Seats
vated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a
SmartKey lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come Safety notes
on when the ignition is switched on, have it
G Observe Safety notes, see G Warning!
checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp
page 55. In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
in the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while driving, control all seat, head restraint, steering
refer to “Lamps in instrument clus- wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
ter” (Y page 297). well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch posi-
tion 0 for an extended period of time, it can G Warning!
no longer be turned in the starter switch. In
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
remove SmartKey from the starter switch and
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
reinsert.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
The steering is locked when the SmartKey is
backrest in an excessively reclined position
Starter switch removed from the starter switch.
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
} For removing SmartKey ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
Vehicles with automatic transmission: starter switch, the vehicle battery may not under it, the seat belt would apply force at
Gear selector lever must be in park posi- be sufficiently charged. the abdomen or neck. That could cause
tion P. RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest
$ Power supply for some electrical consum- if necessary. and seat belts provide the best restraint
ers, e.g. radio when the wearer is in a position that is as
RGet a jump start.
% Ignition (power supply for all electrical upright as possible and seat belts are prop-
consumers) and driving position To prevent accelerated vehicle battery dis- erly positioned on the body.
& Starting position
charge or a completely discharged vehicle
battery, always remove the SmartKey from
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps the starter switch when the engine is not in
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, operation.
72
Controls in detail
Seats
G Warning! restraint, or booster seat recommended for Manual seat adjustment
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can the size and weight of the child. For addi-
correctly fasten your seat belt. tional information, see section “Children in
Observe the following points: the vehicle”.
RAdjust
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
the seat backrest until your arms
significantly increased if the child restraints
are slightly angled when holding the
are not properly secured in the vehicle
steering wheel.
and/or the child is not properly secured in
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating the child restraint.
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible Seat adjustment
with the driver still able to operate the 1 Handle for seat fore and aft adjustment
controls properly. The seats can be adjusted either manually or 2 Handle for seat height adjustment
electrically, depending on the vehicle’s equip-
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as 3 Handle for seat backrest tilt adjustment
ment.
close to the head as possible and the
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Pull handle
center of the head restraint supports the ! When moving the seats, make sure there
back of the head at eye level. are no items in the footwell or behind the 1.
RNever place hands under the seat or near seats. Otherwise, you could damage the X Slide the seat to the desired position.
any moving parts while a seat is being seats. X Allow handle 1 to reengage with an audi-
adjusted. ble click.
Failure to do so could result in an accident X Check for proper engagement before driv-
and/or serious personal injury. ing.
X Seat height: Pull or push handle 2 up or
G Warning!
down and adjust the seat height until your
Children 12 years old and under must be
legs are lightly supported.
seated and properly secured in an appro-
priately sized infant restraint, toddler X Seat backrest tilt: Pull handle 3 and Z
adjust the seat backrest until your arms are
73
Controls in detail
Seats
slightly angled when holding the steering 2 Seat height Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
wheel. 3 Seat backrest tilt close to the head as possible and the center
X Release handle 3 when the desired seat 4 Seat cushion tilt of the head restraint supports the back of
backrest tilt is reached. the head at eye level. This will reduce the
When you hear an audible click, the seat i The memory function (Y page 80) lets potential for injury to the head and neck in
backrest is again fixed into place. you store the settings for the seat position the event of an accident or similar situation.
together with the settings for the steering Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view head restraints. Head restraints are
Power seat mirrors. intended to help reduce injuries during an
G Warning! accident.
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
The power seats can be operated at any switch forward or backward in direction of
time. Therefore, do not leave children unat- arrow 1.
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch for-
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
ward or backward in direction of arrow
access to a vehicle could result in an acci-
3.
dent and/or serious personal injury.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow 2.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow 4 until your
upper legs are lightly supported.
X Adjust the height of head restraints man-
Head restraint height ually by pulling them upwards or pushing
G Warning! them downwards.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
74
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar support Seat heating X Continue pressing switch 1 until desired
seat heating level is reached.
You can adjust the contour of the seat’s lum-
bar support to help enhance support to your X Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedly
spine. until all indicator lamps go out.
If one or more of the indicator lamps in the
seat heating switch 1 are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage available since too many
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat
heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
1 Seat heating switch available.
The red indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which heating level you have AIRSCARF neck-level heating
1 Upper seat curvature selected.
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides
2 Lower seat curvature The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) the area surrounding the occupants’ necks
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes. with a heated air stream flowing from open-
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level ings in the head restraints.
X Turn adjustment wheels 1 and 2 until 1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
you have reached the desired seat curva- G Warning!
The seat heating automatically switches off
ture. When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-
after approximately 20 minutes.
level heating, the air streaming from the
openings may be very hot. When in close
X Switching on: Press switch 1. proximity to the openings, you could be
Three red indicator lamps in the switch seriously burned. To help avoid serious per-
come on. sonal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a
lower heating level.
75
Controls in detail

ate for approximately 10 seconds to cool Multifunction steering wheel
down the heater elements.
If one or more indicator lamps on AIRSCARF Safety notes
switch 1 are flashing, there is insufficient G Warning!
voltage available since too many electrical Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
consumers are turned on. The AIRSCARF ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
neck-level heating switches off automatically. ing, or driving without the steering wheel
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating will switch adjustment feature locked could cause the
back on again automatically as soon as suffi- driver to lose control of the vehicle.
cient voltage is available. The electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 AIRSCARF switch feature can be operated at any time. There-
fore, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
X Switching on: Press AIRSCARF switch 1 vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
for the desired side. vehicle could result in an accident and/or
All three indicator lamps on respective AIR- serious personal injury.
SCARF switch 1 come on. After a pre-
Make sure
heating time of approximately 7 seconds,
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
the blower starts.
arms slightly bent at the elbows
X Press AIRSCARF switch 1 repeatedly until
Ryou can move your legs freely
the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the
corresponding seat is reached. Rall displays (including malfunction and indi-
X Switching off: Press AIRSCARF switch cator lamps) on the instrument cluster are
1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps on clearly visible
AIRSCARF switch 1 go out.
After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-level
heating, the AIRSCARF fan continues to oper-
76
Controls in detail

Steering wheel adjustment, manual Steering wheel adjustment, electrical Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and exit-
ing the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its
uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
of the control system (Y page 124).
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
1 Release handle 1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down 2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down activated.
3 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out To stop steering wheel movement, move
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move steering wheel adjustment stalk or press
X Unlocking: Pull release handle 1 out to stalk in direction of arrows 1. one of the memory position buttons or
its stop limit. X Adjusting steering wheel up or down: memory button M.
X Move steering wheel to the desired posi- Move stalk in direction of arrows 2. Do not leave children unattended in the
tion. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
i The memory function (Y page 80) lets cle. Children could open the driver’s door
X Locking: Push release handle 1 back to you store the settings for the steering and unintentionally activate the easy-
its original position. wheel together with the settings for the entry/exit feature, which could result in an
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely seat position and the exterior rear view mir- accident and/or serious personal injury.
locked by trying to move it up and down as rors.
well as in and out before driving off. With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel Z
will also return to its last set position when
77
Controls in detail

you insert the SmartKey into the starter Heated steering wheel temperature of the steering wheel is above
switch. 95‡ (35†).
The steering wheel heating warms up the
i The last set steering wheel position is When these conditions do not apply any-
leather area of the steering wheel.
stored when the ignition is switched off or more, steering wheel heating continues.
the position is stored in memory X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
(Y page 80). stalk in direction of arrow 3.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or goes out in
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when case of power surge or undervoltage or if
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
in starter switch position 0 or 1.
i The steering wheel heating switches off
i When the current position for the steering
automatically when you remove the Smart-
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the 1 Switching on Key from the starter switch.
steering wheel will no longer be able to
2 Indicator lamp
move upward when the easy-entry/exit For information on steering wheel, see “Mul-
feature is activated. 3 Switching off tifunction steering wheel” (Y page 108).
The adjustment procedure is briefly inter- X Switch on the ignition.
rupted when the engine is started.
X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of
G Warning! stalk in direction of arrow 1.
Let the system complete the adjustment Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must i The steering wheel heating is temporarily
be completed before setting the vehicle in suspended while indicator lamp 2
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel remains on when the temperature of the
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose vehicle interior is above 86‡ (30†) or if the
control of the vehicle.
78
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Mirrors X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
moving lever towards the windshield. button
Notes The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mir-
rors before driving so that you have a good X Press button 1 for the driver’s side exte-
view of the road and traffic conditions. Exterior rear view mirrors rior rear view mirror or button 3 for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
G Warning!
The indicator lamp in the respective button
Interior rear view mirror Exercise care when using the passenger- comes on for approximately 10 seconds.
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror man- If you do not make adjustments to the
surface is convex (outwardly curved sur-
ually. selected exterior rear view mirror within
face for a wider field of view). Objects in
For more information, see “Auto-dimming mirror are closer than they appear. Check 10 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
rear view mirrors” (Y page 80). your interior rear view mirror or glance over You will then have to select the desired
your shoulder before changing lanes. exterior rear view mirror again before any
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare posi- adjustments can be made. Adjustments
tion can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X Press adjustment button 2 up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly

hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror but- rear view mirrors will be heated automati-
ton cally.
2 Adjustment button
79
Controls in detail
Memory function
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors Memory function
The reflection brightness of the exterior rear Notes
view mirror on the driver’s side and the inte-
rior rear view mirror will respond automati- With the memory function you can store up
cally to glare when the ignition is switched on to three different configurations.
and incoming light from headlamps falls on Each stored position on the driver’s side
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror. includes the following settings:
The rear view mirrors will not react if reverse RSeat position
gear R is engaged or the interior lighting is RSteering wheel position
switched on.
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position 1 Memory button M
G Warning!
The auto dimming function does not react G Warning! 2 Memory position button
if incoming light is not aimed directly at Do not activate the memory function while
sensors in the interior rear view mirror. driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose Storing positions into memory
The interior rear view mirror and the exte-
rior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do control of the vehicle. X Adjust the seats, on the driver’s side also
not react, for example, if the wind screen is the steering wheel and exterior rear view
Each stored position on the passenger side
installed. mirrors, to the desired positions.
includes the setting of the seat position.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles X Press memory button M.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, X Release memory button M and press mem-
you may not be able to observe traffic con- ory position button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 sec-
ditions and could cause an accident. onds.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
80
Controls in detail
Lighting
Recalling positions from memory Lighting Exterior lamp switch
X Press and hold desired memory position Notes
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, on the
driver’s side also the steering wheel and i If you drive in countries where vehicles
exterior rear view mirrors, have completely drive on the other side of the road than the
moved to the stored positions. country where the vehicle is registered, you
must have the headlamps modified for
i Releasing the memory position button symmetrical low beams. Relevant informa-
stops movement to the stored positions tion can be obtained at any authorized Mer-
immediately. cedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon

headlamps: $ a Standing lamps, left
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor the % g Standing lamps, right
vehicle’s steering angle and speed, then & M Off
automatically shift their beams to either Daytime running lamp mode
side to better follow the curvature of the ( U Automatic headlamp mode
road ahead, increasing usable illumination Daytime running lamp mode
over conventional headlamps.
) C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
* B Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps
, ¥ Front fog lamps
. † Rear fog lamp
i If you hear a warning signal you have for-

gotten to switch off the low-beam head- Z
81
Controls in detail
Lighting
lamps or the parking lamps before opening RSide marker lamps In low ambient lighting conditions, only
the driver’s door. RInstrument panel lamps switch from position U to B with the
In addition, the message Switch Off RGreen indicator lamp C in the exterior
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Lights appears in the multifunction dis- Switching from U to B will briefly
lamp switch
play. switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
Switch off the low-beam headlamps or the X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp driving in low ambient lighting conditions
parking lamps. switch to position M. may result in an accident.
If the message Switch off lights or The automatic headlamp feature is only an
remove key appears in the multifunction Automatic headlamp mode aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
display remove the SmartKey from the for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
starter switch or switch off the headlamps. The following lamps come on and go out auto- all times.
matically depending on the brightness of the
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps ambient light: X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
when leaving the vehicle may result in a RLow-beam headlamps switch to position U.
discharged battery. RTail
With the SmartKey in starter switch posi-
and parking lamps
tion 1, the tail and parking lamps, the
RLicense plate lamps
Low-beam headlamps license plate lamps and the side marker
RSide marker lamps lamps will come on and go out depending
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on on the brightness of the ambient light.
and off with the exterior lamp switch using the G Warning! When the engine is running the low-beam
manual headlamp mode. If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp the headlamps will not automatically come license plate lamps and the side marker
switch to position B. on under foggy conditions. lamps will come on and go out depending
The following lamps come on: To minimize risk to you and to others, action the brightness of the ambient light.
RLow-beam headlamps vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp Canada only:
switch to B when driving or when traffic High-beam headlamps are only available with
RTail and parking lamps and/or ambient lighting conditions require the exterior lamp switch in position B.
RLicense plate lamps you to do so.
82
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp When the engine is running, and you turn the
switch to position B to permit activation exterior lamp switch to position C or
In Canada the daytime running lamp mode is
of the high-beam headlamps. B, the manual headlamp mode has prior-
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
When the engine is running, and you ity over the daytime running lamp mode.
In the USA the daytime running lamp mode is
deactivated by default. Activate the daytime Rshift from a driving position to neutral posi- The corresponding exterior lamps come on
running lamp mode using the control system, tion N or park position P with the vehicle at (Y page 81).
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode a standstill (vehicles with automatic trans-
(USA only)” (Y page 122). mission), the low-beam headlamps will go Fog lamps
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position out with a delay of 3 minutes.
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
M or U. Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position exterior lamp switch in position U. To
When the engine is running, the low-beam C, the low-beam headlamps, the tail switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior
headlamps come on. and parking lamps, the license plate lamps lamp switch to position B first.
and the side marker lamps come on.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the fol- G Warning!
lowing lamps will come on additionally: Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
RTail and parking lamps B, the manual headlamp mode has pri- only switch from position U to B
ority over the daytime running lamp mode. with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
The corresponding exterior lamps come on location.
RSide marker lamps (Y page 81). Switching from U to B will briefly
With the daytime running lamp mode acti- switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
vated and the engine running, you cannot USA only
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. With the exterior lamp switch in position may result in an accident.
M, you cannot switch on the high-beam
Canada only headlamps. Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
With the exterior lamp switch in position The high-beam flasher is available at all times. and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
M or U, you cannot switch on the high- lamps should only be used in conjunction with
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
beam headlamps. low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
switch to position B or U to permit
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regard-
activation of the high-beam headlamps. Z
ing permissible lamp operation.
83
Controls in detail
Lighting
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Combination switch High-beam flasher
C or B (Y page 81).
X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the briefly in direction of arrow 2.
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The green indicator lamp ¥ in the exte- Turn signals
rior lamp switch comes on.
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps and
the yellow indicator lamp † in the exte-
rior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog 1 High beam
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to 2 High-beam flasher
its stop.
High beam
Locator lighting and night security illu- X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 1 Turn signals, right
mination B (Y page 81). 2 Turn signals, left
Locator lighting and night security illumina- X Switching on: Push the combination X Press the combination switch in direction
tion are described in the “Control system” switch in direction of arrow 1. of arrow 1 or 2.
section, see “Setting locator light-
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp The corresponding turn signal indicator
ing” (Y page 122) and “Setting night security
A in the instrument cluster comes on. lamp L or K in the instrument clus-
illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off fea-
ture)” (Y page 123). X Switching off: Pull the combination switch ter flashes.
in direction of arrow 2 to its original posi- The combination switch resets automatically
tion. after major steering wheel movements.
84
Controls in detail
Lighting
i To signal minor directional changes such X Switching on: Press hazard warning Headlamp cleaning system
as changing lanes, press combination flasher switch 1.
switch only to point of resistance and With the engine running the headlamps will
All turn signal lamps are flashing. automatically be cleaned with a high-pres-
release. The corresponding turn signal
lamps will flash three times. i With the hazard warning flasher activated sure water jet when you have
and the combination switch set for either Rswitched on the headlamps
left or right turn, only the respective left or and
Hazard warning flasher right turn signals will operate when the igni- Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the wind-
The hazard warning flasher can be switched tion is switched on.
shield with washer fluid five times
on at all times, even with the SmartKey X Switching off: Press hazard warning
When you switch off the headlamps, the coun-
removed from the starter switch. flasher switch 1 again. ter resets.
The hazard warning flasher comes on auto- For information on filling up the washer res-
matically when an air bag deploys. i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard ervoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
warning flasher switch 1 once to switch cleaning system” (Y page 228).
off.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the direc-
tion into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin low ambient lighting conditions
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
Rat driving speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off
Z
85
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on will also go out automatically depending on Interior lighting
the steering angle and vehicle speed.
X Make sure the engine is running.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem-
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position porarily come on on both sides of the vehicle
B or U (Y page 81). if you turn the steering wheel in one direction
or and then again in the other direction shortly
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode thereafter.
(Y page 83). The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes. After-
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
ward, it goes out even if the turn signal is still
depending on whether you are turning left
switched on.
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If 1 ð Interior lighting on/off
you have switched on the turn signal for Switching off
2 ¡ Automatic control on/off
one side but turn the steering wheel in the X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
other direction, the corner-illuminating 3 X Right reading lamp on/off
front fog lamp comes on on the side of the or 4 X Left reading lamp on/off
turn signal. X Steer straight ahead.
or The front fog lamp goes out. Automatic control
X Turn steering wheel in desired direction. i There may be a brief delay before the cor- X Activating: Press switch ¡.
Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the ner-illuminating front fog lamps go out. The interior lighting comes on in darkness,
side of your steering direction comes on.
when you:
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp oppo- Runlock the vehicle
site to your steering direction comes on.
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
switch
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on Ropen a door
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating X Deactivating: Press switch ¡.
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
86
Controls in detail
Wipers
The interior lighting goes out after a preset Emergency accident lighting Wipers
time (Y page 124).
If the interior lighting is set to automatic, the Notes
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps interior lighting is activated automatically if
go out automatically after approximately the vehicle is involved in an accident. ! Do not operate the wipers when the wind-
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed X Switching off: Press switch ¡.
shield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a
or in starter switch position 0. windshield might scratch the glass and/or
or damage the wiper blades when wiping
X Press hazard warning flasher switch occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary
Manual control (Y page 85). to operate the wipers in dry weather con-
! An interior lamp switched on manually ditions, always operate the wipers with
does not go out automatically. washer fluid.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with
the engine turned off could result in a dis-
charged battery.
X Switching on/off interior lighting: Press
switch ð.
i The footwell lighting is switched on and

off simultaneously with the manual control.
The standard reading lamps are located to the
left and right of the overhead control panel. Combination switch
Reading lamps as part of the interior lighting 1 Single wipe
package are located on the lower edge of the Wiping with washer fluid
interior rear view mirror.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
X Switching on/off reading lamps: Press
respective switch X. X Switch on the ignition.
87
Controls in detail
Wipers
Windshield wipers the rain sensor or optical effects may cause or
the windshield wipers to wipe in an unde- Rthe wiper setting is changed using the com-
Switching windshield wipers on/off sired fashion. This could then damage the bination switch
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
0 Windshield wipers off windshield. You should therefore switch off
the windshield wipers when weather con- Single wipe
I Intermittent wiping ditions are dry. X Press the combination switch briefly in
Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wiping direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
II Normal wiper speed
interval is dependent on wetness of wind- point.
III Fast wiper speed shield. After the initial wipe, pauses between The windshield wipers wipe one time with-
wipes are automatically controlled by the rain out washer fluid.
sensor.
X Turn the combination switch in direction of X Turn the combination switch to position I.
arrow 2 to the desired position, depend- Wiping with washer fluid
ing on the intensity of the rain. Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
X Press the combination switch in direction
vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
of arrow 1 past the resistance point.
This protects persons getting into or out of
Intermittent wiping the vehicle from being sprayed. The windshield wipers operate with washer
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all fluid.
! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leave
windshield wipers on an intermittent set- doors are closed and i To prevent smears on the windshield or
ting when the vehicle is taken to an auto- Rthe clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
matic car wash or during windshield clean- manual transmission) washer fluid every now and then even when
ing. Windshield wipers will operate in the or it is raining.
presence of water sprayed on the wind- Rthe automatic transmission is in drive posi- For information on filling up the washer res-
shield, and windshield wipers may be dam- tion D or reverse gear R (vehicles with ervoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
aged as a result. automatic transmission) cleaning system” (Y page 228).
! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have set For information on cleaning the headlamps
intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 85).
88
Controls in detail
Power windows
Problems with wipers Power windows automatic reversal function will not oper-
ate.
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers Opening and closing
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off imme- The closing of the door windows can be
The windows are opened and closed electri- immediately halted by releasing the switch
diately.
cally. The switches for all windows are located or, if the switch was pressed past the resist-
RFor safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
on the driver’s door. The switch for operating ance point and released, by pressing or
safe location, and the passenger-side windows is located on the pulling the respective switch.
- remove the SmartKey from the starter passenger door. The closing of the rear side windows can be
switch
G Warning! immediately halted by releasing the switch.
- engage the parking brake When closing the windows, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being harmed G Observe Safety notes, see
before attempting to remove any block-
by the closing procedure.
page 55.
age.
Remove blockage. The door windows are equipped with the i You can also open or close the windows
RTurn express operation and automatic reversal using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
the windshield wipers on again.
function. If in express operation mode a feature” (Y page 200) and “Convenience
If the windshield wipers fail to function at door window encounters an obstruction closing feature” (Y page 200).
all with the combination switch in position that blocks its path, the automatic reversal
I, function will stop the door window and i After switching off the ignition or remov-
Rset the combination switch to the next open it slightly. ing the SmartKey from the starter switch,
higher wiper speed you can operate the windows until you
The door windows operate differently when
open a door. If no door was opened you can
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at the switch is pressed and held. See the
operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz “Closing by pressing and holding the
Center switch” section for details.
If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button j on the SmartKey the
89
Controls in detail
Power windows
X Express operation: Press or pull switch If the door window is blocked again and opens
1 or 2 past the resistance point and slightly:
release. X Immediately after the door window was
The corresponding door window opens or blocked, pull the respective switch
closes completely. upwards until the door window is fully
X Stopping during Express operation: closed.
Press or pull the respective switch again. G Warning!
Pressing and holding the switch to close the
Closing by pressing and holding the
door window immediately after it had been
switch
blocked two times will cause the door win-
1 Left door and rear side window G Warning! dow to close without any reversal function
2 Right door and rear side window Make sure that nobody can become trap- for as long as you hold the switch.
ped and be seriously or even fatally injured
Door windows when closing a door window with increased
force or without automatic reversal func- Opening and closing the rear side win-
X Switch on the ignition. tion. dows when the hardtop is closed
X Opening/Closing: Press or pull and hold X Opening: Open the door window.
switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point. If the upward movement of a door window is
X Press switch 1 or 2 again.
The corresponding door window will move blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly.How- The corresponding rear side window will
downwards or upwards until you release
ever, the door window will exert greater force open completely.
the switch.
before reversing than when the door window X Closing: Close the door window.
is closed in express operation. Please exer-
X Pull and hold switch 1 or 2.
cise caution!
The corresponding rear side window will
X Immediately after the door window has
move upwards until you release the switch.
stopped because it was blocked, pull the
respective switch upwards until the door
window is fully closed.
90
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

Synchronizing power windows Driving and parking Starting the engine
The windows must be synchronized after the Safety notes G Warning!
battery has been disconnected or if the win- Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
dows cannot be fully closed (Express opera- G Warning!
your health. All exhaust gas contains car-
tion). Make sure absolutely no objects are bon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
Each power window must be synchronized obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. cause unconsciousness and possible
separately. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- death.
X Close all doors.
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets
Do not run the engine in confined areas
in the footwell, make sure the pedals still
X Switch on the ignition. (such as a garage) which are not properly
have sufficient clearance.
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
X Pull and hold switch 1 or 2 (Y page 89) During sudden driving or braking maneu- fumes are entering the vehicle while driv-
until the respective window is closed. vers the objects could get caught between ing, have the cause determined and cor-
The window opens again slightly. the pedals. You could then no longer brake rected immediately. If you must drive under
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents these conditions, drive only with at least
X Pull and hold the respective switch once and injury. one window fully open at all times.
more immediately until the window is com-
pletely closed. G Warning!
X Hold the respective switch for approxi- With the engine not running, there is no
mately 1 second. power assistance for the brake and steer-
The window is synchronized. ing systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
91
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

Manual transmission Automatic transmission i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You can also use the “touch-start” function.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and release it again immediately.
The engine then starts automatically.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch posi-
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
tion 0 for an extended period of time, it can
no longer be turned in the starter switch. In
Â Reverse gear Á Park position with gear selector lever lock
this case, the steering is locked.
$ to * Forward gears Â Reverse gear
X To unlock, remove the SmartKey from the
For more information, see “Manual transmis- À Neutral position
starter switch and reinsert.
sion” (Y page 97). ¿ Drive position
X Depress the brake pedal. For more information, see “Automatic trans- The engine does not start. You can hear
X Make sure the manual transmission is in mission” (Y page 98). the starter.
the neutral position (no gear selected). X Make sure the automatic transmission is in There could be a malfunction in the engine
park position P. electronics or in the fuel supply system.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
Otherwise the engine cannot be started
Starting position 0 and repeat the starting proce-
due to the integrated safety interlock.
dure.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
position 3 (Y page 72) and hold until the
engine starts.
92
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

If the engine does not start after several start- Driving off brake and drivetrain wear which is not cov-
ing attempts: ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
X
G Warning! ranty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could i Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- matic central locking system engages and
The engine does not start. You cannot
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- the locking knobs in the doors move down.
hear the starter.
vent this type of loss of control. The automatic door lock feature can be
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
deactivated (Y page 124).
X Get a jump start (Y page 330).
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
If the engine will not start despite a jump speeds. Running a cold engine at high Manual transmission
start: engine speeds may shorten the service life
of the engine. This is not covered by the X Depress the brake pedal.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The starter has been exposed to excessive ! If you hear a warning signal and the mes- ! Only shift the manual transmission into
temperatures. sage Release Parking Brake appears in reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.
X Let the starter cool for about two minutes.
the multifunction display when driving off, Otherwise the manual transmission could
you have forgotten to release the parking be damaged.
X Repeat the starting procedure. brake.
X Shift the manual transmission into 1st gear
If the engine does not start after several start- Release the parking brake.
or reverse gear R.
ing attempts:
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may X Release the brake pedal.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz cause serious damage to the drivetrain
Center or call Roadside Assistance. X If engaged, release the parking brake.
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. X Simultaneously slowly release the clutch
pedal and carefully depress the accelerator
! Simultaneously depressing the accelera- pedal.
tor pedal and applying the brakes reduces
engine performance and causes premature
93
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. i Shifting the automatic transmission out of Problems while driving
This may result in serious engine damage park position P is only possible with the
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz brake pedal depressed. The engine runs erratically and misfires
Limited Warranty. Only depressing the brake pedal releases
RAn ignition cable may be damaged.
Shift gear in a timely manner. the gear selector lever lock.
RThe engine electronics may not be oper-
X Wait for the gear selection process to com-
Automatic transmission ating properly.
plete before setting the vehicle in motion.
RUnburned gasoline may have entered the
G Warning! X Release the brake pedal.
catalytic converter and damaged it.
It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans- X If engaged, release the parking brake.
mission out of park position P or neutral X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X Give very little gas.
position N if the engine speed is higher than X
After a cold start, the automatic transmission Have the problem checked at an authorized
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
shifts at a higher engine revolution. This Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could allows the catalytic converter to reach its
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone operating temperature earlier. The coolant temperature is above
or something. Only shift into gear when the For more information on driving, see “Driving 248‡ (120†)
engine is idling normally and when your instructions” (Y page 253).
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
the engine.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the as possible.
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the auto- X Turn off the engine immediately.
matic transmission could be damaged. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Depress the brake pedal. X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
The gear selector lever lock is released. necessary (Y page 227).
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive

position D or reverse gear R.
94
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

In case of accident Parking RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
If the vehicle is leaking fuel: G Warning! from the starter switch.
X Do not start the engine under any circum- Do not park this vehicle in areas where
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
stances. combustible materials such as grass, hay
vehicle when leaving.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the or leaves can come into contact with the
roadway. hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. G Warning!
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
To reduce the risk of serious personal Manual transmission:
If the extent of the damage cannot be deter- injury, or damage to the vehicle or the vehi- Wait until the vehicle is stationary before
mined: cle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle move- removing the SmartKey from the starter
ment, always do the following before switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
turning off the engine and leaving the vehi- the SmartKey is removed from the starter
Center or call Roadside Assistance. switch.
cle:
If no damage can be determined on the
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
Rmajor assemblies
REngage the parking brake. Parking brake
Rfuel system
RManual transmission: Shift the manual G Warning!
Rengine mount: transmission into 1st gear or reverse Engaging the parking brake while the vehi-
X Start the engine in the usual manner. gear R. cle is in motion can cause the rear wheels
RAutomatic transmission: Shift the auto- to lock up. You could lose control of the
matic transmission into park position P. vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,
RSlowly
the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up
release the brake pedal.
when the parking brake is engaged.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb. G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not Z
95
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

leave children unattended in the vehicle, or lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada i Always engage the parking brake in addi-
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Chil- only) in the instrument cluster goes out. tion to shifting the automatic transmission
dren could release the parking brake and/ X Engaging: Pull up parking brake lever 1 into park position P (manual transmission:
or shift the automatic transmission out of firmly. shifting into 1st gear or reverse gear R).
park position P (manual transmission: shift When parked on an incline, also turn the
When the engine is running, the brake
into the neutral position), either of which front wheels towards the road curb.
warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
could result in an accident and/or serious
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
personal injury.
comes on. position 0.
switch.
Turning off the engine
The immobilizer is activated.
G Warning! Automatic transmission:
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle The SmartKey can only be removed from the
has come to a complete stop. With the starter switch with the automatic transmis-
engine not running, there is no power assis- sion in park position P.
tance for the brake and steering systems.
In this case, it is important to keep in mind
that a considerably higher degree of effort
1 Parking brake lever is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
2 Release button X Manual transmission: Shift the manual
X Releasing: Pull up slightly on parking brake transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
lever 1 and press release button 2. R.
X Automatic transmission: Shift the auto-
X Push parking brake lever 1 down to its
original position. matic transmission into park position P.
When the ignition is switched on or the X Engage the parking brake.
engine is running, the brake warning
96
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission could result in an accident and/or serious Gearshift lever
personal injury.
Introduction
Manual transmission is standard equipment ! Allow engine to warm up under low load
on select models and not available on other use. Do not place full load on the engine
models. until the operating temperature has been
For information on driving with a manual reached.
transmission, see “Driving and park- Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
ing” (Y page 91). extended period when driving off on slip-
G Warning! pery road surfaces.
Make sure absolutely no objects are This may cause serious damage to the
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. engine and the drivetrain which is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- Â Reverse gear
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets ranty.
$ to * Forward gears
in the footwell, make sure the pedals still
have sufficient clearance. G Warning!
During sudden driving or braking maneu- On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
vers the objects could get caught between in order to obtain braking action. This could
the pedals. You could then no longer brake result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
and injury. vent this type of loss of control.
G Warning! ! When you are shifting the manual tran-
When working on the vehicle, engage the mission into the 5th or 6th gear, make sure
parking brake and shift the manual trans- you move the gearshift lever to the right.
mission into 1st gear or reverse gear R. Otherwise, you could accidentally shift into
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the manual
transmission. Z
97
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving X Push the gearshift lever past this resistance Automatic transmission
the engine can result in engine damge that and hold.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Introduction
X Move the gearshift lever forward to select
ited Warranty. reverse gear R. For information on driving with an automatic
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by transmission, see “Driving and park-
using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be ing” (Y page 91).
damaged which is not covered by the Mer-
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
This may result in serious engine damage Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz cles. If there are any floormats or carpets
Limited Warranty. in the footwell, make sure the pedals still
Shift gear in a timely manner. have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneu-
vers the objects could get caught between
Shifting into reverse gear R the pedals. You could then no longer brake
! Only shift the manual transmission into or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped. and injury.
Otherwise the manual transmission could
be damaged. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
X Stop the vehicle completely. until the operating temperature has been
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. reached.
X Shift the manual transmission into the neu- Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
tral position (no gear selected). extended period when driving off on slip-
pery road surfaces.
X Move the gearshift lever to the left until you This may cause serious damage to the
feel a certain resistance. engine and the drivetrain which is not cov-
98
Controls in detail
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- G Warning! There are additional indicators on the cover
ranty. It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans- of the shifting gate showing the current gear
mission out of park position P or neutral selector lever position.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission The indicators come on when you insert the
position N if the engine speed is higher than
upshifting is delayed. This allows the cata- SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
lytic converter to heat up more quickly to when you remove the SmartKey from the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
operating temperature. starter switch.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone
or something. Only shift into gear when the
Gear selector lever Shifting procedure
engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on:
! Only shift the automatic transmission into Rdrive position D (Y page 101) with gear
reverse gear R or park position P when the ranges (Y page 101)
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the auto- Rthe selected program mode:
matic transmission could be damaged.
C/S (Y page 102)
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of or
park position P is only possible with the M (vehicles with AMG Sport Package and
brake pedal depressed. SLK 55 AMG only) (Y page 104)
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
Only depressing the brake pedal releases Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
the gear selector lever lock.
Á Park position with gear selector lever lock Rthe vehicle speed
Â Reverse gear i The current gear selector lever position
À Neutral position corresponds with the current transmission
¿ Drive position position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 100).
99
Controls in detail
With drive position D selected, you can influ- Effect Effect
ence transmission shifting by:
ì Park position Shift the automatic transmission
Rlimiting the gear range into reverse gear R only when the
Rextending the gear range Shift the automatic transmission
vehicle is stopped.
into park position P only when the
Rchanging the gears manually (vehicles with
vehicle is stopped. The park posi-
AMG Sport Package and SLK 55 AMG only) tion is not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should always
Transmission positions engage the parking brake in addi-
The current transmission position appears in tion to shifting the automatic
the multifunction display. transmission into park position P
to secure the vehicle.
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in park
position P. With the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch,
the gear selector lever is locked in
park position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the gear selector
lever could remain locked in park
1 Transmission position indicator position P (Y page 309).
í Reverse gear
100
Controls in detail
Effect Effect result in an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
ë Neutral position The automatic transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
No power is transmitted from the
are available.
engine to the drive axle. When the Gear ranges
brakes are released, the vehicle
With the automatic transmission in drive posi-
can be moved freely (pushed or
tion D and driving in automatic program mode
towed).
Driving tips C or S, you can limit or extend the gear range,
To avoid damage to the transmis- see “One-touch gearshifting” (Y page 103).
sion, never shift the automatic
Kickdown The current gear range appears in the multi-
transmission into neutral position
N while driving. function display.
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
If the ESP® is deactivated or mal- acceleration.
functioning: Shift the automatic X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
transmission into neutral position Depending on the engine speed the auto-
N only if the vehicle is in danger of matic transmission shifts into a lower gear.
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
You may encounter a resistance point. If so,
! Coasting the vehicle, or driv- depress the accelerator pedal past this resist-
ing for any other reason with the ance point.
automatic transmission in neu-
tral position N can result in Working on the vehicle
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz G Warning! 1 Gear range indicator
Limited Warranty. When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
ê Drive position transmission into park position P. Other-
wise the vehicle could roll away which could
101
Controls in detail
Effect Automatic shift program
è With this selection you can use the

braking effect of the engine.
ç Allows the use of engine’s braking

power when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin mountainous regions

Runder extreme operating condi-
tions Program mode selector switch on vehicles with
AMG Sport Package and SLK 55 AMG
Program mode selector switch
æ For maximum use of engine’s brak- C Comfort For comfort driving
ing effect on very steep or lengthy C Comfort For comfort driving
downgrades. S Sport For standard driving
S Sport For standard driving
M Manual For manual gearshifting
(Y page 104)
102
Controls in detail
The current program mode appears in the Selecting program mode C means:
multifunction display. RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower rpms and the wheels are less likely
to spin.
Steering wheel gearshift control (example illustra-
Selecting program mode S means that tion)
upshifts occur later. 1 Limiting gear range
1 Program mode indicator
Downshift (in manual program mode M)
! Never change the program mode when 2 Extending gear range
One-touch gearshifting
the automatic transmission is out of park Upshift (in manual program mode M)
position P. This could result in a change of With the automatic transmission in drive posi-
driving characteristics for which you may tion D and driving in automatic program mode i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
not be prepared. C or S, you can limit or extend the gear range gearshift control when the automatic trans-
using the gear selector lever or the steering mission is in park position P, neutral posi-
i The last selected automatic program wheel gearshift contol. tion N, or reverse gear R.
mode (C or S) is switched on when the Vehicles with AMG Sport Package and
engine is restarted. SLK 55 AMG: For information on using the Limiting gear range
gear selector lever or the steering wheel gear-
X Press the program mode selector switch
shift control in manual program mode M, see G Warning!
repeatedly until the letter of the desired
“Manual shift program” (Y page 104). On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
program mode appears in the multifunction
in order to obtain braking action. This could
display.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- Z
103
Controls in detail
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- extends the gear range of the automatic mal acceleration and deceleration. This will
vent this type of loss of control. transmission. involve shifting down one or more gears.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the i If you press on the accelerator pedal
left in the D- direction. when the engine has reached its rpm limit, Manual shift program
the automatic transmission will upshift
or beyond any gear range limit selected. The manual shift program is available on vehi-
X Briefly pull left gearshift control 1. cles with AMG Sport Package and on
The automatic transmission will shift into SLK 55 AMG only.
Canceling gear range limit Manual program mode M differs with regard
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously X Press and hold the gear selector lever to to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
limits the gear range of the automatic the right in the D+ direction until D reap- smoothness from automatic program mode
transmission. pears in the multifunction display. S.
or In manual program mode M, system-control-
i To avoid overrevving the engine when led automatic gearshifting is switched off.
X Pull and hold right gearshift control 2 until
downshifting, the automatic transmission You need to change the gears by manually
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s D reappears in the multifunction display. upshifting or downshifting using the gear
max. speed would be exceeded. The automatic transmission will shift from selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
the current gear range directly into drive control.
position D.
Extending gear range
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
Shifting into optimal gear range
right in the D+ direction.
X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
or
the left in the D- direction.
X Briefly pull right gearshift control 2.
or
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next higher gear as permitted by the X Pull and hold left gearshift control 1.
shift program. This action simultaneously The automatic transmission will automati-
cally select the gear range suited for opti-
104
Controls in detail
Activating manual shift program could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until M appears in the multifunc- X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
tion display. right in the D+ direction.
The automatic transmission switches to or
manual program mode M. Automatic shift- X Briefly pull right gearshift control 2
ing is switched off. The gear range is not
(Y page 103).
limited.
The automatic transmission shifts into the
You can change the gears manually with drive next higher gear.
position D selected. You can upshift or down-
Program mode selector switch
shift through the gears in succession. Upshift indicator
C Comfort For comfort driving i Manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with
S Sport For standard driving
manual program mode M selected, the
M Manual For manual gearshifting automatic transmission will go to auto-
matic program mode (C or S) when the
engine is restarted.
The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 103). 1 Current gear
Upshifting
For information on automatic program mode 2 Upshift indicator
(C or S), see “Automatic shift pro- ! In manual program mode M, the auto-
gram” (Y page 102) and “One-touch gear- In manual program mode M, upshift indicator
matic transmission will not upshift, even if 2 in the multifunction display advises you to
shifting” (Y page 103). the engine has reached its overrevving
upshift before the engine reaches the over-
range. Shift up into the next gear before the
speed range. In addition, symbol ^ may
engine has reached its overrevving range.
appear instead of manual program mode
Make absolutely certain that the engine
symbol M in the multifunction display. Thus
speed does not reach the red marking on
you can drive at the maximum engine speed Z
the tachometer. Otherwise the engine
for each gear without overrevving the engine.
105
Controls in detail
X Shift the automatic transmission from cur- the optimal gear for maximum accelera- Emergency operation (limp-home
rent gear 1 into the next higher gear. tion. mode)
The fuel supply will otherwise be inter- If vehicle acceleration becomes less respon-
rupted to prevent the engine from overrev- i When you brake or stop, the automatic
transmission shifts down into a gear from sive or sluggish or the automatic transmission
ving. no longer shifts, the automatic transmission
which you can easily accelerate or take off.
is most likely operating in limp-home (emer-
Downshifting gency operation) mode. In this mode only
Kickdown second gear and reverse gear R can be
G Warning! Using the kickdown when driving in manual selected.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift program mode M is not possible. X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
Deactivating manual shift program position P.
vent this type of loss of control. X Press the program mode selector switch X Turn off the engine.
repeatedly until C or S appears in the mul- X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the tifunction display.
left in the D- direction. X Restart the engine.
or
or X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
X Restart the engine.
X Briefly pull left gearshift control 1 position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
The automatic transmission will go to auto- R.
(Y page 103). matic program mode (C or S).
The automatic transmission shifts into the X Have the automatic transmission checked
Manual program mode M is not stored. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
next lower gear.
soon as possible.
i For maximum acceleration, press and
hold the gear selector lever to the left in the
D- direction or pull and hold the left gear-
shift control. Depending on the engine
speed the automatic transmission selects
106
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster instrument cluster illumination only for
30 seconds.
Introduction
For information on changing the instrument
For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
cluster, see “Instrument clus- (Y page 120).
ter” (Y page 28).
G Warning!
Adjusting the instrument cluster illu-
No messages will be displayed if either the mination
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative. i The instrument cluster illumination is dim-
As a result, you will not be able to see infor- 1 To brighten instrument cluster illumina- med or brightened automatically to suit
mation about your driving conditions, such tion (knob +) ambient light conditions.
as speed or outside temperature, warning/ 2 To dim instrument cluster illumination You can only adjust the brightness of the
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning (knob -) instrument cluster illumination when it is
messages or the failure of any systems. 3 Reset button J dark outside.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so i With the exterior lighting switched on, the
with added caution. Contact an authorized Activating the instrument cluster brightness of the switches in the center
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. console will also be adjusted when using
The instrument cluster is activated when you knob 1 or 2.
Ropen the driver’s door
X To brighten illumination: Press knob 1
Rswitch on the ignition briefly.
Rpress reset button J X To dim illumination: Press knob 2
Rswitch on the exterior lamps (Y page 81) briefly.
The illumination brightness for the instrument
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing the
cluster changes each time you press knob
reset button J without switching on the
1 or 2. Several settings are possible.
ignition or the exterior lamps activates the
107
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting trip odometer Control system Multifunction steering wheel
X Make sure you are viewing the standard Introduction The displays in the multifunction display and
display (Y page 112) in the multifunction the settings in the control system are con-
display. The control system is activated as soon as the trolled by the buttons on the multifunction
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 72). steering wheel.
X Press and hold reset button J until the trip
The control system enables you to call up
odometer is reset.
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
Tachometer For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
The red marking on the tachometer maintenance service, to set the language for
(Y page 28) denotes excessive engine speed. messages in the instrument cluster display,
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, and much more.
as it may result in serious engine damage G Warning!
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
Limited Warranty. conditions must always be his/her primary
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is focus when driving.
interrupted if the engine is operated within For your safety and the safety of others,
the red marking. selecting features through the multifunc-
tion steering wheel should only be done by
the driver when traffic and road conditions
Clock permit it to be done safely.
For setting the time with the audio system, Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
see (Y page 121). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
For setting the time with the COMAND sys- covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
tem, see separate COMAND system operat- mately 14 m) every second.
ing instructions. The control system relays information to the
multifunction display.
108
Controls in detail
Control system
1 Multifunction display Press button briefly The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
j to move within a menu under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
2 Press button
k Within Audio/DVD menu to These functions serve to call up relevant infor-
s to take a call
select previous or next track, mation or to customize the settings for your
to dial3 scene or stored station. vehicle.
to redial3 Within Telephone menu to It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
t to end a call switch to the phone book and functions within each menu, as being
select a name or number. arranged in a circular pattern.
to reject an incoming call
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly to
Press and hold button
Press button pass through each menu one after the
j Within Audio/DVD menu to other.
æ to select submenus in the Set-
k select previous or next track
ç tings menu X Press button k or j repeatedly to
with quick search or to select
to set values pass through each function display, one
previous or next station in sta-
after the other, in the current menu.
to operate the RACETIMER4 tion list or wave band.
to set the volume Within Telephone menu to In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
start the quick search in the you will find a number of submenus for calling
3 Press button phone book. up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings
è to select next or previous menu
menu” (Y page 118).
ÿ Depending on the selected menu, pressing The number of menus available in the system
the buttons on the multifunction steering depends on which optional equipment is
wheel will alter what appears in the multi- installed in your vehicle.
function display.
The information available in the multifunction
display is arranged in menus and accompa-
nying functions and submenus.
3 Function only available in telephone menu.
109
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction display 2 Trip odometer
3 Automatic transmission program mode
indicator5
4 Status indicator (outside temperature/
digital speedometer)
5 Transmission position/gear range indica-
tor5
For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 111).
1 Main odometer
110
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus and submenus
5 Automatic transmission only
111
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are Standard display menu RCalling up digital speedometer or outside
designed to facilitate navigation within the temperature (Y page 113)
system and are not necessarily identical to In the standard display, the main odometer
RCalling up maintenance service indicator
those shown in the multifunction display. and the trip odometer appear in the multi-
function display. (Y page 259)
The first function displayed in each menu RChecking engine oil level (SLK 55 AMG
will automatically show you which part of
only) (Y page 225)
the system you are in.
Function Checking coolant temperature

1 Standard display menu G Warning!
(Y page 112) Driving when your engine is overheated can
Standard display cause some fluids which may have leaked
2 AMG6 menu (Y page 113) 1 Main odometer into the engine compartment to catch fire.
3 Audio/DVD menu (Y page 116) 2 Trip odometer You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
X If you see another display, press button
4 Navigation menu (Y page 117) cause serious burns which can occur just
è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
5 Vehicle status message memory7 display appears. from the engine if you see or hear steam
menu (Y page 118) X Press button j or k to select the coming from it.
functions in the Standard display menu. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
6 Settings menu (Y page 118)
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
The following functions are available:
7 Trip computer menu (Y page 125) out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
RChecking tire inflation pressure (USA only) vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
8 Telephone menu (Y page 126) (Y page 237)
RChecking X Press button j or k repeatedly until
coolant temperature
(Y page 112) the coolant temperature appears in the
7 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
112
Controls in detail
Control system
and is therefore unsuitable for that pur- AMG menu
pose.
This function is only available in AMG vehi-
Indicated temperatures just above the cles.
freezing point do not guarantee that the
The main screen of the AMG menu shows you
road surface is free of ice. The road may still
the gear currently engaged as well as the
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
engine oil temperature.
bridges.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop- X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may X Press button j or k repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunc-
rise close to 248‡ (120†). the digital speedometer or the outside tem- tion display.
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a perature appears in the multifunction dis-
warning in the multifunction display. play.
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
1 Gear indicator
Calling up digital speedometer or out- 2 Engine oil temperature indicator
side temperature Example illustration for selected vehicle speed
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
You can select whether the digital speedom- engine oil temperature has not yet reached
eter or the outside temperature is shown in 80†. During this time, avoid driving at full
the multifunction display (Y page 121). engine speed.
If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
G Warning! the manual shift program, the menu will be
The outside temperature indicator is not shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next
designed to serve as an ice-warning device to gear indicator 1 as a reminder to upshift.
Z
113
Controls in detail
Control system
Use buttons j or k to select the fol- RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the
lowing functions in the AMG menu: engine is running or the starter switch is in
G Warning! position 2 (Y page 72).
RVehicle supply voltage (Y page 114)
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
RRACETIMER (Y page 114) roads and in conditions where high speed cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
ROverall analysis (Y page 115) driving is permitted. Racing on public roads æ or ç.
is prohibited under all circumstances and
RLap analysis (Y page 115) X Starting: Press button æ.
the driver is and must always remain
responsible for following posted speed lim- X Displaying intermediate time: Press but-
Vehicle supply voltage its. ton ç while the timer is running.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until The RACETIMER allows you to time and save The intermediate time is shown for 5 sec-
the AMG menu appears in the multifunc- driving stretches. onds.
tion display. X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until X Stopping: Press button æ.
X Press button j repeatedly until the the AMG menu appears in the multifunc- When you stop the vehicle and turn the
vehicle supply voltage appears in the mul- tion display. SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 72), the
tifunction display. X Press button j repeatedly until the RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction when you switch the ignition back on or
display. restart the engine and then press the æ
button.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
You can save up to nine laps.
1 Gear indicator
2 Vehicle supply voltage indicator
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Lap number
114
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button ç while the timer is run- Resetting current lap X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
ning. X Press button æ while the timer is run- the AMG menu appears in the multifunc-
The intermediate time will be shown for ning. tion display.
5 seconds. The timer stops. X Press button j repeatedly until the
X Press button ç within 5 seconds. X Press button ç. overall analysis appears in the multifunc-
The intermediate time shown will be saved tion display.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap. Deleting all laps
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
the intermediate time is called up.
When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMER
will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps
are deleted.
X Press button æ while the timer is run-
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
ning. 2 Overall driving time
The timer stops. 3 Maximum speed
X Press reset button J twice (Y page 28). 4 Overall distance driven
1 Gear indicator X Press button æ. 5 Average speed
2 RACETIMER The timer starts. The saved laps are
3 Best lap time deleted. Lap analysis
4 Lap number
This function is only available if you have
Overall analysis saved at least two laps and have stopped the
This function is only available if you have RACETIMER.
saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Z
115
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until Audio/DVD menu
the AMG menu appears in the multifunc-
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu oper-
tion display.
ate the audio or video equipment which you
X Press button j repeatedly until the lap currently have turned on.
analysis appears in the multifunction dis- If no audio equipment is currently turned on,
play. the message AUDIO Off appears in the mul-
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The tifunction display. Example illustration
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol The following functions are available: 1 Wave band setting and stored memory
1. position
RSelecting radio station (Y page 116)
2 Station frequency
ROperating audio devices/audio media
(Y page 117) X Select next or previous stored station:
ROperating video DVD (Y page 117) Press k or j briefly to select a
stored station.
X Select next or previous station in the
Selecting radio station
station list: Press and hold k or j
1 Lap number X Turn on the audio system (Y page 128) and to select a station.
2 Lap time select radio.
X Select next or previous station in wave
3 Maximum speed during lap Vehicles with COMAND system: band (Only if no station list is available):
4 Lap length Refer to separate COMAND system oper- Press and hold k or j to select a
ating instructions. station.
5 Average speed during lap
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
X Press button j or k to see other lap You can only store new stations using the
the currently tuned station appears in the corresponding feature on the radio
analyses. multifunction display. (Y page 140).
Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
116
Controls in detail
Control system
For more information on satellite radio oper- X Selecting previous or next track: Press Navigation menu
ation, see “Satellite radio” (Y page 145). button k or j briefly.
The Navigation menu contains the functions
X Selecting a track from the track list needed to operate your navigation system.
Operating audio devices/audio media (quick search): Press and hold button X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
X Turn on the audio system and select the k or j.
the Navigation menu appears in the mul-
audio device or audio media The current track does not appear during tifunction display.
(Y page 152). Audio-AUX mode operation. The message shown in the multifunction
Vehicles with COMAND system: display depends on the status of the navi-
Refer to separate COMAND system oper- Operating video DVD gation system:
ating instructions. RWith the COMAND system switched off,
X Turn on the COMAND system and select
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the message NAVI Off appears in the
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
Audio/DVD menu appears in the multi- system operating instructions. multifunction display.
function display. RWith the COMAND system switched on
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
Audio/DVD menu appears in the multi- but route guidance not activated, the
function display. direction of travel and, if applicable, the
name of the street currently traveled on
appear in the multifunction display.
RWith the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the direc-
tion of travel and maneuver instructions
Example illustration appear in the multifunction display.
1 Disc number
Please refer to the COMAND system operat-
2 Current track
1 Disc number ing instructions for instructions on how to
2 Current scene activate the route guidance system.
X Press button k or j to select a

scene.
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
menu the Vehicle status message memory status message memory will be cleared when
menu appears in the multifunction display. you turn off the ignition.
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning mes- If conditions have occurred causing status
sages that may be stored in the memory. messages to be recorded, the number of
Settings menu
Such messages appear in the multifunction messages appears in the multifunction dis-
display and are based on conditions or sys- play:
Introduction
tem status the vehicle’s system has recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu In the Settings menu there are two func-
only appears, if messages have been stored. tions: The function To reset, push reset
button for 3 seconds, with which you can
G Warning! reset all the settings to the original factory
Malfunction and warning messages are settings and a collection of submenus with
only indicated for certain systems and are which you can make individual settings for
intentionally not very detailed. The mal- 1 Number of recorded status messages your vehicle.
function and warning messages are simply The following settings and submenus are
a reminder with respect to the operation of X Press button j or k. available in the Settings menu:
certain systems. They do not replace the The stored messages will now be displayed RResetting to factory settings (Y page 119)
owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to in the order in which they have occurred.
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety. RSubmenus in the Settings menu
For malfunction and warning messages,
Have all required maintenance and safety (Y page 119)
see “Vehicle status messages in the multi-
checks performed on the vehicle. Bring the RInstrument cluster submenu (Y page 120)
function display” (Y page 271).
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and Should the vehicle’s system record any con- RTime/Date submenu (Y page 121)
warning messages. ditions while driving, the number of messages RLighting submenu (Y page 122)
will reappear in the multifunction display
RVehicle submenu (Y page 124)
when the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 0 or removed fromthe RConvenience submenu (Y page 124)
starter switch.
118
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting to factory settings ing the reset button J a second time. After X With the selection marker on the desired
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings submenu, use button j to access the
You can reset the functions of all submenus
menu reappears in the multifunction display. individual functions within that submenu.
to the factory settings.
X Once within the submenu, use button
For safety reasons, the function Headlamp
Mode in the Lighting submenu cannot be
Submenus in the Settings menu j to move to the next function or button
reset while driving. X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until k to move to the previous function
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multi- within that submenu.
the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display. X Use button æ or ç to change the
function display. X Press button j. settings of the respective function.
The collection of the submenus appears in The following lists show what settings can be
the multifunction display. There are more changed within the various menus. Detailed
submenus than can be simultaneously dis- instructions on making individual settings can
played. be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster submenu
RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 120)
X Press the reset button J in the instrument RSelecting language (Y page 120)
cluster for approximately 3 seconds.
RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
The message Reset to factory set-
outside temperature) for status indicator
tings? Push reset button to con- (Y page 121)
firm appears in the multifunction display. X Press button ç.
X Press the reset button J once more. The selection marker moves to the next Time/Date submenu
submenu. RSetting the time (Y page 121)
The functions of all the submenus will be
reset to factory settings. X Scroll down with button ç, scroll up RSetting the date (Y page 121)
The settings you have changed will not be with button æ.
reset unless you confirm the action by press-
119
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu The following functions are available: X Press button æ or ç to set speed-
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA RSelecting speedometer display mode ometer unit to Km or Miles.
only) (Y page 122) (Y page 120)
Selecting language
RSetting locator lighting (Y page 122) RSelecting language (Y page 120)
X Move the selection marker with button
RSetting night security illumination (Head- RSelecting display (digital speedometer or æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster sub-
lamps delayed shut-off feature) outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 123) menu.
(Y page 121)
X Press button j or k repeatedly until
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 124) Selecting speedometer display mode the message Language appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Vehicle submenu æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster sub- The selection marker is on the current set-
RSetting automatic locking (Y page 124) menu. ting.
Convenience submenu
the message Display Unit Speed-/
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
Odometer appears in the multifunction dis-
(Y page 124) play.
The selection marker is on the current set-
Instrument cluster submenu ting.
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
X Press button æ or ç to select the
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. Clus-
language to be used for the multifunction
ter submenu to change the instrument clus-
display messages.
ter display settings.
120
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (digital speedometer or Time/Date submenu
outside temperature) for status indicator
Access the Time/Date submenu via the Set-
tings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to
æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster sub- change the time and date display settings.
menu. The following functions are available:
X Press button j or k repeatedly until RSetting the time (Y page 121)
the message Select Display appears in Example illustration for setting the hour
the multifunction display.
RSetting the date (Y page 121)
X Press button æ or ç to set the hours
Setting the time or minute(s).
ting.
This function is only available in vehicles with X Press reset button J to confirm.
audio system.
Vehicles with COMAND system: Setting the date
For information on setting the time in the X Move the selection marker with button
COMAND system, refer to the separate æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
COMAND system operating instructions.
the message Set Date Month, Set Date
æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button æ or ç to select the Day, or Set Date Year appears in the mul-
X Press button j or k repeatedly until tifunction display.
desired setting.
the message Time-Hours Press R To The selection marker is on the current set-
The selected display is then shown contin- Confirm or Time-Minute(s) Press R To
uously in the status indicator (lower dis- ting.
Confirm appears in the multifunction dis-
play).
play.
The other display now appears in the
Standard display menu (Y page 112).
ting.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA In low ambient light conditions the following
only) lamps will come on additionally:
X Move the selection marker with button RParking lamps
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. RTail lamps
X Press button j or k repeatedly until RLicense plate lamps
the message Headlamp Mode appears in
RSide marker lamps
Example illustration for setting the month the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current set- For more information on the daytime running
X Press button æ or ç to set the
ting. lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 83).
month, day, or year.
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
Lighting submenu driving (Y page 119) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to The following message appears in the multi-
change the lamp and lighting settings on your function display:
vehicle. Lighting Cannot be completely reset
to factory settings while driving.
The following functions are available: X Press button æ or ç to select man-
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA ual operation (Manual) or daytime running Setting locator lighting
only) (Y page 122) lamp mode (Constant). With the locator lighting feature activated and
RSetting locator lighting (Y page 122) With daytime running lamp mode activated the exterior lamp switch in position U, the
RSetting and the exterior lamp switch in position following lamps will come on during darkness
night security illumination
M or U, the low-beam headlamps are when the vehicle is unlocked using button
(Y page 123)
switched on when the engine is running. k on the SmartKey:
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off RParking lamps
(Y page 124)
RTail lamps
122
Controls in detail
Control system
RSide marker lamps X Press button æ or ç to switch the X Move the selection marker with button
RFront fog lamps locator lighting function On or Off. æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Press button j or k repeatedly until
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened. U when exiting the vehicle. the message Headlamps Delayed Shut-
If you do not open the driver’s door after The locator lighting feature is activated. off appears in the multifunction display.
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the The selection marker is on the current set-
lamps will go out automatically after approx- Setting night security illumination (Head- ting.
imately 40 seconds. lamps delayed shut-off feature)
X Move the selection marker with button Use this function to set whether you would
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
X Press button j or k repeatedly until vehicle and closing all doors.
the message Surround Lighting Func- With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
tion appears in the multifunction display. activated and the exterior lamp switch in posi-
The selection marker is on the current set- tion U before the engine is turned off, the
ting. X Press button æ or ç to switch the
following lamps will come on when the engine
is turned off: headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
RParking
Off.
lamps
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
RTail lamps
U before turning off the engine.
RLicense plate lamps The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
RSide marker lamps activated.
RFront fog lamps
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door,
the lamps will automatically go out after
60 seconds.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the head- X Move the selection marker with button
lamps delayed shut-off feature: æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the Smart- X Press button j or k repeatedly until
Key in the starter switch to position 0. the message Automatic Door Lock
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to posi- appears in the multifunction display.
tion 0. The selection marker is on the current set-
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is ting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch the
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
you start the engine.
On or Off.
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would Vehicle submenu
like the interior lighting to remain on for Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set-
10 seconds during darkness after you have tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
removed the SmartKey from the starter set the automatic locking. X Press button æ or ç to switch the
switch.
X Move the selection marker with button Setting automatic locking automatic central locking On or Off.
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu. Use this function to activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking. With the automatic Convenience submenu
central locking system activated, the vehicle
the message Interior Lighting is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of Access the Convenience submenu via the
Delayed Shut-off appears in the multi- approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub-
function display. menu to activate the easy-entry/exit feature.
The selection marker is on the current set- Activating easy-entry/exit feature
ting.
Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 77).
124
Controls in detail
Control system
G Warning! Fuel consumption statistics since start
You must make sure no one can become X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
trapped or injured by the moving steering the message From Start appears in the
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is multifunction display.
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press
one of the memory position buttons or X Press button æ or ç to switch the
memory button M. easy-entry feature On or Off.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Children could open the driver’s door Trip computer menu
1 Statistics called up: since start
and unintentionally activate the easy- Use the Trip computer menu to call up stat-
2 Time elapsed since start
entry/exit feature, which could result in an istical data on your vehicle.
accident and/or serious personal injury. 3 Average fuel consumption since start
The following information is available:
4 Average speed since start
X Move the selection marker with button RFuel consumption statistics since start 5 Distance driven since start
æ or ç to the Convenience sub- (Y page 125)
All statistics stored since the last engine start
menu. RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
X Press button j or k repeatedly until (Y page 126)
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
the message Easy-entry Function RResetting fuel consumption statistics position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
appears in the multifunction display. (Y page 126) Resetting will not occur if you turn the Smart-
The selection marker is on the current set- RDistance to empty (Y page 126) Key back to position 1 or 2 within this time
ting. period.
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since last Resetting fuel consumption statistics If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
reset vehicle at the fuel pump ¿ is shown
X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
X
instead of the range.
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the
the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. X Press button j or k repeatedly until
X Press button j or k repeatedly until the reading that you want to reset appears
the message From Reset appears in the in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. X Press and hold the reset button J in the
instrument cluster until the respective val-
ues are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
matically to 0 after 99 999 miles or Telephone menu
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first. G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
Distance to empty be his/her primary focus when driving. For
1 Statistics called up: since last reset
X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until your safety and the safety of others, we
2 Time elapsed since last reset
the message From Start appears in the recommend that you pull over to a safe
3 Average fuel consumption since last reset location and stop before placing or taking
4 Average speed since last reset
a telephone call. If you choose to use the
5 Distance driven since last reset X Press button j or k repeatedly until telephone while driving, please use the
the message Range: appears in the multi- hands-free device and only use the tele-
function display. phone when weather, road and traffic con-
The calculated remaining driving range ditions permit.
based on the current fuel tank level Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
appears in the multifunction display. using a mobile phone while driving a vehi-
cle.
126
Controls in detail
Control system
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph RNo Service: No network is available. X Press button s.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has You have answered the call.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi- not been connected to the audio system
mately 14 m) every second. or COMAND system via Bluetooth® yet. Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
Never operate radio transmitters equipped X Connect the telephone to the audio call
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. system or COMAND system via
without being connected to an external X Press button t.
Bluetooth®.
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a RReady or name of the network provider Dialing a number from the phone book
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic sys- (if available): The telephone has found a
tem, possibly resulting in an accident and/ network and is ready for use. You can If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you
or personal injury. operate it using the control system. may select and dial a number from the phone
book. You can add new numbers to the phone
You can connect your telephone via Blue- book with the telephone, see separate oper-
tooth® to the audio system (Y page 169) or Answering a call ating instructions.
to the COMAND system, see separate X Press button ÿ or è on the multi-
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
COMAND system operating instructions.
you can answer a call at any time. In the mul- function steering wheel repeatedly until the
X Switch on the audio system (Y page 128)
tifunction display you will then see the mes- Telephone menu appears in the multifunc-
or the COMAND system, see separate sage, or if available, the caller ID (number and tion display.
COMAND system operating instructions. name): X Press button j or k repeatedly until
X Press button ÿ or è on the multi- the desired name appears in the multifunc-
function steering wheel repeatedly until the tion display.
Telephone menu appears in the multifunc-
If you press and hold button j or
tion display.
k for longer than 1 second, the system
One of the following messages will appear scrolls rapidly through the list of names
in the multifunction display: until you release the button again.
The stored names are displayed in ascend-
ing or descending alphabetical order.
127
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redialing Audio system
The control system stores the most recently Audio and telephone operation
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone These instructions are intended to help you
book. become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz
audio system. They contain useful tips and a
X Press button ÿ or è on the multi-
detailed description of the user functions.
1 Selected name from the phone book function steering wheel repeatedly until the
Telephone menu and the standby mes- G Warning!
X Press button s. sage appears in the multifunction display. In order to avoid distraction which could
The control system dials the selected X
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
Press button s.
phone number. system settings with the vehicle at a stand-
The first number in the redial memory still and operate the system only when road
If the connection is successful and this fea-
appears in the multifunction display. and traffic conditions permit. Always pay
ture is supported by your network provider,
the name of the party (if stored in your X Press button j or k repeatedly until full attention to traffic conditions first
phone book) you are calling will appear in the desired number or name appears in the before operating system controls while
the multifunction display. multifunction display. driving.
The control system stores the dialed num- X Press button s. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
ber in the redial memory. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
The control system dials the selected
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
or phone number.
mately 14 m) every second.
X Press button t if you do not want to
make the call.
128
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating safety Audio system components Audio control unit
G Warning! With the audio system you can operate the With the audio control unit you can:
Any alterations made to electronic compo- following main functions: Rswitch the audio system on/off
nents can cause malfunctions. Raudio function with the radio, Satellite Radjust the volume
The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satellite radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode), Audio
Rselect the operating modes
radio, and telephone are interconnected. AUX and external audio devices
Renter telephone numbers and accept,
When one of the components is not opera- Rthe mobile phone with the phone book
tional or has not been removed/replaced reject, initiate and end telephone calls
Rvarious system settings
properly, the function of other components Rload and eject CDs
may be impaired. In addition, the audio system can also be
This condition might seriously impair the operated with the multifunction steering
operating safety of your vehicle. wheel (Y page 108).
We recommend that you have any service In these instructions, the keypad (right side
work on electronic components carried out of audio control unit) and the function buttons
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. are referred to as “buttons”.
129
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio control unit overview
130
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item 8 Keypad e Switching audio on/off
Tuning to a station via the station (Y page 135)
1 Switching to radio mode memory (Y page 143)
(Y page 141) f Tuning to a station via station search
Storing stations manually (Y page 143)
Switching wave bands (Y page 142) (Y page 144)
Switching to Sat mode Fast reverse (Y page 160)
Entering a passcode (Y page 174)
(Y page 147) Selecting previous track
Entering a telephone number (Y page 160)
2 Opening system menu (Y page 139) (Y page 181)
Sending DTMF tones (Y page 183) g Tuning to a station via station search
3 Switching to CD audio, MP3 or Media CD changer: Selecting CD (Y page 143)
interface mode (Y page 152), (Y page 157) Fast forward (Y page 160)
(Y page 162)
CD: Entering a track number Selecting next track (Y page 160)
4 Switching to telephone mode (Y page 160)
Switching to a popup screen of sat- h Rejecting a call (Y page 182)
(Y page 172)
ellite radio (Y page 151) Ending an active call (Y page 182)
5 Load/eject button (Y page 155)
9 Back button j Confirming a passcode
6 Disc slot (Y page 174)
a Delete button for deleting digit or Accepting a call (Y page 182)
7 Display entire entries (Y page 181) Initiating a call (Y page 181)
b Confirmation button Redial (Y page 182)
c Navigation buttons for moving within

menus and for exiting menus
d Setting the volume (Y page 136)

Z
131
Controls in detail
Audio system
k Switching sound on/off 2 Main area Instrument cluster multifunction dis-
(Y page 136) 3 Status line play
Switching hands-free microphone The status line 3 displays the current set- Please refer to the “Control system” section
on/off (Y page 183) tings for radio and telephone mode. of this manual (Y page 108) for function
You can request the required function using descriptions and operation of the instrument
l Sound settings (Y page 137) cluster multifunction display and multifunc-
the menu bar 1.
tion steering wheel buttons as they relate to
The selection is made using the $% audio functions described in this section.
&( buttons.
Audio display
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by addi-
i For information about cleaning and care tional information being shown in the status Menu
of the audio display, see “Audio dis- line: The table below shows the structure of the
play” (Y page 264). RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the modes and their menus. Each mode has a
Bluetooth® device (calls made and basic menu. In the menu line of the basic
Display received via the Bluetooth® interface) menu display are several menu items listed.
The currently selected mode and the associ- (Y page 175). Each menu item in turn has several submenu
ated menus are shown on the audio display. items.
RMobile phone network signal strength
The audio display is divided into several
areas. I. This information will only be shown
with suitable mobile phones.
RReceiver symbol 4 ö
In this example, the audio main function is set
to the FM radio mode and the main area 2
is active.
i The layout of the menus may vary depend-
ing on your vehicle’s equipment. This man-
ual shows the menus for a fully equipped
For example, radio selected
vehicle.
1 Menu bar
132
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button Mode/Basic menu Menu Page
b Radio Radio (FM/AM) (Y page 140)
Weather Band (Y page 140)
Sat Radio (Y page 145)

é Disc CD/MP3 mode (Y page 152)
Aux/Media/Sound menu (Y page 162)
h Telephone Telephone mode (Y page 169)
ê System System Settings (Y page 139)
Display on/off (Y page 139)
Calling up an operating mode Horizontal menus

X Press the respective button (b, é,
h, or ê) on the audio control unit.
The basic menu of the selected mode
appears in the audio display. The main area
is active. The active area is highlighted.
i The following screens show the audio dis-

Illustration: radio function basic menu
play's day design. The appearance of the
highlighted items in the menu will vary X Moving to the menu bar: Press button
depending on the display design. %.
133
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Moving through the menu bar: Press but- Back button The individual steps for the above-mentioned
ton ( or &. example are described below.
X Moving to the superordinate menu:
The currently selected item is highlighted. Press back button í briefly. X Press button b on audio control unit
X Confirming the selected menu item: repeatedly until desired wave band FM has
X Moving to the main menu of the current been selected.
Press button C.
operating mode: Press and hold back but-
X Exiting the menu bar without confirm- X Switching to the menu bar: Press button
ton í.
ing a selection: Press button $ or %.
í.
Delete button
X Deleting a single digit: Press delete but-
Vertical submenus
ton î briefly.
X Deleting entire entry: Press and hold
delete button î.
Example of how to use the audio system

X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: Press
Example: direct frequency input, button (.
FM 104.5 MHz.
In the descriptions below, the mode always
X Moving through the menu: Press button serve as the starting point for locating the
$ or %. individual menu items.
The currently selected item is highlighted. Example:
X Confirming the selected submenu b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency
item: Press button C.
X Exiting the menu bar without confirm-
ing a selection: Press button ( or
&.
134
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Confirming selection: Press button C. the current frequency step width are X Enter Frequency is selected. If it is not
The Radio menu is selected and a list of rounded to the next lower allowed fre- selected, press button $ to select
submenus appears. quency. Enter Frequency.
X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audio X Press button C.
control unit. The Enter Frequency submenu appears
The audio system tunes in to the frequency in the audio display.
entered.
Switching audio system on or off
Operation
In the following descriptions, an operation
X Enter Frequency is selected. step is described as in example below.
X b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency
X Confirming selection: Press button C.
The Enter Frequency submenu appears. is the short for
X Press button b on audio control unit
repeatedly until desired wave band has
been selected.
X Press button %.
Rotary control/push button D
X Press button ( to select Radio. 1 Push button D
X Press button C. 2 Rotary control
The Radio menu is selected and a list of
submenus appears.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
the respective wave band which is outside
the frequency range. Frequencies within
the current frequency range, but outside
135
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Switching on: Press push button D. audio source and the telephone operating During a telephone call:
via audio control unit is not possible. X Turn rotary control 2.
or
X If the audio system was on as you switched The volume will increase or decrease
off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in the Adjusting volume depending on the direction turned.
starter switch to position 2.
The audio system will come back on with i The volume of the audio system or a tel-
the last selected function. ephone call can also be adjusted by press-
ing the + or - button on the
i If the audio system is switched on without multifunction steering wheel
the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will (Y page 108).
automatically switch off again after approx-
imately 30 minutes. Sound
X Switching off: Press push button D. X Switching on/off: Press button F on
or the audio control unit (Y page 130).
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to Rotary control/push button D The sound of the current audio source is
position 0. 1 Push button D switched on or off.
2 Rotary control
i Should excessively high temperatures i When the sound is switched off, the sym-
occur while the audio system is being oper- X Adjusting: Turn rotary control 2. bol F appears in the status line.
ated, Temperature Too High - Device The volume will increase or decrease If you change the audio source, or alter the
switching off now. will appear in the depending on the direction turned. volume, the sound is automatically
audio display, after which the audio system switched on again.
will be switched off for a cooling-down Adjusting volume for telephone calls In CD and MP3 mode, button F
period. In hands-free mode, you can adjust the vol- switches the pause function on or off.
ume of a telephone call while the call is cur-
i When you switch off the audio system, rently active.
you also switch off the currently playing
136
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting sound settings X Changing setting: Press button $ or X Changing setting: Press button ( or
% until desired treble or bass setting is & until desired balance setting is ach-
For bass and treble, you can select different
sound settings for each individual audio reached. ieved.
source. The particular Sound menu can be X Saving setting: Press button C or í. X Saving setting: Press button C or í.
opened from the basic menu for the desired The setting is stored and the menu is The balance setting is stored for all audio
operating mode, or by pressing the ´ but- exited. sources and the menu is exited.
ton on the audio control unit.
Example: Adjusting balance
Surround sound
b £ Sound £ Bass Balance is used to determine whether the
sound focus should be shifted toward the If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/
Adjusting bass or treble driver’s side or the passenger’s side. kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound system,
X ´ £ Bass or Treble. you can choose between LOGIC 7® On and
X ´ £ Balance.
or LOGIC7® Off for surround sound.
or
X Select Sound £ Bass or Treble. Harman/kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound is
X Select Sound £ Balance. available for the following operating modes:
A longer and brighter bar indicates the pre- The current setting is indicated by a red
viously stored setting. The red pointer indi- RRadio (FM only)
line.
cates the currently selected setting. RSatellite Radio
RCD audio
RMP3
RMedia interface
RAUX
i The LOGIC7® On function of the harman/

kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound system
Adjusting balance
Example for adjusting bass permits the playback of discrete 5.1 and
Z
137
Controls in detail
Audio system
stereo recordings with an optimal surround Adjusting surround sound i Please note the following:
sound platform for each passenger. With surround sound, you can choose RFor an optimal sound experience from all
The LOGIC 7® distributes the 5.1 surround between LOGIC 7® On and LOGIC 7® Off. seats, the balance should be adjusted to
information over the 11-channel system X ´ £ Sound. the center setting with LOGIC 7®
architecture to provide the optimum sound switched on.
experience from all seats. This produces or
RThe best sound results are achieved
the sound characteristic as intended by the X Select Sound £ Sound.
sound engineer during the original record- when playing high-quality audio CDs.
ing. RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
Harman/kardon LOGIC 7® converts all least 128 kbit/s.
two-channel stereo sound material into RSurround playback cannot be activated
multi-channel surround sound. The sur- in mono-signal sources as AM or Weath-
round information stored during the origi- erband. It will not function for mono-
nal recording is read out using LOGIC 7® signal sources as, e. g. mono audio tracks
and likewise distributed over the 11 chan- on some specific audio CDs.
nels. No effects are created during this RIn the case of poor radio reception qual-
process; only that which was already there X Changing setting: Press button C. ity, e. g. in tunnels, LOGIC 7® should be
becomes audible. switched off, as otherwise a dynamic
X Press button $ or % to switch
In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC 7® Logic 7® on or off. switchover from stereo to mono and thus
moves the perceived sound source away temporary sound characteristic shifts
from the individual loudspeakers, thus gen- X Saving setting: Press button C. can occur.
erating a natural 360° sound experience The setting is stored and the menu is RWith certain stereo recordings, the
for each passenger. exited.
resulting sound characteristic may devi-
X Exiting menu without saving: Press but- ate from conventional stereo playback.
i By selecting LOGIC 7® Off, all compatible
ton ( or &.
formats are played back as they are pres-
ent on the medium. Due to the vehicle’s
spatial characteristics, an optimal sound
experience is not ensured from all seats.
138
Controls in detail
Audio system
SYS menu Switching display on/off
X Switching display off: Select Display
SYS settings menu overview Off.
Menu X Switching display on: Press button C,
button í, or either of the navigation
System Settings buttons (, &, $, %.
Language (Y page 140) 1 Calling up menu options or
X Press button D.
Display (Y page 139) 2 Switching off display
The System menu appears.
Brightness Display settings i Pressing any of the function buttons, for
Day Mode You can adapt the brightness of the audio example button é, will also switch on
display to the prevailing light conditions. the display. The system will then switch to
Night Mode the respective function.
Setting the display design
Automatic
X ê £ System Settings £ Dis- Bluetooth® settings
Bluetooth® (Y page 139) play.
X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night General information about Bluetooth®
Reset (Y page 140)
Mode or Automatic. Bluetooth® technology is the standard for
Display off (Y page 139) short-range wireless technologies, suitable
i When you select Brightness, a scale for transmitting voice and data. It is possible
appears on which you can set the bright- to connect Bluetooth® devices wirelessly.
ness manually. Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCards
Calling up the System Settings menu In the Automatic setting, the audio system or make calls using a hands-free device.
X Press button ê. analyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor Bluetooth® technology uses the freely avail-
and switches between the display designs able ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical) wire- Z
The System menu appears.
automatically. less network that works at 2.45 GHz. Ranges
139
Controls in detail
Audio system
of up to ten meters are possible with Blue- X ê £ System Settings £ Reset. X Changing setting: Press button $ or
tooth®. A prompt appears asking whether you % to select desired language.
really want to reset. X Saving setting: Press button C.
Activate or deactivate Bluetooth®
X Select Yes or No. The setting is stored and the menu is
X ê £ System Settings £ Blue-
If you select Yes another prompt will exited.
tooth £ Activate Bluetooth.
appear asking whether you really want to X Exiting menu without saving: Press but-
reset. ton (.
X Select Yes or No. When choosing setting Language Synchro-
If you select Yes, the audio system will be nization, the audio system switches to the
reset and restarted. same language that is used in the multifunc-
tion display.
Setting the system language
X ê £ System Settings £ Lan- Radio operation
You have activated or deactivated Bluetooth®. A guage.
checkmark Ç appears when Bluetooth® is acti- G Warning!
vated. Please devote your attention first and fore-
most to the traffic situation you are in.
Reset Before your journey, please familiarize
yourself with the radio functions.
i You can reset the audio system back to
Only use the audio system when road and
its factory settings. In this case, all personal
traffic conditions permit you to do so. Oth-
data (e. g. address book entries, call lists,
erwise you could be involved in an accident
paired mobile phones, and presets) are
in which you or others could be injured.
deleted. We recommend that you reset the The language list appears. A dot R in front of an
values, for example, before selling your entry indicates the current setting. ! Do not attach metallic window tinting film
vehicle.
to the inside or outside of windows which
are fitted with an aerial. Obstructing the
140
Controls in detail
Audio system
metallic aerial structure on the window will Menu overview
interfere with radio reception. Cutting the
film on the window can permanently dam- i The components and operating principles
age the aerial wires. of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 129) and (Y page 134). Information
i The radio mode is interrupted by an about sound settings can be found on
incoming call on the mobile phone (Y page 137).
(Y page 169).
Radio Presets Channel Sound

(except Weather Band/Satel- (except Weather Band) (only Weather Band)
lite radio)
Enter frequency Autostore (except Satellite List of channels Treble

Radio)
Station information (in FM wave List of stored stations Bass

band only)
Balance
Surround Sound
Switching to radio mode Weather Band will automatically tune to the

strongest station in the area.
X Press button b on audio control unit.
The radio basic menu appears in the audio
display once you have switched to radio
mode. You will hear the frequency last
tuned in the previously selected wave
band.
141
Controls in detail
Audio system
Information displayed in the status line X Press button b on audio control unit
(example) repeatedly until desired wave band has
been selected.
Station name (e. g. WNYC) and mobile phone
readiness are displayed in the status line. The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and the
satellite radio mode are called up one after
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by addi-
another.
tional information being shown:
The wave band currently selected appears
RMobile phone network signal strength in the status line of the audio display. The
Illustration: radio mode in FM wave band I last selected station in the selected wave
1 Status line RReceiver symbol 4 ö. band is heard.
2 Station name or other information from
the station
Calling up wave bands Selecting a station/channel
3 Store position of station
4 Main area with wave band You can choose from among the FM, AM and You have the following selection options:
WB wave bands and then request the Sat RThe station search function
i Station name or other information 2, mode (Y page 145). Pressing again button
RThe channel list (Weather Band/Satellite
available for the FM wave band, can only be b will switch back to FM radio mode.
radio)
seen when the station transmits the name
Wave band Frequency RStation memory (except Weather Band)
or other information and the function Show
Station Info in the Radio menu is acti- WB (Weather Band) Weather channels RThe manual frequency entry (except
vated. Weather Band/Satellite radio)
X b £ Radio £ Show Station FM 87.7......107.9 MHz
For using Satellite Radio see (Y page 145).
Info AM 530.......1710 KHz The station search proceeds in the following
In the WB wave band, the audio system dis- frequency increments:
plays the channel number, e. g. Channel 6, R200 kHz in FM range
instead of the station names and/or fre-
R10 kHz in AM range
quency.
142
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tuning to a station/channel via station/ X Press b button on audio control unit
channel search function repeatedly until desired wave band has
i The search function searches for the next been selected.
receivable station in the FM or AM wave X Select Presets.
band. In Weather Band (WB) the search The memory menu appears. The dot R in
function switches to the next channel in the front of a memory position indicates that
channel list. For tuning to a station/chan- the currently selected station is saved
nel you can also use the buttons on the there.
multifunction steering wheel or
X Select station in memory using the buttons
(Y page 116).
$ and % and press C. X Press button ó, on the keypad in audio
X Press button b on audio control unit control unit briefly.
or
repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB wave X Press desired station button A to
band is selected.
R, with the keypad in audio control unit
X Press buttons GH or (& on briefly.
audio control unit.
Depending on the pressed button, the sys- Tuning to a station by entering the fre-
tem searches upward or downward and quency manually
stops at the next station/channel.
i This function is not available for Weather
Band/Satellite radio.
Selecting a station using station memory
X Entering frequency with keypad: Enter
X b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency
i This function is not available for Weather desired frequency with buttons A to
Band. The menu for manual frequency entry
appears.
143
Controls in detail
Audio system
R, with the keypad in audio control unit Storing stations manually with station X Selecting a memory position: Press but-
briefly. memory menu ton $ or %.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency X Tune in desired station. X Storing a station to a selected memory
entered. Basic menu is shown in the audio display. position: Press and hold button C until a
X Press button C when the main area is brief signal tone sounds.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
the respective wave band which is outside active. or
the frequency range. or X Press and hold desired station button
X Exiting menu without making an entry: X Select Presets. A to R on keypad, until a brief signal
Press button í. tone sounds.
The station memory display appears in the
audio display. The station is stored.
Storing stations Autostore – automatic station memory
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in i This function is not available for Weather
the memory. Band/Satellite radio. The autostore func-
i If you select a memory preset which is tion automatically assigns receivable sta-
already in use, it will be overwritten by the tions to the memory, sorted according to
new station. reception quality at the moment of per-
forming the autostore. The stations which
Storing stations manually with keypad were stored in the station memory man-
The dot R in front of a memory position indicates ually are completely lost in this process. If
X Tune in desired station. that the currently tuned station is stored there.
less than ten stations are found, the
Basic menu is shown in the audio display. remaining entries are left empty.
X Press and hold desired station button
A to R until a brief signal tone
sounds.
The station is stored.
144
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Press b button on audio control unit Satellite radio
repeatedly until desired wave band has
been selected. G Warning!
Basic menu is shown in the audio display. Please devote your attention first and fore-
most to the traffic situation you are in.
X Press button C when the main area is
Before your journey, please familiarize
active.
yourself with the radio functions.
or Only use the audio system when road and
X Select Presets. traffic conditions permit you to do so. Oth-
The station memory display appears in the erwise you could be involved in an accident
audio display. in which you or others could be injured.
X Press button $ or % to select
Autostore. Submenu overview
X Press button C. i The components and operating principles
The audio system searches for receivable of the audio system can be found on
stations. A corresponding message is dis- (Y page 129) and (Y page 134).
played. The available stations are automat-
ically stored in memory. The first received
station will be automatically played.
X Canceling storage procedure: Select
Cancel and press C while the message
Rewriting memory... is being displayed.
145
Controls in detail
Audio system
Sat Presets Info Category (Cat.) Sound
Channel List Station presets Show program info All channels Treble
Channel Entry Select category Bass
Service Balance
Surround Sound
Satellite radio For more information and service availability topographic conditions and other things we
call the SIRIUS Service Center (Y page 151) cannot control. Service might also not be
i Additional satellite radio equipment and a (1-888-539-7474), or contact available in certain places (e. g., in tunnels,
subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio serv- Rwww.sirius.com (USA) parking garages, under leafy trees, or
ice provider are required for the satellite within or next to buildings) or near other
radio operation described in this chapter. Rwww.siriuscanada.com (Canada)
technologies. In such situations, the satel-
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz lite radio’s main menu shows the Acquir-
i Note that categories and channels shown
Center for details and availability for your ing Signal... screen. At this point, the
vehicle. in illustrations are dependent on program-
ming content delivered by the service pro- radio’s functions are restricted.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over vider. Programming content is subject to
130 channels of digital-quality radio, includ- change. Therefore, channels and catego- Subscribing to satellite radio
ing 100 % commercial-free music, sports, ries shown in illustrations and descriptions
news and entertainment. SIRIUS Satellite X Press button b on audio control unit
contained in this manual may differ from
Radio uses a fleet of high-orbit satellites to the channels and categories delivered by repeatedly until satellite radio Sat is
broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to coast, the service provider. selected.
in the contiguous U. S. and Canada. The following conditions are possible:
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming i Satellite radio service may be unavailable RSatellite radio service is not activated
is available for a monthly subscription fee. or interrupted from time to time for a vari-
(only the preview channel is displayed)
ety of reasons, such as environmental or
RSatellite radio service is activated
146
Controls in detail
Audio system
i If a satellite receiver is not installed or not telephone number displayed in the service www.sirius.com (USA) or
properly installed: display. www.siriuscanada.com (Canada).
The message Device Unavailable will
After the connection is made: Preview Channel
appear.
If the satellite radio service is not activated, X Follow the instructions given by the opera-
the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears. tor.
The activation process may take up to
Satellite radio service is not activated 10 minutes. If it is successful, you will see
The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service the display with the message Updating
Center and the twelve-digit electronic serial channels followed by the satellite radio
number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular receiver basic menu.
are required when calling the SIRIUS Service
Center for an activation request. i Activating the satellite radio service might
X
not be available in certain places (e. g., in i If the satellite radio service has not been
b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Sat
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees, subscribed to, only the preview channel is
£ Service.
or within or next to buildings). If a subscrip- available. You cannot tune in another chan-
tion is not included with system purchase, nel. If you try to do this, the message Call
credit card information is required to acti- SIRIUS to activate: appears.
vate your account.
The activation process takes approxi- Satellite radio service is activated
mately five to ten minutes after calling the The basic satellite radio menu appears. You
SIRIUS Service Center. will hear the channel last tuned in, provided
If a satellite receiver is not installed or not that it can be received.
properly installed: The message Device
Unavailable will appear. Switching on
X Closing screen: Press button C or í.
X Activating satellite radio service: Con- i It is also possible to activate the satellite For important subscription information see
tact satellite radio service provider at the radio service online. To do so please visit “Subscribing to satellite radio” (Y page 146).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio's website at Z
147
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Press button b on audio control unit a Satellite radio options X Calling up category list: b (if neces-
repeatedly until satellite radio Sat is sary repeatedly) £ Cat.
selected. i Main area 1 displays only channels that
or
The message Acquiring Signal... will you have subscribed to. Which channels
X Press button ( or & until Cat. is
appear when the signal is not available. are shown depends on the selected pro-
gram category 2. Only the currently highlighted and press button C.
After the audio system acquires the signal,
the satellite radio basic menu will appear. selected channel 4 is displayed. The category list appears.
The station last tuned to will begin to play. Note that categories and channels shown X Selecting a category: Press button $
in illustrations are dependent on program- or %.
Main satellite radio menu ming content delivered by the service pro-
X Setting the selected category: Press but-
vider. Programming content is subject to
change. ton C.
Therefore, channel and categories shown The selected program category (alphabeti-
in illustrations and descriptions contained cal order) will appear in the audio display.
in this manual may differ from the channels The channel last tuned in the new category
and categories delivered by the service pro- will begin to play.
vider. When searching, tuning in, or selecting
from the channel list, the All Channels
1 Main area with channel display Selecting program category option accesses all of your subscribed
channels.
2 Selected program category i The channels are categorized. Categories
3 Number of selected channel allow you to tune to stations broadcasting i When you select the category All Chan-
4 Selected channel a certain type of program. nels, you have access to all the channels
5 Sound settings Satellite radio channels are split up into cat- you subscribe to, regardless of category.
6 To select program category egories such as News, Sports, Rock, or Coun-
7 Current artist and title try, if available. The category list is sorted
8 Channel information
alphabetically.
9 Preset options
148
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tuning in channels Tuning in channels using manual channel Channel number is valid, but channel is
number entry not included in subscription: The message
You have the following selection options:
X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Sat Call SIRIUS to activate: appears
RThe channel scan function (Y page 146).
£ Enter Channel.
RThe manual channel number entry X Press button C, í, ( or & to
The menu for manual channel number entry
RThe channel list appears. close the message in the audio display.
RThe channel presets or Tuning in channels using the satellite
X Press button ó, on the keypad in audio radio channel list
Tuning in channels using channel search control unit briefly. X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Sat
function
X Channel number entry with keypad: £ Channel List.
X Press button ( or & when the main
Enter desired channel number with buttons The channel list appears. The dot R in
area in the basic menu is active. A to R, with the keypad in audio
Depending on the pressed button, the sys- front of a list entry indicates the currently
control unit briefly. selected channel.
tem scans upward or downward and stops
Further operation depends on whether the X Select channel by pressing button $ or
at the next subscribed channel.
selected channel number is valid or if the
or %.
channel is included in your subscription.
X Press button G or H on audio control X Press button C to confirm.
X Exiting menu without making an entry:
unit. Press button í.
Depending on the pressed button, the sys-
i The contents of the channel list depends
Channel number is valid and channel is on which channels are included in your sub-
tem searches upward or downward and
included in subscription: The audio system scription and which program category you
stops at the next receivable channel.
tunes in the channel entered. have selected (Y page 148). The channel
i Which channels are available depends on Channel number is invalid: The message list contains only the preview channel if the
which channels you have subscribed to and Invalid Channel appears in the audio dis- satellite radio service has not been sub-
the program category you have selected play. scribed to.
(Y page 148). For tuning in channels you X Press button C, í, ( or & to
can also use the buttons on the multifunc- close the message.
tion steering wheel (Y page 116).
149
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tuning in channels using satellite radio The audio system tunes in the corresponding
channel presets channel as long as it is included in your sub-
X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Pre- scription and is still available.
sets. If the channel is not included in your sub-
scription, the message Call SIRIUS to
or
activate: appears.
X Press button C when the main area is
If the channel is no longer available, the mes-
selected.
sage Invalid Channel appears.
The preset menu appears. The dot R in X Selecting a preset position: Press button
X Closing message: Press button C.
front of a preset position indicates that this $ or %.
is the channel currently selected and being
listened to. Storing channels X Storing a preset position: Press and hold
button C until you hear a signal.
i There are ten preset positions available.
The channel is stored.
X Press button C when the main area is or
selected. X Press and hold desired channel button
or A to R on keypad, until a brief signal
X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Pre- tone sounds.
sets. The channel is stored.
In both cases, the preset menu will appear in
X Select station in memory by pressing but- the audio display. The dot R in front of a Show program info
ton $ or %. preset position indicates that the channel X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Info.
X Press button C to confirm. currently selected is stored there.
i If the program provider does not offer any
or
information, the Info menu item cannot be
X Press desired station button A to
selected.
R, with the keypad in audio control unit
briefly.
150
Controls in detail
Audio system
You will see a screen that may contain the Calling SIRIUS Service Center Channel update
following information (if available):
i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS The service provider may conduct a channel
RSelected program category update.
Service Center if, for example:
RSelected channel RYou
During the update, the message Updating
want to cancel the subscription or
RArtist re-subscribe at a later date. channels... will appear on the audio dis-
of the track currently being played
play.
RName of current track RYou forget to pay the bill. The channel last tuned will be muted until the
RYou sell the car to another person. update is completed. You cannot operated
i SIRIUS determines what information is the satellite radio during the update.
displayed on the screen. The audio system X b (if necessary repeatedly) £ Sat After completion of the update, the satellite
shows no more than two lines per item of
£ Service. radio basic menu will appear. The station last
information. If an item of information is too
The telephone number of the SIRIUS Serv- tuned to will begin to play. If not available, the
long, the audio system shortens it.
ice Center and the twelve-digit electronic next subscribed channel starts beginning
With the telephone keypad button ô you serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular with channel 1.
can call up a popup screen, if provided by receiver are displayed.
SIRIUS, that shows the artist and title of the Sound settings
X Closing screen: Press button í, (,
current track being played on the selected
channel. &, or C. For sound adjusting see:
X Closing screen: Press button í, (, RVolume (Y page 136)
&, or C. RBalance control (Y page 137)
RBass and treble control (Y page 137)
RSurround sound (Y page 137)
151
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD and MP3 mode
Submenu overview
CD or MP3 Track list (Audio CD) or Folder CD changer or other media Sound
(MP3)
Normal Track Sequence Select track (CD mode only) Media selection Treble
Random Tracks Select folder and/or tracks (MP3 Bass

mode only)
Random Folders (MP3 mode Balance

only)
AUX Surround sound
i The components and operating principles Safety precautions G Warning!

of the audio system can be found on In order to avoid distraction which could
(Y page 129) and (Y page 134). G Warning!
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
The CD changer is classified as a Class 1
The audio system is fitted with a CD changer. or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
laser product. You must not open the cas-
The CD changer can play audio CDs as well and operate the audio system only if per-
ing. There is a risk of exposure to invisible
as CDs with MP3 or WMA files. mitted by road, weather and traffic condi-
laser radiation if you open the casing, or if
The available menu options will vary depend- tions.
the casing is faulty or damaged.
ing on the equipment and the type of CD. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
The CD changer do not contain any parts
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
that you are able to maintain yourself. For
safety reasons, all maintenance work must
be carried out by qualified technicians.
152
Controls in detail
Audio system
General notes only use CDs with a maximum thickness of RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens
1.3 mm. specially designed for this purpose.
i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
If you insert thicker discs, e. g. ones that RClean CDs from time to time with a com-
compatible with the CD audio standard and
have data on both sides (one side with DVD mercially available cleaning cloth. Never
therefore may not be able to be played by
data, the other side with audio data), they wipe the CD in a circular motion; instead,
the CD changer. There may be playback
cannot be ejected and will damage the CD wipe it in a straight line starting in the cen-
problems when playing copied discs.
changer. ter and moving outward. Do not use sol-
There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter. vents, anti-static sprays, etc. for cleaning.
software and writers available. This variety
means that there is no guarantee that the Attempting to play CDs with an 8 cm diameter RReplace the CD in its case after use.
system will be able to play discs that you or playing such CDs with an adapter may RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
have written/copied yourself. cause damage to the CD changer. Such dam-
age is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
There may be playback problems if you use
Limited Warranty. Notes about MP3 mode
CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have copied
yourself with a storage capacity of more Only use round, 12 cm diameter discs. The CD changer can play audio CDs as well
than 700 MB. These CDs are not compati- Should excessively high or low temperatures as CDs with MP3/WMA files.
ble with currently applicable standards. occur while in CD changer mode, a message
will appear in the display, and the CD will be i Due to the branched data structure, play-
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs, muted until the temperature has reached an back of the first track may be delayed
they can become warped due to the heat acceptable level for the system to continue slightly.
that develops in the CD changer. operation.
Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
In certain situations, the CDs can then no
Tips on handling CDs RCD-R
longer be ejected and cause damage to the
ROnly touch the CDs at the edges.
CD changer. Such damage is not covered RCD-RW
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. RHandle CDs carefully to prevent interfer-
ence during playback. Permissible file systems
! Your CD changer has been designed to RISO9660/Joliet for CDs
RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on
play CDs which correspond to the
the CDs.
IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore
153
Controls in detail
Audio system
Multisession CDs A data medium may contain a maximum of The audio system is unable to recognize an
For multisession CDs, the first session type 500 tracks. MP3/WMA track if:
of the CD determines how the audio system Rthere is no period between the track title
will process the CD. Track and folder names
and the extension
For example, if the first session type is When you create an MP3/WMA disc, you can
Rthere is no extension
according to the audio CD standard and the assign names to the MP3/WMA tracks and
second session type is according to the data folders.
i The audio system does not support ID3
CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks, The audio system uses these names for the tags.
the audio system will treat the CD as a con- corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty
ventional audio CD. This means that it is only folders or folders which contain data other Compatible file systems and compression
possible to access the audio CD tracks. than MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed by methods
Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is not pos- the audio system.
If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root direc- The following compression methods are com-
sible. patible:
Similarly, if the first session type is according tory itself (uppermost directory on storage
medium), the root directory will also be RMP3
to the data CD standard containing MP3/
WMA tracks and the second session type is treated as a folder. The audio system will then RWMA
according to the audio CD standard, the audio show the name of the root directory as the
system will treat the CD as a data CD. This folder name. i If music files, created with different com-
means that it is only possible to access the You must observe the following when assign- pression methods, in addition to MP3 files,
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD ing track names: are stored together on a disc, the loading
tracks is not possible. RTrack names must have at least one char- process may take longer before the first
acter. track is played.
File structure on a disc
RTrack names must have the extension
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, the Permissible MP3 formats
“mp3” or “wma”.
MP3/WMA tracks can be organized in fold- The audio system supports the MPEG1 Audio
ers. A folder can also contain other folders. A RThere must be a period between the track Layer 3 format.
disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders. name and the extension.
i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
Each folder can contain a maximum of Example of a correct track name:
255 tracks and 255 folders. Track1.mp3
154
Controls in detail
Audio system
Permissible bit and sampling rates Notes on copyright 2 Eject/load button Î
RFixed and variable bit rates up to The music tracks that you create for MP3 3 Forward H
320 kbit/s mode and can play back in MP3 mode are 4 Rewind G
RSampling
generally subject to copyright protection in
rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz The CD changer can hold up to a total of six
accordance with the applicable international
i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at and national regulations. audio CDs.
least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling In many countries, reproductions are not per- X Switching to CD mode: Press button
rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller mitted without the prior consent of the copy- é on the audio control unit.
rates can cause a noticeable deterioration right holder, not even for private use. The CD mode display appears when you
in sound quality. This is especially the case Make sure you know the applicable copyright switch to CD mode. If there is a CD in one
if you have activated the surround sound regulations and that you comply with these. of the magazine trays, it will start to play
function. automatically. The following message will
If you own these rights yourself, e. g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or the appear if no CDs are inserted.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) copyright holder has granted you permission,
The audio system supports the following these restrictions do not apply.
types of audio files:
Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to
Operating the CD changer
384 kbit/s
Rsampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz
The audio system does not support the fol-
lowing WMA files:
RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded G Warning!
files In order to avoid distraction which could
Rvariable bit rates lead to an accident, the driver should insert
RWMA or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
Pro
and operate the audio system only if per-
R5.1 Surround
Z
1 CD slot
155
Controls in detail
Audio system
mitted by road, weather and traffic condi- Loading an individual magazine compart- i The loading process may take a while,
tions. ment: depending on the type of disc. If you do not
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph X Press eject/load button Î. insert a disc, the display will switch back to
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is the CD changer menu after approximately
A menu indicates which magazine com-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi- 20 seconds.
partments are currently loaded.
mately 14 m) every second. X Press button é, or the eject/load but-
X Press desired button A to 6, in the
keypad to select a magazine compartment. ton Î on the audio control unit to finish
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this the loading process.
side must face upwards when loaded. If or
The CD changer plays the disc if it has been
neither side is printed, the side to be played X Press button ( or & to select a mag-
inserted correctly and is permissible.
must face downwards. azine compartment.
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or The selected magazine compartment is
cannot be read, Disc Unreadable indicated by a red number. the eject/load button again.
appears in the display. X Press button C to confirm. Filling an empty magazine compartment
The CD changer will switch to the selected X Press eject/load button Î.
magazine compartment. The message
A menu indicates which magazine com-
Please Wait... appears in the display.
partments are currently loaded. A red num-
i Only insert a CD after the audio system ber indicates the last magazine compart-
has prompted you to do so with the mes- ment that has been played or selected.
sage Please Insert Disc <X>. Only
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot.
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot and places it in the selected
magazine compartment. The message
Loading Disc <X>... appears in the dis-
play.
156
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Press button % to select the menu bar. X Press eject/load button Î on the audio back. Playback will continue once the CD
X control unit to finish the loading process. has been ejected completely.
Press button & to select Fill Empty
Slots. The CD changer plays the last loaded disc X Ejecting one CD: Press eject/load button
if it has been inserted correctly and is per- Î.
X Press button C. missible.
The message Please Insert Disc <X> The magazine menu with active main area
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
appears in the display. appears in the audio display. The magazine
the eject/load button Î again. compartment with the current CD is high-
i Only insert a CD after the audio system The loading process has not been com- lighted.
has prompted you to do so with the mes- pleted, the audio system will play the last
sage Please Insert Disc <X>. Only inserted CD.
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot.
Ejecting CDs from CD changer
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD G Warning!
into the CD slot and places it in an empty In order to avoid distraction which could
magazine compartment. The message lead to an accident, the driver should insert
Please Wait... appears in the display. If or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
the CD is loaded, the CD changer will and operate the audio system only if per- X Press desired button A to 6, in the
switch to the next empty magazine com- mitted by road, weather and traffic condi- keypad to select a magazine compartment.
partment. The message Please Insert tions.
Disc <X> appears in the display. or
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph X Press button ( or & to select the
X Repeat the steps until all compartments (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
desired CD.
have been loaded. covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
i If you eject a CD while another is being

played, the audio system interrupts play-
Z
157
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Press button C to confirm. X Remove the CD from CD slot. (audio or MP3 CD). In doing so, the audio
X Remove the CD from CD slot. The CD changer switches to the next occu- system accesses all media in the CD
pied magazine compartment and ejects the changer.
If you do not remove the CD from the CD
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull CD.
i Pressing the function button repeatedly
the CD back in after a short while. If you do not remove the CD from the CD
switches from CD or MP3 mode to the
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull
X Ejecting all CDs: Press eject/load button media interface mode and than to the AUX
the CD back in after a short while.
Î. mode. Pressing again switches back to CD
The magazine menu with active main area i If audio source is changed during eject or MP3 mode.
appears in the audio display. The magazine procedure (e. g. pressing b the eject
compartment with the current CD is high- Display example for audio CD operation
procedure will be aborted and any CDs
lighted. being ejected will be drawn back into the
unit.
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
Switching to audio CD or MP3 operation

X Load a CD.
1 Media type
The audio system loads the inserted audio
source and starts playback. 2 Medium position in the media list
X Press button % to select the menu bar. 3 Track number
or
X Press button ( to select Eject All. 4 Track name (only if stored on the medium
X Press function button é repeatedly,
as CD text)
X Press button C to confirm. until the main menu of the CD or MP3 mode
5 Elapsed track time
The CDs are ejected one after the other. appears.
6 Elapsed track time (graphical display)
i The function button switches directly to 7 Sound settings
the last selected disc operation mode 8 Media selection (Changer or Media)
158
Controls in detail
Audio system
9 Current playback options (visible if acti- b Calling up folder list
vated) c Playback options
a Medium name (only if stored on the
medium as CD text) Pause function
b Calling up track list X Pausing playback: Press F briefly.
c Playback options
X Continuing playback: Press F again
briefly.
Display example for MP3 operation
Media list
Selecting audio CD or MP3 medium The media list displays all media that are cur-
X Switching to audio CD or MP3 mode rently available:
(Y page 158). Rin the CD changer (magazine compart-
X Select Changer or Media. ments 1 through 6)
or The following media can be read:
X In audio CD operation only: Press button audio and MP3 CDs
C when the main area is selected in the Rdevices connected to the media interface
1 Media type display. (Y page 162).
2 Medium position in the media list
The media list appears. A dot R indicates the i The message Disc unreadable appears
3 Track number
currently selected medium. behind the magazine compartment number
4 Track name
if a medium cannot be read.
5 Elapsed track time
6 Elapsed track time (graphical display) X Selecting medium: Press button $ or
7 Sound settings %.
8 Media selection (Changer or Media) X Press button C.
9 Current playback options (visible if acti- or
vated) X Selecting medium directly: In CD mode Z
a Current folder you can select a disc directly by pressing
159
Controls in detail
Audio system
the respective number of the magazine Selecting via track list omit the next step, i.e. pressing button
compartment on the keypad (A through X In audio CD operation: Select Track C.
6). List. X Completing input: Press button C.
or The track is played.
Selecting a track
X In MP3 operation: Press button C when
X Skipping forwards or backwards to a
the main area is selected in the display. Fast forward/rewind
track: Press button ( or & when the
X Main area is selected: Press and hold but-
main area is selected in the display. The track list appears. A dot R indicates the
ton ( or & until desired place is
or current track.
reached.
X Briefly press button G or H on audio X Selecting a track: Press button $ or
or
control unit. %.
X Press and hold button G or H on
X Press button C to confirm.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks audio control unit.
skips to the next track. Skipping backwards i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks
through the tracks skips to the beginning Selecting a folder
in alphabetical order.
of the current track if the track has been i This function is only available in audio
playing for more than 8 seconds. If the Selecting via keypad MP3 mode.
track has been playing for less than 8 sec- X Press button ó on the keypad.
onds, it skips to the start of the previous X Switch to MP3 operation (Y page 158).
A numerical input field appears. The num-
track. If you have switched on the Random X Select Folder.
ber of available digits depends on the num-
Tracks playback option, the order of the
ber of tracks on the CD. You can only enter or
tracks is random.
digits that correspond with the number of X Press button C when the main area is
tracks on the CD. selected in the display.
X Select the desired track number. The folder list appears.
i When you press a keypad button for lon-
ger than 2 seconds, input is completed and
the respective track is played. You can then
160
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Selecting a folder: Press button $ or X Selecting options: Switch to audio CD or
%. MP3 operation
X Press button C to confirm. X Select CD or MP3 and press button C.
You will see the tracks in the folder. The option list appears. A dot R indicates
which option is switched on.
i Due to the large amount of information
X Select an option and press C.
found on an MP3 disc it may take a while
before all folder and track information The option is switched on. For all options
1 Current folder name except Normal Track Sequence, you will
becomes available. During this time the
2 Moving to superordinate folder folder list may be unavailable or slow. see a corresponding indicator in the main
3 Current track area.
X Selecting a track: Press button $ or
4 Track symbol
%. i The Normal Track Sequence option is
X Move to the superordinate folder: Select X Press button C to confirm. automatically activated when you select a
the Q symbol and press button C. different medium. If an option is activated,
The track is played and the corresponding
The display now shows the next higher it remains activated after the audio system
folder is now the active folder.
folder level. is switched on/off.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal Track Sequence
Tracks playback in the order on the disc
(e. g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
RRandom Tracks
Tracks playback in a random order (e. g.
track 3, 8, 5, etc.).
1 Current folder
RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only)
2 Folder symbol
Tracks in the active folder playback in ran-
dom order.
161
Controls in detail
Audio system
Media interface Notes Connecting an completely discharged iPod®
or USB storage medium can increase the ini-
G Warning! i The media interface allows for connection
tialization time.
Only operate an external audio source of the following media with the audio sys-
tem: Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connec-
when the vehicle is stationary. There is a tors.
risk of accident by being distracted from RiPod®
Depending on the device, loading large audio
road and traffic conditions if you operate an RUSB storage media files may take several minutes.
external audio source while the vehicle is in
motion.
RAudio devices with analog output (AUX), When the power consumption of the external
e. g. MP3 or tape players. device is too high or the media interface is not
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
functioning properly, malfunction messages
i Do not leave external devices in the vehi- will be displayed.
mately 14 m) every second. cle under extremely high or low tempera- i For details and a list of supported devices
tures. Read and observe the operating contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Media interface 1 is located in the glove box. instructions of the respective device. Dam- ter or visit http://mbusa-mobile.com/
age to external devices due to excessive (USA only) or http://www.mercedes-benz-
temperature is not covered by the Mer- mobile.com/ (Canada).
Do not operate iPods® or USB storage media Special characteristics of USB storage
with a remote control such as Bluetooth® in media
addition to the media interface control. Oth- RIf the storage medium contains other data
erwise malfunctions may occur. than audio data, the time required for initi-
Always use the latest firmware for the iPod® alization increases. Initialization may then
or USB storage media. take several minutes. Therefore, audio data
should be stored on a separate partition.
Only use genuine software for uploading to
RUp to 8 folder levels containing up to
your iPod® or MP3 player as otherwise certain
functions may not be available or the system 1 000 tracks per folder are supported.
may not recognize the device. RDo not use USB extension cables or con-
nectors as they may impair functionality.
162
Controls in detail
Audio system
RThe playlists on the device are searched for The media interface supports USB storage Connecting external audio devices
in the background. They are provided in a media of USB Device SubClass 6. Information
separate category once they are available. on USB Device SubClasses of storage G Observe Safety notes, see
medium are available from the manufacturer page 162.
RThe media interface does not support files
that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights of the device. ! External devices that you take into the
Management). vehicle can interfere with radio reception.
Supported file formats on USB storage
media The required connection cables 1, 2, or
Supported USB storage media 3 are available at any authorized Mercedes-
The following file formats are supported:
The following USB storage media are sup- Benz Center.
Rmp3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)
ported:
RUSB Flash Drives Rwma: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)
RUSB hard disks, 1", 1.8", and 2.5" drives Rm4a: low complexity (LC) codec
with a starting/steady current not to Rplaylists: m3u, pls
exceed 800 mA (separate power supply
ID3 Tags (version 1.x, 2.3, 2.4) and WMA tags
may be necessary)
in ASCII and UTF16 coding are supported to
RMP3 players display meta data during playback.
- basic MP3 player are treated as USB
storage media Supported iPod® versions
- for selected MP3 players additional func- The following iPod® versions are supported:
tions are supported RiPod Mini® 1 AUX cable with 3.5 mm stereo jack, for
devices with analog audio port (AUX) or
i For details and a list of supported MP3
RiPod nano 1G® for connection via headphone port, e. g.
players contact an authorized Mercedes- RiPod 4G® MP3 or tape player
Benz Center or visit http://mbusa- 2 iPod® cable
RiPod 5G®
mobile.com/ (USA only) or http:// 3 USB cable for supported USB storage
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ (Can- media
ada). 4 Example device iPod®
163
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Connect the audio device to the media i You can also select external devices
interface in the glove box using the directly: Press button R when CD mode
required cable 1, 2, or 3 while the vehi- is active.
cle is standing still. Pressing button é repeatedly lets you
X Store the audio device carefully in the glove change to the main menu of the device that
box and make sure not to clamp or pitch is currently running.
the cables. When you have connected a new device, the
audio system initializes it. The respective
i You can control playback of devices that The following are available: message appears.
are connected by USB cable 3 or iPod® RList number 0: iPod® or USB storage
cable 2 via the audio system. medium (The name of the device appears
Devices that are connected by an AUX or, if no device is connected, Media
cable 1 are must be controlled on the
Interface.)
device itself.
RList numbers 1 - 6: CD magazine
Media interface operation RList number 7: Device connected to the
AUX socket
Selecting device A dot R indicates the currently selected Main menu for media interface operation
X Press button é repeatedly until the device 1 Current track number
main menu for media interface operation X Select the desired device by pressing but- 2 Name of artist (if stored on the medium)
appears (Y page 164). ton % and/or $. 3 Track name
X Select Media. X Press button C to confirm. 4 Elapsed track time (graphical display)
X Press button C. 5 Sound settings
The main menu for media interface operation
The media list appears. appears. The selected device starts to play- 6 Name of current album (if stored on the
back. medium)
i You can also select Media to open the 7 Medium list
media list when CD mode is active.
8 Music (categories)
164
Controls in detail
Audio system
9 Settings menu Selecting an AUX device: Selecting audio files
a Symbol of connected medium X Press button é repeatedly until the i The audio system lists the stored data on
main menu for AUX operation appears an iPod®, MP3 player, or USB storage
i When you connect a medium via iPod® or (Y page 164). medium according to their own respective
USB cable while the audio function is
file structure.
active, the audio system initializes the
device and starts to playback.
Selecting via track skipping
Selecting AUX device X Skipping forwards or backwards to a
track: Press button & or (.
page 162. or
X Briefly press button G or H on audio
G Warning!
control unit.
Due to the different volumes of the external
X Select Media.
audio sources, system messages of the i Skipping forwards through the tracks
vehicle may be much louder. You may need X Press button C. skips to the next track. Skipping backwards
to disable these system messages or adjust The media list appears. through the tracks skips to the beginning
the volume of these messages manually. of the current track if the track has been
i You can also select Media to open the playing for more than 8 seconds. If the
i The volume of external audio sources is media list when CD mode is active. track has been playing for less than 8 sec-
extremely variable. It is possible that a X Select AUX device at list number 7 of the onds, it skips to the start of the previous
device connected as an external audio media list. track. When you have chosen a playback
source will sound quieter or louder in the option other than Normal Track
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume i You can also select an AUX device Sequence, the track sequence is random.
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the directly: Press button 7 when CD mode
volume can be set separately. In this case, is active.
start at a moderate volume and increase it
slowly. In this way, you can determine Deselecting an AUX device:
whether the system is capable of playback X Press é to switch back to CD mode.
without distortion, even at high volume.
165
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting via keypad i With an iPod® the function "fast rewind" USB storage media
X Initiating input: Press button ó. is only available within the current track. With USB storage media you can select fold-
A numerical input field appears. The num- ers and, if available, playlists. When playing
ber of available digits depends on the num- Selecting categories and folders playlists, the audio system can display the
ber of stored tracks. respective album name and artist, i.e. meta
iPod® and selected MP3 players data, if such information has been read into
X Entering track number: Press a keypad the system.
button, e.g. 7. iPods® and selected MP3 players let you
select tracks via categories and folders. Playlists are displayed using a particular sym-
The digit appears in first place of the entry bol. When you open a playlist, the contained
line. The following categories may be available:
tracks are opened and playback begins. The
RCurrent Track List available playback option is now Random
i The audio system will reject invalid
RPlaylists Categories instead of Random Folder.
entries and does not display them.
RArtists You can determine whether the meta data or
X Enter additional digits as required. the file name and folder are to be displayed
RAlbums
X Completing input: Press button C. during playback for USB storage media.
RSongs X Displaying artist name: Select Media
or
X Press and hold keypad button for last digit RPodcasts Inter £ Display Metadata.
of desired track number. RGenres
Selecting category and opening folder
The track is played. RComposers
X Opening category/folder: Press button
Fast forward/rewind RAudiobooks C when the main area is selected.

X Main area is selected: Press and hold but- or
i Some categories contain the entry Alle.
ton ( or & until desired place is X Select Music.
When you select this entry, the category is
reached. The available categories or folder content,
played completely.
or e.g. subfolders, are displayed. The status
X Press and hold button G or H on line displays the selected category or folder
audio control unit. name.
166
Controls in detail
Audio system
i To select Music, the external device must Alphabetical track selection
be activated.
iPods® and selected MP3 players
i This function is only available for alpha-
betically ordered categories. It is not avail-
able for albums or playlists for example.
X Select a category, for example Artists.
1 Symbol of the connected medium The available artists are displayed.
2 Name of current album, folder or category X Press the respective keypad button once or
3 Symbol for superordinate folder multiple times to enter the initial letter of
1 Device name and symbol
4 Current track (not available for all devi- the desired artist name.
2 Available categories
ces) The available initial letters are displayed.
X Selecting category, folder, album: Press 5 Track symbol X Press button C.
button $ or % and confirm selection
X Playback track: Press button % or While the data is being read, the message
by pressing button C.
$ and confirm selection by pressing Please Wait... appears. Once the data
The content of the category or folder is dis- has been read-in completely, the first list
button C.
played. entry with the entered initial letter is high-
X Moving to superordinate folder: Press lighted.
i If the data has not been read-in com- button % or $ until Q is selected
pletely, the message Please Wait... and press button C. i If no match is found, the last entry that
appears. matches a previous initial letter is high-
X If necessary repeat the above step until the Playing category or folder content lighted.
tracks of the selected category, folder, or X Select category or folder. The quality of the search results depends
album appear. on the version and the language of the soft-
X Press button C for more than 2 seconds.
ware, e.g. iTunesTM used to store data on
The category or folder content is played the iPod® or MP3 player.
according to the selected playback option
(Y page 168).
167
Controls in detail
Audio system
USB storage media Playback options
i This function is only available for alpha- The following options are available:
betically ordered files. It is not available for RNormal Track Sequence
playlists. Tracks are played in standard order (e. g.
X Press the respective keypad button once or numerical or alphabetical order).
multiple times to enter the initial letter of RRandom Tracks
the desired artist name. Tracks are played in random order.
The available initial letters are displayed. RRandom Categories or Random Folder
If the file system contains folders only, the (when folder was selected on USB storage
system searches for folders and the mes- medium)
1 AUX socket: Socket for 3.5 mm stereo
sage Please Wait... appears. Once the Tracks of the current category or of the
jack, for devices with analog audio port
search is concluded, the first list entry with current folder are played in random order.
(AUX) or for connection via headphone
the entered initial letter is highlighted.
port, e. g. MP3 or tape player
If this is not the case, the system searches
for tracks. The message Please Wait... Audio AUX mode G Warning!
appears. Once the search is concluded, the Only operate an external audio source
i This section applies to vehicles without
first list entry with the entered initial letter when the vehicle is stationary. There is a
media interface only.
is highlighted. risk of accident by being distracted from
An external audio source (AUX) can be con- road and traffic conditions if you operate an
nected to the audio system. The AUX socket external audio source while the vehicle is in
Select active partition
is located in the glove box. Please contact an motion.
USB storage media may contain up to 4 par- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
titions (primary or logical; formatted to FAT16 information.
or FAT32). covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
X Selecting partition: é £ Media mately 14 m) every second.
Inter £Select Active Partition.
168
Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up AUX mode i The volume of external audio sources is Telephone
extremely variable. It is possible that a
G Warning! device connected as an external audio Safety precautions
Due to the different volumes of the external source will sound quieter or louder in the
audio sources, system messages of the vehicle or that the usual maximum volume G Warning!
vehicle may be much louder. You may need cannot be achieved. On certain devices the Please do not forget that your primary
to disable these system messages or adjust volume can be set separately. In this case, responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A
the volume of these messages manually. start at a moderate volume and increase it driver’s attention to the road must always
slowly. In this way, you can determine be his/her primary focus when driving. For
X Selecting audio AUX mode: whether the system is capable of playback your safety and the safety of others, we
Press button é repeatedly until the without distortion, even at high volume. recommend that you pull over to a safe
main menu for AUX operation appears. location and stop before placing or taking
or Switch back to CD mode a telephone call.
X In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 £ Aux. If you choose to use the mobile phone 8
X Press button é.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in while driving, please use the hands-free
the external audio source is heard, provided or device and only use the mobile phone when
it is connected and switched to playback. X Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
menu. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
i Please refer to the relevant operating using a mobile phone while driving a vehi-
guide for operation of the external audio cle.
source. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
The following settings can be made in the (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
audio AUX mode: covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
RVolume (Y page 136) mately 14 m) every second.
RBalance control (Y page 137) G Warning!
RBass and treble control (Y page 137) Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
RSurround sound (Y page 137) Z
8 Observe all legal requirements.
169
Controls in detail
Audio system
without being connected to an external on your service provider and the type of When the mobile phone is connected via the
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the mobile phone you are using. See also sep- Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a arate operating manual of your mobile can operate the mobile phone using the fol-
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic sys- phone for instructions on how to use your lowing devices:
tem, possibly resulting in an accident and/ mobile phone. Raudio control unit (Y page 181)
or serious personal injury.
Rbuttons s and t on the multifunc-
i The functions and services available to tion steering wheel (Y page 108)
you while using the mobile phone depend Rmobile phone keypad
Please note that these functions are only
available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones.
TEL Menu
Telephone Name Call lists

Microphone off/on
Bluetooth phones Phone book Call Lists or Mic On/Mic Off
Download contacts Delete Call Lists
Delete contacts
Adjust volume
170
Controls in detail
Audio system
General notes Ryou are using a SIM card that is not com- tem (Y page 139). Please make sure any
patible with the available network. other Bluetooth® device linked with the
Making calls via Bluetooth® interface Rwhen mobile phone is switched off before you
using a mobile phone with “Twin-
The audio system telephone function via the card”, the mobile phone is simultaneously use the telephone functions with the audio
Bluetooth® interface is available in conjunc- logged into the network with the second system.
tion with a Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. SIM card. Changes or modifications not expressly
With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the approved by the party responsible for com-
hands-free device and receive electronic Operating options pliance could void the user’s authority to
business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth® i The components and operating principles operate the equipment.
interface. of the audio system can be found on The head unit internal Bluetooth® transmitter
Further information on suitable mobile (Y page 129) and (Y page 134). must not be co-located or operated in con-
phones and on connecting Bluetooth® ena- junction with any other antenna or transmit-
When the mobile phone is connected via the
bled mobile phones to the audio system are ter.
available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the fol- This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia-
Center. tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
lowing devices:
equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in Rbuttons s and t and keypad on quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
motion audio control unit ment C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
Interruptions to the connection may occur if Rmultifunction steering wheel frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equip-
Rthere is insufficient mobile network cover- ment has very low levels of RF energy that it
Please note that these functions are only is deemed to comply without testing of spe-
age. available with Mercedes-Benz approved cific absorption ratio (SAR).
Ryou move from one mobile network trans- mobile phones. Please contact an authorized
mitter/receiver area (mobile network cell) Mercedes-Benz Center for information on Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions
into another and no channels are free or the features available for your mobile phone of and illustrations in this section refer to audio
cell is full. choice. system.
i In order for the functions described in this

section to work correctly, the Bluetooth®
telephone must be linked to the audio sys-
171
Controls in detail
Audio system
Caller ID outgoing call, the No Service message will Activating Bluetooth®
The audio system can display the telephone appear for a short while. X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobile
number and the name of the caller, e. g. for RIf you switch off the audio system in the phone operating instructions).
an incoming call and also in other menus or middle of a call, e. g. by switching off the X Enter the PIN (not necessary with some
displays. ignition, that call will be cut off. You can mobile phones or network).
For the telephone number to be displayed, prevent this from happening as follows:
the caller must transmit their telephone num- X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the
- Switch the mobile phone to “private
ber. Otherwise Unknown will be shown on the mode” before switching the audio sys-
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating
audio display. instructions).
tem off (see mobile phone operating
This is also the case for name displays. For instructions). X Press button h on the audio control unit
this, the telephone number and the name of to call up the telephone mode.
the caller must also be saved in the telephone
book. Activating the mobile phone i On certain mobile phones, not only do you
have to activate the Bluetooth® function
Functional restrictions Prerequisites for the mobile phone
but your own device must additionally be
You will not be able to use the mobile phone, For making calls using the audio system via made “visible” for other devices.
or you may have to wait a while, in the fol- the Bluetooth® interface, you will need a Blue-
Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
lowing situations: tooth® enabled mobile phone.
device name. It is recommended to give
RIf the mobile phone is switched off. Before attempting to make or receive calls via your mobile phone a personal name, by
RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the the Bluetooth® interface, check your mobile which you can clearly recognize your
Bluetooth® interface to the audio system. phone's hands-free profile. It must support mobile phone.
version 1.0 or higher (see mobile phone oper-
RThe mobile phone must not be locked. ating instructions). i If the Bluetooth® function on the audio
RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a i Not all mobile phones on the market are system is disabled, the message Blue-
network signal. suitable. Further information on suitable tooth not activated in system set-
The mobile phone automatically tries to log mobile phones and on connecting Blue- tings appears.
into a network. If no network is available, tooth® enabled mobile phones to the audio
you will also not be able to make a “911” system are available from an authorized
emergency call. If you attempt to make an Mercedes-Benz Center.
172
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will be
audio system (Y page 140). identified by a telephone-symbol ¿ in front
X ê £ System Settings £ Blue- of the list entry once the telephone list has
been updated (The symbol will be grayed
tooth £ Activate Bluetooth.
out if the authorized mobile phone is not
You have activated or deactivated Blue- located in the Bluetooth® range.).
tooth®. A checkmark appears when Blue-
tooth® is activated. i The duration of the search procedure
depends on the number and type of Blue-
tooth® telephones. The search may take a i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit
Registering a mobile phone (authoriz-
few minutes. number, which you can set yourself. For the
ing)
quality of coding of the connection it is rec-
When you use your mobile phone in conjunc- i If the telephone list is already full ommend to use a passcode of at least four
tion with the audio system for the first time, (15 entries), you must de-authorize one of digits. You must enter the same number in
you must register (authorize) it. the authorized devices, and start the the audio system and also in the device to
It is possible to register up to 10 mobile search again. Otherwise a new device you be authorized. Please also refer to the
phone. The connection is always established are looking for will not appear in the list. instructions in the mobile phone operating
to the last activated mobile phones in signal If the audio system does not find your guide.
range. When you authorize a new mobile mobile phone, external authorization may On the audio system, you can enter the pass-
phone, it is activated automatically. You can be necessary (Y page 174). code via the digits in the on-screen menu bar
switch between the authorized mobile or via the telephone keypad in the audio con-
phones. Authorizing a Bluetooth® device trol unit.
Searching for a mobile phone X Select the desired unauthorized device With the menu bar:
X
from the telephone list by pressing the but- X Entering passcode: Select the digits in the
h £ Phone £ Bluetooth Phones
tons $, % and C. menu bar one by one, by pressing the but-
£ Update.
or tons & and (.
The audio system searches for suitable
X Select Options £ Authorize. X Press button C to confirm each digit.
Bluetooth® telephones within range and
enters them in the telephone list. The input menu for the passcode appears. Z
173
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Confirming passcode: Select d in the i You may need to enter a confirmation Update £ Options £ External
menu bar and press button C to confirm. once you have entered the passcode on Authorization.
X
your mobile phone. Check your mobile The message Ready for External
Deleting digits: Select õ in the menu
phone display. Authorization appears.
bar and briefly press button C to delete
one digit, or press and hold button C to If the message Authorization Proce- X Start Bluetooth® search procedure on the
delete all entered digits. dure Unsuccessful appears on the audio
mobile phone (see the operating instruc-
system display, you may have exceeded the
X Canceling entry: Press button í. tions for the mobile phone).
preset period for authorization. Repeat the
process. X Select the audio system (“MB Bluetooth”)
With keypad on audio control unit: at your mobile phone.
X
The device is authorized. You can now make
Entering passcode: Press the desired X When prompted to do so, enter the pass-
calls via the audio system hands-free device
numbers on the keypad. code on the mobile phone and then on the
using the authorized mobile phone.
X Confirming passcode: Press button C. audio system.
External authorization
X Deleting digits: Briefly press button
If the audio system cannot find your mobile Displaying details on a mobile phone
î in the audio control unit to delete one
phone, this may be due to special security X h £ Phone £ Bluetooth Phones.
number, or press and hold button î to
settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
delete all entered numbers. you can check whether, conversely, your X Select the mobile phone from the list.
X Canceling entry: Press button í. mobile phone can find the audio system. The X Select Options £ Details.
audio system's Bluetooth® device name is The details screen for the device is shown
Entering passcode into the mobile “MB Bluetooth”. in the audio display.
phone X h £ Phone £ Bluetooth Phones X Closing details screen: Press button
£ Update £ Options £ External &, ( or C.
If a Bluetooth® connection is established suc-
Authorization.
cessfully, you will be prompted to enter a
code into the mobile phone (see the operating or De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device
instructions for the mobile phone). X ê £ System Settings £ Blue- X h £ Phone £ Bluetooth Phones.
X Enter the same passcode on the mobile tooth £ Bluetooth device list £ X Select authorized device.
phone as you did on the audio system.
174
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Select Options £ De-Authorize. X h £ Phone £ Bluetooth Phones. When the connected mobile phone is ready
A prompt appears asking whether you X
for operation, the display will look like this:
Select an authorized mobile phone from
really want to de-authorize this device. the list.
X Select Yes or No. X Press button C to confirm.
If you select Yes, the device will be de- The selected mobile phone will be searched
authorized. for and connected if it is located in the
Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is acti-
i If you de-authorize a device which has
vated on the corresponding device.
been authorized in the past and which is not
detected in the search, this device will no The selected mobile phone is activated.
longer be displayed in the device list. A dot R in front of the entry, indicates the The following information is displayed in the
Devices which have been authorized in the current active mobile phone in the phone status bar:
past but which are not detected in the list. RBluetooth® device name of the connected
search are either not switched on or not in mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile
the vehicle. Receiving business cards
RMobile phone network signal strength
You can import business cards (vCards) into
Activating another mobile phone the address book from external Bluetooth® I. This information will only be shown
devices (Y page 177). with suitable mobile phones.
If you have several authorized mobile phones,
you can switch between the individual mobile The bars indicate the current signal
phones. TEL-Basic display strength of the mobile phone network for
reception. Optimum reception is indicated
i You cannot switch to another authorized X Press button h on the audio control unit by all bars full. All bars empty indicates very
mobile phone during a call. to call up the telephone mode. poor or no reception.
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is RReceiver symbol s or t. The
i When in telephone mode, you can access
automatically activated. Only one mobile receiver symbol indicates whether a call is
phone can be active at a time. the TEL-Basic display by pressing button
í repeatedly. being connected or is in progress:
t - not active
175
Controls in detail
Audio system
RREADY indicates that a call is possible. Emergency calls “911” active. Check with your local service pro-
RNO viders.
SERVICE indicates that the mobile net- i The “911” emergency call system is a
work is not available. public service. Using it without due cause If you cannot make an emergency call, you
is a criminal offense. will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
Setting transmit and receive volume
i This function places a call to the local 911 GSM network phones
i These settings should normally not be provider. It does not initiate a Tele Aid call.
changed as the factory settings are Placing a “911” emergency call using
The following describes how to dial a “911” audio control unit with the mobile phone
matched to most mobile phones. Find out
emergency call using the audio system head unlocked
about the optimum settings for your mobile
unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
phone at an authorized Mercedes-Benz X Press h button to switch to telephone
phone is connected via the Bluetooth® inter-
Center. mode.
face to the audio system. Unless otherwise
specified, the descriptions refer to the audio X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
i Changes may result in significant impair-
system head unit. audio control unit.
ments to the transmission quality. These
settings may not be changed during an Consult the separate mobile phone operating X Press s button.
active phone call. instructions that came with your mobile Connecting... appears in the audio dis-
phone for information on how to place a play while the mobile phone establishes the
X h £ Phone £ Adjust Volume £ “911” emergency call on the mobile phone. connection.
Reception Volume or Transmission The following conditions must be met for a
X Wait until the emergency call center
Volume. “911” emergency call via the audio system:
answers, then describe the emergency.
X Setting the volume: Press button $ or RMobile phone must be switched on.
%. RThe i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, with
corresponding mobile communica-
The volume bar moves up or down. tions network must be available. a few types of mobile phones NO SERV-
X Confirming selection: Press button C. ICE appears in the audio display. In that
i Emergency calls may not be possible with case, you only can make an emergency call
all telephone networks or if certain network on the mobile phone itself, without the use
services and/or telephone functions are of the audio control unit.
176
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call with the phone itself, without the use of the audio i If you switch to a different mode while
mobile phone locked control unit. vCards are being received (e. g., press but-
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can ton b), reception of vCards will be
make an emergency call on the mobile aborted.
Phone book
phone itself, without the use of the audio X h £ Phone £ Download Con-
control unit. You can save telephone numbers in the audio
tacts.
system’s phone book.
X Press button C to confirm.
CDMA network phones i These entries are retained even if you use
X Importing: Start the data transfer on the
the audio system with another mobile
Placing a “911” emergency call using phone. You should delete these entries external Bluetooth® phone (“Export busi-
audio control unit with the mobile phone before handing over or selling your vehicle. ness cards (vCards)”, see the operating
unlocked instructions for the mobile phone).
X Press h button to switch to telephone The audio system imports the data for the
Receiving business cards (vCards)
mode. business cards and displays the number of
You can import business cards (vCards) from business cards received.
X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
external Bluetooth® phones into your audio
audio control unit. i Select Back, press button í or switch
system’s phone book. To do this:
X Press s button. to a different mode to abort reception.
RBluetooth® must be activated on the audio
Connecting... appears in the audio dis- system and on the external Bluetooth® X Aborting reception: Press C.
play while the mobile phone establishes the phone (see the operating instructions for
connection. or
the mobile phone). X Press button í.
X Wait until the emergency call center RThe external Bluetooth® phone must be
answers, then describe the emergency.
able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see the
operating instructions for the mobile
Placing a “911” emergency call with the
phone).
mobile phone locked
RThe external Bluetooth® phone in the vehi-
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can
cle must be switched on and authorized.
make an emergency call on the mobile
177
Controls in detail
Audio system
Deleting external Data Symbol + indicates that an entry contains X Entering characters: Press button
more than one phone number. You can select ( or & to select the characters for
X h £ Phone £ Delete Contacts.
these subentries (Y page 179). the required entry.
A prompt appears asking whether the data
X Closing phone book: Press button í. The first letters you enter determine the
should be deleted.
first letters of the word you are looking for.
X Switching from the search speller to the
X Select Yes or No.
list: Press button $ repeatedly. X Press button C to confirm.
If you select Yes all personal data are then
X Switching from the list to the search The first entry containing the selected ini-
deleted from the phone book.
speller: Press button í. tial letters is highlighted in the list. If there
are a number of similar entries, the next
Opening the phone book different character is displayed.
Selecting an entry
X h £ Name. Example:
Selecting via search speller In the example, the first letters of the names
Entries in the phone book are displayed in
alphabetical order. The search speller is Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are the
X Switch if necessary from the list to the
active when more multiple entries are avail- same. The first possible distinct letter is the
search speller.
able. The search speller appears on the B or the K.
X Switching search speller character Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities.
lower edge of the display.
set: Select #.
You can use the search speller to reduce the Depending on the previous setting, this
number of entries you need to make. switches it to letters with special charac-
ters or numbers with special characters.
178
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Select the characters for the required entry
one after another.
As soon as the selection has been nar-
rowed down to a single entry, the audio
system will switch to the list automatically.
X Deleting an individual character: Select
õ and briefly press C.
or Phone book list 1 Phone book entry with subentries
X Press button î. Entries with symbol 1 have additional X Press button $ or % until the desired
After entering each character or after each options available, e. g. more phone numbers. subentry is highlighted.
deletion of a character, the closest match- X Press button $ or % until the desired
ing entry is given at the top of the list. X Press button C to confirm and a call will
entry is highlighted.
X
be initiated.
Deleting an entire entry: Select õ and X Press C to confirm and a call will be initi-
press and hold C until the entire entry has ated.
been deleted. Displaying details on an entry
or Selecting subentries The audio system can also fully display an
X Press and hold î until the entire entry X Select an entry with the symbol + from abbreviated entry.
has been deleted. the list and press button C. X Select entry.
X Ending search: Switch from the search Symbol + changes to / and the suben- X Select Options £ Details.
speller to the list. tries appear. A screen with the details of the selected
The top list entry is highlighted automati- entry appears.
cally.
X Closing details screen: Press button
Selecting via list ( or & until the desired entry is
highlighted.
X Switch if necessary from the search speller
to the list.
179
Controls in detail
Audio system
Deleting entry mobile phone and only use the audio sys- X Press button $ or % until the desired
tem’s hands-free device, these calls will not entry is highlighted.
X Select entry.
be listed. X Initiating call: Press button C or s.
X Select Options £ Delete.
X To close the lists: Press button í.
You will be prompted to confirm that you Calling up the list
really want to delete the entry.
X h £ Call Lists.
X Select Yes or No. Deleting call lists
X Select Calls Received or Calls
If you select Yes the actual entry is deleted i The saved call lists are retained in the
from the phone book. Dialed.
audio system, even if you use the audio
The appropriate list appears. system with another mobile phone. For this
reason you should delete any call lists
Call lists i If there is a symbol with a telephone
before handing over or selling the vehicle.
receiver in front of the phone number or the
The audio system displays the calls received name, then you have missed this call (e. g. X In the phone main menu select Call
(including missed calls) or made during phone in the highlighted line of the following fig- Lists.
mode in their own lists. ure).
X Select Delete Call Lists.
i The particular menu item can only be
selected if calls have already been received You will be prompted to confirm that you
or made from audio system. really want to delete the entry. The ques-
tion Do you want to delete the call
The display of missed calls in the audio sys-
lists appears in the display.
tem display is not possible with all mobile
phones. X Select Yes or No.
The control system displays the list of X Press button C to confirm.
dialed numbers in the multifunction dis- If you select Yes both lists are deleted.
play.
i The audio system’s call lists are not

synchronized with the call lists on your
mobile phone. If you make a call from your
180
Controls in detail
Audio system
Making calls character by pressing the ó once and X Entering digits: Press button ( or
then again within approx. 1.5 seconds. & to select the required digit.
X Press button h on the audio control unit
X Initiating a call: Press button s. X Press C to confirm.
to call up the telephone mode.
When the mobile phone is ready for opera- X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press X Repeat the procedure, until you have select
tion, the display will look like this: button î in the audio control unit. all digits for the necessary phone number.
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold X Deleting individual digits: Press button
button î until the entire entry has been ( or & to select õ and briefly
deleted. press C.
or or
X Press button t. X Press button î.
X Deleting entire phone number: Press
Entering phone number via the telephone
button ( or & to select õ, press
main menu
and hold C until the phone number has
In addition to the actual menu bar, the tele- been deleted.
Initiating an outgoing call phone main menu features a second bar con-
taining numbers, the number menu. or
Entering phone number via the audio con- X
When the bar is active (highlighted), you can Press and hold button î until the entire
trol unit
select elements. entry has been deleted.
You can enter numbers and special charac-
X Initiating a call: Press button ( or
ters via the telephone keypad.
& to select ö.
X Entering: Use R to 9, ô and
ó to enter characters. X Press C to confirm.
You can enter the * character by pressing or
the ó button once. You can enter the + X Press button s.
181
Controls in detail
Audio system
Initiating a call to a phone book entry X Press button s. i Depending on the mobile phone you are
X h £ Name. or using, the audio system’s ringing tone may
differ from the one you have set on your
X Select entry (Y page 178). X Select ö and press button C. mobile phone. You may hear
X Press button s or C. The dialed calls list appears. The call dialed Rthe ringing tone set on the mobile phone
last will be at the top of the list.
Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone
Initiating a call to a call list entry X Selecting a call: Press button $ or
% until the desired entry is highlighted. Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone
X h £ Call Lists.
and the ringing tone set on the mobile
X Select Calls Received or Calls X Initiating call: Press button C or s. phone.
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears. Aborting dialing or ending a call If the caller’s name and number are among
the entries in the audio system’s phone book
X Select entry (Y page 180). X h £ 4 and press button C. and the caller has not withheld this informa-
X Press button s or C. tion, it will appear on the display. If the caller
or
withholds this information, you will see:
X Press button t on the audio control unit
Redialing
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
Rejecting or accepting calls

You will be notified of an incoming call by the
ringing tone and a message on the display.
i In order to use the redial function, no

numbers may have been entered.
182
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Accepting: Press button s on audio Functions during a single call Answering machines or other devices can be
control unit or on the multifunction steering controlled via DTMF tones, e. g. for remote
wheel. Switching hands-free microphone on or query functions.
or off X Transmitting individual characters: Dur-
X Press button C. ing a call select the required characters.

The menu bar changes when you make or
X Rejecting: Press button t on audio receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists or
menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear. X Press the corresponding button on the
control unit.
X
audio control unit.
or Switching off: Select Mic Off.
Every selected character is transmitted
X Press button ( to select Reject, and The following message will flash up on the
immediately.
press button C to confirm. display: The microphone is off.
X Transmitting a phone number of a
The call is rejected. When the microphone is switched off the
symbol > appears in the main area. phone book entry as a sequence of char-
If you have accepted the call using the audio acters: Select Name.
X Switching on: Select Mic On.
control unit or the multifunction steering X Select the desired phone book entry.
wheel, the call will be conducted via the The following message will flash up on the
hands-free system. The volume of the call can display: The microphone is on. The entry is transmitted immediately as a
be adjusted (Y page 136). sequence of characters.
The microphone is switched on and the
Further operating functions can be found in symbol > disappears in the main area. X Switching back to call display: Select
the “Functions during a single-call” section Back.
(Y page 183). i You can also switch the microphone on or
You can also accept a call if the audio display off by pressing button F.
is showing a screen other than the telephone
mode screen. After accepting the call, the Sending DTMF tones
display switches to the phone display. Once
the call is over, the display for the previous i This function is not possible with all
mode will appear again. mobile phones.
183
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed Objects stored in this area may impair
and for safe brake operation. pedal movement which could interfere with
Introduction the braking ability of the cruise control sys-
Only use the cruise control if the road, traf-
The cruise control driving system is described fic, and weather conditions make it advisa- tem.
on the following pages. ble to travel at a constant speed. Do not place your foot under the brake
The ABS, BAS and ESP® driving safety sys- RThe use of the cruise control can be dan- pedal – your foot could become caught.
tems are described in the “Safety and secur- gerous on winding roads or in heavy traf- Keep in mind that the cruise control is a
ity” section (Y page 58) fic because conditions do not allow safe convenience system designed to assist the
driving at a constant speed. driver during vehicle operation. The driver
RThe use of the cruise control can be dan- is and must always remain responsible for
Cruise control the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake oper-
gerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
The cruise control automatically maintains in tire traction can result in wheel spin ation.
the speed you set for your vehicle. and loss of control.
The use of the cruise control is recommended RDeactivate the cruise control when driv-
for driving at a constant speed for extended ing in fog.
periods of time.
The “Resume” function should only be
The currently set speed or last set speed
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
(“Resume” function) appears in the status
previously set speed and wishes to resume
indicator of the multifunction display:
this particular preset speed.
RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles
G Warning!
RCanada only: e.g. Ñ 90 Km/h
The cruise control brakes automatically so
G Warning! that the set speed is not exceeded. The
1 Setting current or higher speed
The cruise control is a convenience system brake pedal depresses automatically when
designed to assist the driver during vehicle the cruise control engages the brakes. 2 Setting current or lower speed
operation. The driver is and must always Keep the driver’s foot area clear at all times, 3 Canceling the cruise control
including the area under the brake pedal. 4 Resume to last set speed
184
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating cruise control On downhill grades, the cruise control The cruise control switches off automatically
maintains the set speed by braking with the when
You can activate the cruise control at vehicle
vehicle’s brake system. Ryou depress the brake pedal.
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You cannot activate the cruise control: In addition, on longer downhill grades the Ryou engage the parking brake.
Rwhen you brake automatic transmission will automatically Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake downshift. (30 km/h).
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park i Vehicles with manual transmission:
Rthe ESP® is in operation.
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral posi- If you depress the clutch pedal when shift- Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
tion N ing into another gear, the engine speed may switch.
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off increase. Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a mal-
due to a malfunction RAlways drive with sufficient, but not function.
excessive, engine speed. RVehicles with manual transmission: you
Setting current speed RShift the gear in a timely manner. engage neutral or depress the clutch pedal
X
RAvoid shifting down more than one gear for more than 7 seconds during shifting into
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
if at all possible. another gear.
speed.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: you
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direc-
shift the automatic transmission into neu-
tion of arrow 1 or depress in direction of Canceling cruise control tral position N while driving.
arrow 2.
X Depress the brake pedal. Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
or deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
pedal.
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise con-
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may direction of arrow 3. trol will resume the last set speed.
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once The last set speed is stored for later use.
the grade eases, the set speed will be
The last stored set speed is canceled when
resumed.
the engine is turned off.
185
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Changing the set speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
G Warning!
X Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direc-
Keep in mind that it may take a brief tion of arrow 1 to increase or in direction
moment until the vehicle has made the nec-
of arrow 2 to decrease.
essary adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed
to a value that the prevailing road condi- Resume last stored speed
tions and legal speed limits permit. Other-
G Warning!
wise, sudden and unexpected acceleration
or deceleration of the vehicle could cause The set speed stored in memory should
an accident and/or serious injury to you only be set again if prevailing road condi-
and others. tions and legal speed limits permit. Possi-
ble acceleration or deceleration differen-
When you use the cruise control lever to ces arising from returning to the preset
decelerate, the brake system will automati- speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
cally brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking ous injury to you and others.
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direc-
X Lift the cruise control lever in direction of
arrow 1 and hold it up to increase, or tion of arrow 4.
depress the cruise control lever in direction X Remove your foot from the accelerator
of arrow 2 and hold it down to decrease, pedal.
until the desired speed is reached. The last stored set speed is canceled when
X Release the cruise control lever. the engine is turned off.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
186
Controls in detail
Climate control system

Overview of climate control system functions
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control Automatic climate control
The climate control combines a heating and ventilation system with The automatic climate control combines an automatic heating and
a cooling system. ventilation system with a cooling system. You can adjust the auto-
matic climate control separately for the driver’s and passenger side.
187
Controls in detail

Control panels
Climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Temperature control, driver’s side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
2 Q Air volume control (Y page 196)
Climate control on/off i Switch on the climate control system. (Y page 192)
188
Controls in detail

3 Air distribution control (Y page 195)
4 Temperature control, passenger side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
5 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster (Y page 198)
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
6 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 196)
the side windows are clear again.
7 9 AC cooling on/off i Switch on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp in (Y page 193)
button 9 comes on.
9 Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue (Y page 197)
to heat or ventilate the interior.
8 , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 197)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
189
Controls in detail
1 Q Air volume (Y page 196)
2 U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode) i Switch on the automatic mode. The indicator lamp in (Y page 193)
button U comes on.
3 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 196)
the side windows are clear again.
4 Á Temperature control, driver’s side, raising i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
190
Controls in detail

5 ´ Climate control on/off i Switch on the climate control system. The indicator (Y page 192)
lamp in button ´ goes out.
6 Á Temperature control, passenger side, raising i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
7 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster (Y page 198)
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
8 Air distribution (Y page 195)
9 T Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue (Y page 197)
to heat or ventilate the interior.
a 2 AC cooling on/off i Switch on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp in (Y page 193)
button 2 comes on.
b Â Temperature control, passenger side, lowering i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
c Display
d Â Temperature control, driver’s side, lowering i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 194)
e , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 197)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
191
Controls in detail

Notes on climate control system The air conditioning will not engage (no cool- Deactivating the climate control sys-
ing) if the A/C mode (Y page 193) is deacti- tem
The climate control system is operational vated.
whenever the engine is running. You can G Warning!
operate the climate control system in either G Warning!
When the climate control is switched off,
the automatic9 or manual mode. The system Follow the recommended settings for heat-
the outside air supply and circulation are
cools or heats the interior depending on the ing and cooling given on the following
also switched off. Only choose this setting
selected interior temperature and the current pages. Otherwise the windows could fog
for a short time when the retractable hard-
outside temperature. up, impairing visibility and endangering you
top is closed. Otherwise the windows could
It can only function optimally when you are and others.
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
driving with the windows and the retractable Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind- you and others.
hardtop closed. shield free of snow and debris.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors When the retractable hardtop is closed, do
are filtered out before outside air enters the Climate control
not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
passenger compartment through the air dis- air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear X Deactivating: Set air volume control 2
tribution system. window. (Y page 188) to position 0.
G Warning! i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the X Reactivating: Set air volume control 2 to
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) interior before driving off. The climate con- any speed.
may require replacement of the filter before trol will then adjust the interior tempera- The previous settings are once again in
its scheduled replacement interval. A clog- ture to the set value much faster. effect.
ged filter will reduce the air volume to the
interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Have a clogged filter replaced
as soon as possible at an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
9 Vehicles with automatic climate control
192
Controls in detail

Automatic climate control up more quickly. Window fogging may The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
impair visibility and endanger you and oth- R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
X Deactivating: Press button ´.
ers. are harmful to the ozone layer.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button ´ again. i Condensation may drip out from under-
Automatic mode
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. neath the vehicle. This is normal and not an
The previous settings are once again in indication of a malfunction. The automatic mode is available in vehicles
effect. with automatic climate control only.
or Deactivating When operating the climate control system in
X
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
Press button U. It is possible to deactivate the cooling func- air volume and air distribution are adjusted
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. tion of the climate control system. The inte- automatically.
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted rior air will then no longer be cooled or In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidifi-
automatically. dehumidified. cation is switched on. This function can be
X Press button 910/211. switched off if necessary.
Air conditioning
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. G Warning!
The cooling function switches off after a If you switch off the cooling function, the
The air conditioning is operational while the short delay. vehicle will not be cooled when weather
engine is running and cools the interior air to conditions are warm. The windows can fog
the temperature set by the operator. In addi- up more quickly. Window fogging may
tion, the air conditioning dehumidifies the Activating
impair visibility and endanger you and oth-
interior air and helps prevent window fogging. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can ers.
G Warning! dehumidify the interior air with the air condi-
tioning. X Activating: Press button U.
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather X Press button 910/211 again. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
conditions are warm. The windows can fog The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
10 Vehicles with climate control
193
Controls in detail

X Press buttons Á or Â to separately Adjusting air vents i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjust the interior air temperature on each adjustable center and side air vents to the
side of the passenger compartment. G Warning! middle position.
The temperature of the interior air is When operating the climate control, the air
adjusted automatically. that enters the passenger compartment
Center air vents
through the air vents can be very hot or very
X Deactivating: Press button U again. cold (depending on the set temperature).
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro-
The air volume changes to level 2 and the tected skin in the immediate area of the air
air distribution changes to b. vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
Setting the temperature vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
You can adjust the air temperature on each adjustment to direct the air to air vents in
side of the passenger compartment. You the vehicle interior that are not in the imme-
should raise or lower the temperature setting diate area of unprotected skin.
in small increments, preferably starting at 1 Left center air vent, fixed
Please comply with the following instructions
72‡ (22†).
in order for the climate control to function 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
optimally: fixed/adjustable left center air vents
Climate control
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the 3 Left center air vent, adjustable
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn tempera- windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and 4 Right center air vent, adjustable
ture control 1 and/or 4 (Y page 188) any other debris. 5 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the fixed/adjustable right center air vents
passenger compartment free from obstruc- 6 Right center air vent, fixed
Automatic climate control tion.
X Increasing/decreasing: Press button
Á or Â until the desired temperature
appears in display c .
194
Controls in detail

X Opening the center air vents: Turn 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for You can switch on the AIRSCARF neck-level
thumbwheels 2 and 5 upward to the first adjustable left side air vent heating with the AIRSCARF switch
stop. (Y page 75).
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3 in
Center air vents 1, 3, 4 and 6 are
the required direction.
open.
Adjusting air distribution
X Turn thumbwheels 2 and 5 upward all
the way. AIRSCARF vent The symbols on the control represent the fol-
lowing functions:
Only center air vents 3 and 4 are open. G Warning!
X When switching on the AIRSCARF neck- Symbol Function
Closing the center air vents: Turn thumb-
wheels 2 and 5 downward all the way. level heating, the air streaming from the Z Directs air to the windshield and
Center air vents 1, 3, 4 and 6 are openings may be very hot. When in close
through the side defroster air
closed. proximity to the openings, you could be
vents
seriously burned. To help avoid serious per-
sonal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a b Directs air into the entire vehi-
Side air vents lower heating level. cle interior
Y Directs air to the footwells and
through the side air vents
a Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Climate control
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Example illustration driver’s side
1 AIRSCARF vent
1 Left side defroster air vent, fixed Z
2 Left side air vent, adjustable
195
Controls in detail

X Turn air distribution control 3 Adjusting air volume Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
(Y page 188) to the desired symbol. power, depending on outside tempera-
The air distribution is adjusted according to Climate control ture
the chosen setting. Rair flows onto the windshield and the
X Decrease/increase: Turn air volume con-
You can also turn the control to a position front door windows (side air vents must
trol 2 (Y page 188) clockwise or counter-
between two symbols. be open)
clockwise.
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Automatic climate control switches on at outside temperatures
Automatic climate control above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
X Turn air distribution control 8 to the
X Decrease/increase: Turn air volume con- drying
desired symbol.
trol 1 clockwise or counterclockwise. Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
The air distribution is adjusted according to
the chosen setting. X Deactivating: Press button y again.
You can also turn the control to a position Front defroster The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
between two symbols. The previous settings are once again in
You can use this setting to defrost the wind-
shield, for example if it is iced up. effect.
You can also defog the windshield and the i The cooling remains switched on.
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the Windshield fogged on the outside
windshield or the side windows are clear
again. i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
X Activating: Press button y.
The climate control switches to the follow-
ing functions automatically:
196
Controls in detail

X Switch the windshield wipers on Air recirculation mode A quantity of outside air is added after
(Y page 88). approximately 30 minutes.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
X Press button U12. X
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle Deactivating: Press button , again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. from the outside (e. g. before driving through The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air distribution and air volume are adjusted a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
automatically. outside air and recirculates the air in the pas- i The manually selected air recirculation
or senger compartment. mode is deactivated automatically:
X Turn air distribution control to a or G Warning! Rafter 5 minutes if the outside tempera-
Y. Fogged windows impair visibility, endan- ture is below approximately 41‡ (5†)
gering you and others. If the windows begin Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
to fog on the inside, switching off the air turned off
Maximum cooling MAX COOL recirculation mode immediately should
Rafter 30 minutes if the outside tempera-
clear interior window fogging. If interior
MAX COOL is only available in vehicles with window fogging persists, make sure the air ture is above approximately 41‡ (5†)
automatic climate control. conditioning is activated, or press button
If the air distribution controls as well as the y.
air volume control are set to U and there Residual heat and ventilation
is a high demand for cooling, MAX COOL is X Activating: Press button ,.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
activated. MAX COOL appears in display c . The indicator lamp in the button comes on. continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
This provides the fastest possible cooling of up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the vehicle interior (when retractable hardtop i The air recirculation mode is activated
the residual heat produced by the engine.
is closed). automatically at high outside tempera-
tures. i If you switch on the residual heat function
The indicator lamp in button , is not lit when outside temperatures are high, only
when the air recirculation mode is auto- the ventilation will be switched on.
matically switched on.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and Z
197
Controls in detail
Rear window defroster

the selected temperature. The blower will Rear window defroster ! The rear window defroster cannot be
run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air switched on when the retractable hardtop
volume control setting. G Warning! is open. The indicator lamp will start flash-
ing if the hardtop is open.
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. Any accumulation of snow and ice should
be removed from the rear window before RClose the retractable hardtop.
X Press button 913/T14.
driving. Visibility could otherwise be The rear window defroster can then be
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. impaired, endangering you and others. switched on.
X Deactivating: Press button 913/ The rear window defroster uses a large X Switching off: Press button ¯ again.
T14. amount of power. To keep the battery drain
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. to a minimum, switch off the defroster as ! If the rear window defroster switches off
soon as the rear window is clear. The too soon and the indicator lamp starts
The residual heat is automatically turned off: defroster is automatically switched off after flashing, too many electrical consumers
Rwhen the ignition is switched on some time of operation depending on the out- are operating simultaneously and there is
Rafter approximately 30 minutes side temperature. insufficient voltage in the battery. The sys-
X Switch on the ignition. tem responds automatically by switching
Rif the battery voltage drops
the rear window defroster off.
X Switching on: Press button ¯ on the
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
respective climate control panel. As soon as the battery has sufficient volt-
age, the rear window defroster switches
back on automatically.
13 Vehicles with climate control

198
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop Properly lock the retractable hardtop ! Never sit or place heavy objects on the
before continuing to drive. Otherwise, the rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to
Safety notes unlocked hardtop could open while the the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose
can only be opened and closed when the vehi- control of the vehicle. You or others could ! Please keep in mind that weather condi-
cle is standing still. be injured as a result. tions can sometimes change rapidly. Make
sure to close the retractable hardtop when
G Observe Safety notes, see G Warning! leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehi-
page 55. cle interior, vehicle electronics could be
Before operating the retractable hardtop,
G Warning! make sure there is no danger of anyone damaged which is not covered by the Mer-
To prevent possible accidents, only drive being injured by the moving parts (retract- cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the vehicle with the retractable hardtop able hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid).
! When opening and closing the retractable
either completely closed and locked, or Hands must never be placed near the roof
fully lowered into its storage compartment. hardtop, make sure
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop,
Rthere is sufficient clearance for the
If the retractable hardtop does not com- shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the
pletely open or close, the roof hydraulics retractable hardtop is being raised or low- retractable hardtop to move up and for
will lose pressure and the retractable hard- ered. Serious personal injury may occur. the trunk lid to move back
top is lowered If potential danger exists, release the Rthe luggage cover is installed, extended
Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the retractable hardtop switch or button k and closed
ignition is switched on or j on the SmartKey. This immediately Rthe trunk is loaded only to the height of
Rafter
interrupts the raising or lowering proce- the luggage cover
approximately 15 seconds when
dure. You then can operate the retractable
the ignition is switched off Rthe luggage/cargo does not push up the
hardtop switch or press button k or
Shortly before the retractable hardtop is j on the SmartKey to raise or lower the closed luggage cover
lowered, a warning will sound. In the multi- retractable hardtop away from the danger Rthe trunk lid is closed
function display you will see K and the zone Rthe outside temperature is above +5‡
message Retractable Roof Lowering. (-15†)
Z
199
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Otherwise the retractable hardtop and X Close the trunk lid. With the SmartKey
trunk as well as other parts of the vehicle X Switch on the ignition.
could be damaged. G Observe Safety notes, see
page 199.
Opening
Opening and closing i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry
before you open it. Otherwise water may
With the retractable hardtop switch enter the trunk interior.
X Push and hold the retractable hardtop
page 199. switch in direction of arrow 1 until the
retractable hardtop is completely lowered
into its trunk storage compartment.
Closing
X Push and hold the retractable hardtop
X Close the luggage cover (Y page 202).
switch in direction of arrow 2 until the
retractable hardtop is completely closed X Close the trunk lid.
and locked. X Aim the transmitter eye at an outside door
handle.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
the outside door handle.
Retractable hardtop switch
1 Opening Opening (Summer opening feature)
2 Closing
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry
X Engage the parking brake. before you open it. Otherwise water may
enter the trunk interior.
X Close the luggage cover (Y page 202).
200
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
X Press and hold button k until the If the retractable hardtop is not properly X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
retractable hardtop is completely open. locked, lock it as follows. closed position, push the retractable hard-
The rear side windows also open. top switch (Y page 200) forward until the
Unlocked status noticed when stopped retractable hardtop is fully closed.
X Release button k to interrupt the open-
ing procedure. X Switch on the ignition. or
X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
X Press and hold button k once more to X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
closed position, push the retractable hard- opened position, push the retractable hard-
open the door windows.
top switch (Y page 200) forward until the top switch (Y page 200) rearward until the
retractable hardtop is fully closed. retractable hardtop is fully opened.
Closing (Convenience closing feature)
X Press and hold button j until the or
retractable hardtop is completely closed. X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully Wind screen
All currently open windows also close. opened position, push the retractable hard-
top switch (Y page 200) rearward until the G Warning!
X Release button j to interrupt the clos-
retractable hardtop is fully opened. The wind screen can restrict the driver’s
ing procedure.
vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent
a possible accident when visibility is limited
Unlocked status noticed while driving (e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the
Locking
G Warning! wind screen should be folded back.
G Observe Safety notes, see Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as The wind screen deflects drafts away from the
page 199. soon as it is safe to do so and lock the driver and passenger when the retractable
The retractable hardtop is not fully closed and retractable hardtop before continuing to hardtop is lowered.
locked or not fully opened and locked if drive. You could otherwise endanger your- The wind screen is stored in a storage bag
Rthe message K Retractable Roof In self and others. located on the wall behind the seat backrests.
Operation appears in the multifunction
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
display
soon as it is safe to do so.
Ra warning sounds for 10 seconds when
X Leave the ignition switched on. Z
driving off or while driving
201
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Installing Luggage cover
X Remove wind screen 1 from its storage The luggage cover covers luggage/cargo in
bag and unfold. the trunk.
X Attach supporting straps 3 to fastening ! To prevent damage to the retractable
pins 4. hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering
X Make sure the lower wind screen edging is the retractable hardtop:
inserted through gap 5 between the stor- RLoad trunk only to the height of the lug-
age compartment and the rear panel. gage cover.
X Close snap fasteners 2 by pushing in han- RDo not permit luggage/cargo to push up
1 Wind screen dle cap 6. the closed luggage cover.
2 Snap fastener (with handle cap) X RDo not place anything on top of or in front
Pull wind screen 1 on molding over roll
3 Supporting strap bars. Pull the wind screen edging, not on of the luggage cover.
4 Fastening pin the netting itself. RDo not place anything on the shelf behind
5 Gap the roll bar.
Removing
X Pull wind screen 1 from roll bars.
X Open snap fasteners 2 by pulling out han-
dle cap 6.
X Loosen supporting straps 3 from fasten-
ing pins 4.
X Fold the wind screen and put it back into
storage bag.
6 Handle cap
202
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Closing Loading and storing Parcel nets
X Pull the luggage cover at the handle in Roof rack G Warning!
direction of the arrow until it engages on
! This vehicle is not designed to carry items The parcel net is intended for storing light-
both sides at the trunk sill.
on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
devices, unless expressly approved by Mer- etc.
Opening cedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
X Press the release handle on the luggage must not be used as they will damage the fragile objects may not be transported in
cover. vehicle and retractable hardtop. the parcel net. In an accident, during hard
At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
X Guide the luggage cover forward to its end
not offer any roof racks or any other roof- be thrown around inside the vehicle and
stop. cause injury to vehicle occupants.
mounted devices for use on this vehicle.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any goods in the event of an accident.
items on its trunk lid or accommodate any
Parcel nets are located in the passenger foot-
type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such
well and behind the driver’s seat.
devices may damage the vehicle and
retractable hardtop mechanism.
203
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Storage compartments mode, see (Y page 168) or on media inter- Storage compartment under armrest
face, see (Y page 162).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a col-
lision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not place anything on shelf behind the
roll bars.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being 1 Armrest
1 Glove box lid release 2 Recess for opening storage compartment
thrown about and injuring vehicle occu-
pants during 2 Glove box lid
i The Roadside Assistance button p
Rbraking X Opening: Pull glove box lid release 1. (Y page 210) and the Information button
Rvehicle maneuvers X Closing: Push glove box lid 2 up until it ¡ (Y page 211) are located in the stor-
Ran accident engages. age compartment.
X Opening: Reach into recess 2 on the left
The glove box and the storage compartment
or right side and lift armrest 1 in direction
under the armrest are locked and unlocked
of arrow.
centrally.
X Closing: Lower armrest 1 until it engages.
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface are located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
204
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment between the seat Shelf behind roll bars Useful features
backrests
G Warning! Cup holders
The shelf behind the roll bars should not be
G Warning!
used to carry objects. This will prevent such
objects from being thrown around and In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
injuring vehicle occupants during an acci- vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
dent or sudden maneuver. ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
do not fill containers to a height where the
objects.
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
pants may cause serious personal injury.
1 Storage compartment lid release
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
2 Storage compartment cause damage not covered by the Mer-
X
Opening: Press storage compartment lid
release 1. When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause
X Closing: Push storage compartment lid up injury to you or others when contacted dur-
until it engages. ing braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle inte-
rior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
205
Controls in detail
Useful features
X Close vanity mirror cover 6 (if opened).
X Disengage sun visor 5 from mounting
2.
X Pivot sun visor 5 to the side.
X Adjust sun visor 5 by pushing or pulling.
Vanity mirror
The mirror lamp only functions when the sun
1 Cover plate 1 Vanity mirror lamp visor is engaged in mounting.
2 Mounting X To use vanity mirror 4, lift up vanity mirror
X Opening: Press briefly on cover plate 1.
3 Holder, e.g. for gas cards cover 6.
X Closing: Press cover plate 1 until the cup Vanity mirror lamp 1 comes on.
4 Vanity mirror
holder engages.
5 Sun visor
6 Vanity mirror cover
Ashtray
Sun visors
Glare through the windshield G Warning!
G Warning! Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. X Flip sun visor 5 down when you experi- standing still.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors ence glare.
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
Glare through a door window
i This feature is only available on vehicles
with interior lighting package.
206
Controls in detail
Useful features
X Push the ashtray insert down into the
retainer until it engages.
X Closing: Press cover plate 1 until the ash-
tray engages.
Cigarette lighter
page 55.
1 Cover plate G Warning! 1 Cigarette lighter
Never touch the heating element or sides
X Opening: Press cover plate 1 briefly in of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold X Switch on the ignition.
direction of the arrow. the knob only. X Push in cigarette lighter 1.
X Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehicle Make sure any children traveling with you Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automati-
from movement by setting the parking do not injure themselves or start a fire with cally when hot.
brake. the hot cigarette lighter.
X Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket
X Automatic transmission: Shift the auto- after use.
matic transmission into neutral position
N. ! The lighter socket can be used to accom-
X Manual transmission: Shift the manual modate 12V DC electrical accessories (up
transmission into 2nd gear. to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use
with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug
X Reach into both recesses on the left and type. Keep in mind, however, that connect-
right side of the retainer and pull out the ing accessories to the lighter socket (for
ashtray insert. example extensive connecting and discon-
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Place the necting, or using plugs that do not fit prop-
ashtray insert into the retainer. erly) can damage the lighter socket. With Z
207
Controls in detail
Useful features
the socket damaged, the lighter may not Tele Aid itoring services, connection and cellular air
function properly any longer. time.
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
Rvehicle battery power is available
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
Power outlet
operational, please press the ¡ button GPS signals are available and pass the
The power outlet can be used to accommo- to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to information on to the Response Center.
date 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air complete either of these steps may result
pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of in a system that is not activated. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
15 A (180 W). possible if the vehicle is able to receive sig-
If you have any questions regarding activa-
X Switch on the ignition. nals from the GPS satellite network and
tion, please call the Response Center at
pass the information on to the Response
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
Center.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID The Tele Aid system
and password in the mail. You may use this (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
password to access the Tele Aid section in The Tele Aid system consists of three types
“Owner's Online” at mbusa.com. The “My of response:
Tele Aid” section will give you access to
RAutomatic and manual emergency
account information, remote door unlock and
more. RRoadside Assistance
The Tele Aid system is available if RInformation
Power outlet in passenger footwell
Rithas been activated and is operational.
1 Power outlet The Tele Aid system is operational providing
Activation requires a subscription for mon- that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly
connected, not damaged, and cellular and
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid sys-
tem utilizes the cellular network for commu-
nication and the GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites for vehicle location. If
208
Controls in detail
Useful features
either of these signals are unavailable, the If a malfunction is indicated as outlined vehicle model, identification number and
Tele Aid system may not function and if this above, the system may not operate as color are generated.
occurs, assistance must be summoned by expected. In case of an emergency, help A voice connection between the Response
other means. will have to be summoned by other means. Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele have to be summoned by other means. be established automatically soon after the
Aid call do the following: Have the system checked at the nearest emergency call has been initiated. The
X Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the Response Center will attempt to determine
Press button æ or ç on the multi-
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in more precisely the nature of the emergency
function steering wheel.
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as provided they can speak to an occupant of
or soon as possible. the vehicle.
X Use the volume knob on your audio system i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
or COMAND system headunit. ambulance will be sent to the vehicle imme-
Emergency calls
diately.
System self-test An emergency call is initiated automatically
following an accident in which the Emergency G Warning!
The system performs a self-test after you Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy. If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
have switched on the ignition. flashing continuously and there was no
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
G Warning! ually (Y page 210). voice connection to the Response Center
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in established, then the Tele Aid system could
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
the Roadside Assistance button p and/ not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rel-
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
or in the Information button ¡ do not evant cellular phone network is not availa-
flash. The message Connecting Call ble).
come on during the system self-test, or if appears in the multifunction display and the
any of these indicators remain illuminated audio system or the COMAND system is The message Call Failed appears in the
constantly in red and/or the message Tele muted. When the connection is established, multifunction display for approximately
Aid Inoperative is displayed in the mul- the message Call Connected appears in the 10 seconds.
tifunction display after the system self-test, multifunction display. Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
a malfunction in the system has been All information relevant to the emergency, moned by other means.
detected. such as the location of the vehicle (deter-
mined by the GPS satellite location system),
209
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually X Briefly press on cover 1 to open. Roadside Assistance button
i The “911” emergency call system is a X Press SOS button 2 briefly. The Roadside Assistance button p is
public service. Using it without due cause The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will located in the storage compartment.
is a criminal offense. flash until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
X Close cover 1 after the emergency call is
concluded.
G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location),
please do not wait for voice contact after 1 Roadside Assistance button p
you have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a X Open the storage compartment.
safe location. The Response Center will X Press and hold button p for longer than
automatically contact local emergency offi-
2 seconds.
cials with the vehicle’s approximate loca-
tion if they receive an automatic SOS signal A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assis-
and cannot make voice contact with the tance dispatcher will be initiated. The but-
vehicle occupants. ton p will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
Call will appear in the multifunction dis-
play and the audio system or the COMAND
1 Cover system is muted.
2 SOS button When the connection is established, the mes-
sage Call Connected appears in the multi-
function display. The Tele Aid system will
210
Controls in detail
Useful features
transmit data generating the vehicle identifi- ment of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire Information button
cation number, model, color and location are obtainable at no charge.
The Information button ¡ is located in the
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS sig-
i If the indicator lamp in the Roadside storage compartment.
nals).
Assistance button p is flashing contin-
i The audio system or COMAND system uously and there was no voice connection
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in to the Response Center established, then
progress. While the call is connected you the Tele Aid system could not initiate a
can change to the navigation menu by Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant
pressing the NAV button on the COMAND cellular phone network is not available).
system headunit. Spoken commands are The message Call Failed appears in the
not available. multifunction display.
A voice connection between the Roadside X Terminating calls: Press button t on
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the multifunction steering wheel.
the vehicle will be established.
or 1 Information button ¡
X Describe the nature of the need for assis-
X Press the respective button for ending a
tance. X Open the storage compartment.
telephone call on the audio system or the
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dis- COMAND system headunit. X Press and hold button ¡ for longer than
patcher will either dispatch a qualified Mer- 2 seconds.
cedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
will be initiated. The button ¡ will flash
Benz Center. For services such as labor and/
while the call is in progress. The message
or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the
Roadside Assistance manual for more infor- Connecting Call will appear in the mul-
mation. tifunction display and the audio system or
the COMAND system is muted.
The following is only available in the USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such as a When the connection is established, the mes-
jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replace- sage Call Connected appears in the multi-
function display. The Tele Aid system will Z
transmit data generating the vehicle identifi-
211
Controls in detail
Useful features
cation number, model, color and location Failed appears in the multifunction dis- ger connected to the headunit. If you must
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS sig- play. use this phone, we recommend that you
nals). use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in
X Terminating calls: Press button t on a safe location.
i The audio system or COMAND system the multifunction steering wheel.
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
progress. While the call is connected you or Destination Download to the COMAND
can change to the navigation menu by X Press the respective button for ending a system
pressing the NAV button on the COMAND telephone call on the audio system or the
system headunit. Spoken commands are COMAND system headunit. i The components and operating principles
not available. of the COMAND system can be found in the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
A voice connection between the Customer Call priority
Assistance Center representative and the Destination Download allows you access to a
If other service calls such as a Roadside database of over 10,000,000 points of inter-
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Assistance call or Information call are active,
Information regarding the operation of your est (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
an emergency call is still possible. In this vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes- case, the emergency call will take priority and
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products destination the address can be downloaded,
override all other active calls. or can be provided with points of interests
and services is available to you.
The indicator lamp in the respective button near your location.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid sys- flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
tem, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA The Response Center can transmit destina-
calls can only be terminated by a Response tion data to the COMAND system during the
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the Center or Customer Assistance Center rep-
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more. connection with the Roadside Assistance or
resentative. All other calls can be terminated Customer Assistance Center.
i If the indicator lamp in the Information by pressing button t on the multifunction The transmitted data can contain address
button ¡ is flashing continuously and steering wheel or the respective button for details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs.
there was no voice connection to the ending a telephone call on the audio system
Response Center established, then the Tele or the COMAND system headunit.
Aid system could not initiate an Information i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone net- the audio system or the COMAND system
work is not available). The message Call audio is muted. The mobile phone is no lon-
212
Controls in detail
Useful features
Route guidance pull the trunk recessed handle for a mini- Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
A prompt appears for confirmation if route mum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
guidance to the address is to be started. flashing.
X Report the incident to the police.
X
The message Connecting Call appears in
Select Yes using button ( or &. The police will issue a numbered incident
X Press button C to confirm. report.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
The system starts the route calculation and via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of X Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz
subsequently the route guidance to the “Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password Response Center along with your pass-
defined address. (USA only). word.
The Response Center will then unlock your The Response Center will then attempt to
i If you select No, you can save the address
vehicle with the remote door unlocking fea- covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid sys-
in your address book.
ture. tem. Once the vehicle is located, the
i The destination download feature is avail- Response Center will contact the local law
i The remote door unlock feature is availa- enforcement and you. The vehicle’s loca-
able if the relevant mobile phone network ble if the relevant cellular phone network is
is available and data connection is possi- tion will only be provided to law enforce-
available. ment.
ble.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting Call will appear in the mul- i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
Remote door unlock tifunction display to indicate receipt of the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
door unlock command. a call to the Response Center is initiated
In case you have locked your vehicle uninten-
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response automatically by the Tele Aid system pro-
tionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and
Center specialist will attempt to establish vided Tele Aid service was subscribed to
the reserve SmartKey is not available:
voice contact with the vehicle occupants. and properly activated, and that necessary
X Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response cellular service and GPS coverage are avail-
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for
able. See “Anti-theft alarm sys-
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). more than 20 seconds before door unlock
tem” (Y page 63) and “Tow-away
authorization was received by the
You will be asked to provide your password. alarm” (Y page 63).
Response Center, you must wait
X Then return to your vehicle at the time 15 minutes before pulling the trunk
arranged with the Response Center and recessed handle again.
213
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener G Warning! Programming the integrated remote
Before programming the integrated remote control
The integrated remote control can operate up
to three separately controlled devices com- control to a garage door opener or gate X Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
patible with HomeLink® or some other sys- operator, make sure people and objects are
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
tems. out of the way of the device to prevent
a signal transmitter button and wish to
potential harm or damage. When program-
See the following instructions for program- retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
ming a garage door opener, the door moves
ming information. or
up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes. X If you are programming the integrated
Do not use the integrated remote control remote control for the first time, press and
with any garage door opener that lacks hold the two outer signal transmitter but-
safety stop and reverse features as tons 2 and 4 and release them only when
required by U.S. federal safety standards indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
(this includes any garage door opener approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). button for longer than 30 seconds).
A garage door that cannot detect an object This procedure erases any previous set-
- signaling the door to stop and reverse - tings for all three channels and initializes
does not meet current U.S. federal safety the memory. If you later wish to program a
Overhead control panel with integrated remote
standards. second and/or third hand-held transmitter
control When programming a garage door opener, to the remaining two signal transmitter but-
1 Indicator lamp park vehicle outside the garage. tons, do not repeat this step and begin
234 Signal transmitter button Do not run the engine while programming directly with step 3.
5 Hand-held remote control (not part the integrated remote control. Inhalation of X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
of vehicle equipment) exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All control 5 of the device you wish to train
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
6 Hand-held remote control button
(CO), and inhaling it can cause uncon- from the signal transmitter button (2, 3
sciousness and possible death. or 4) to be programmed, while keeping
indicator lamp 1 in view.
214
Controls in detail
Useful features
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously a constant light, continue with program- You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
press hand-held remote control button 6 ming steps 8 through 12 as your garage ing two steps.
and the desired signal transmitter button door opener may be equipped with the X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
(2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons “rolling code” feature. press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
until step 5 is completed. X Step 7: To program the remaining two sig- programmed signal transmitter button
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and nal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps (2, 3 or 4).
then rapidly. above starting with step 3. X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately release same signal transmitter button a
Rolling code programming
second time to complete the training proc-
the first time the signal transmitter button To train a garage door opener (or other rolling ess.
is programmed. If this button has already code devices) with the rolling code feature,
been programmed, the indicator lamp will follow these instructions after completing the i Some garage door openers (or other roll-
only start flashing after 20 seconds. “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of ing code equipped devices) may require
X Step 5: After indicator lamp 1 changes this text. (A second person may make the fol- you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, lowing training procedures quicker and eas- release the same signal transmitter button
release the hand-held remote control but- ier.) a third time to complete the training proc-
ton and the signal transmitter button. X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the ess.
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained sig- garage door opener motor head unit. X Step 12: Confirm the garage door opera-
nal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and tion by pressing the programmed signal
observe indicator lamp 1. i Exact location and color of the button may transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
vary by garage door opener brand. Depend-
If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, ing on manufacturer, the “training” button X Step 13: To program the remaining two
programming is complete and your device may also be referred to as “learn”or signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
should activate when the respective signal “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating above starting with step 3.
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed the transmitting button, refer to the garage
and released. door opener Operator’s Manual. Gate operator/Canadian programming
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to garage door opener motor head unit. Z
several seconds of transmission which may
The “training light” is activated.
215
Controls in detail
Useful features
not be long enough for the integrated signal i Upon completion of programming the Operation of integrated remote control
transmitter to pick up the signal during pro- integrated remote control, make sure you X Switch on the ignition.
gramming. Similar to this Canadian law, some retain the hand-held remote control that
U.S. gate operators are designed to “time- came with the garage door opener, gate X Select and press the appropriate inte-
out” in the same manner. operator or other device. You may need it grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or
If you live in Canada or if you are having dif- for use in other vehicles, for future pro- 4) to activate the remote controlled
ficulties programming a gate operator gramming of an integrated remote control, device.
(regardless of where you live) by using the or simply for continued use as a hand-held The integrated remote control transmitter
programming procedures, replace step 4 with remote control to operate the respective continues to send the signal as long as the
the following: device in other situations. button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal transmit-
ter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release Reprogramming a single signal trans- Erasing the integrated remote control
this button until it has been successfully mitter button memory
trained.
To program a device using a signal transmit- X Switch on the ignition.
X While still holding down the signal trans- ter button previously trained, follow these X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
mitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your steps:
hand-held remote control button 6 as fol- transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approx-
X Switch on the ignition. imately 20 seconds, until indicator lamp
lows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 sec-
X Press and hold the desired signal transmit- 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer
onds, then release it for 2 seconds, and
again press and hold it for 2 seconds. ter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release than 30 seconds.
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held the button. The codes of all three channels are erased.
remote control until the frequency signal Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after
has been learned. 20 seconds. i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
Upon successful training, indicator lamp X Without releasing the signal transmitter
1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after button, proceed with programming starting
several seconds. with step 3.
X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
216
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming tips batteries are in the hand-held remote con- Any unauthorized modification to this
trol before beginning the procedure. device could void the user’s authority to
If you are having difficulty programming the
RStraighten the antenna wire from the operate the equipment.
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips: garage door opener assembly. This may
i Canada only:
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote This device complies with RSS-210 of
signals.
control 5 (typically located on the reverse Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
side of the remote). The integrated remote i Certain types of garage door openers are the following two conditions:
control is compatible with radio-frequency incompatible with the integrated remote 1. This device may not cause interference,
devices operating between 280-390 MHz. control. If you should experience further and
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote con- difficulties with programming the inte- 2. this device must accept any interfer-
trol 5. This will increase the likelihood of grated remote control, contact an author- ence received, including interference
the hand-held remote control sending a ized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mer- that may cause undesired operation of
faster and more accurate signal to the inte- cedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center the device.
grated remote control. (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Any unauthorized modification to this
RWhile
Customer Service (in Canada) at
performing step 3, hold hand-held device could void the user’s authority to
1-800-387-0100.
remote control 5 at different lengths and operate the equipment.
angles from the signal transmitter button i USA only:
(2, 3 or 4) you are programming. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same lowing two conditions:
angle at varying distances.
1. This device may not cause harmful
RIf another hand-held remote control is avail- interference, and
able for the same device, try the program-
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ming steps again using that other hand-
held remote control. Make sure new
that may cause undesired operation.
217
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats 5 Retainer pin
G Warning! X Installing: Press floormat eyelets 4 onto

Whenever you are using floormats, make retainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3.
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and 1 Removing
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
2 Retainer pin
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal move- X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer pins
ment. 2 in direction of arrow 1.
i To install or remove the floormat more

easily, move the driver’s seat or passenger
seat as far to the rear as possible.
3 Installing
4 Eyelet
218
Operation
Vehicle equipment ............................ 220

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 220
At the gas station ............................. 221
Engine compartment ........................ 223
Tires and wheels ............................... 229
Winter driving ................................... 251
Driving instructions .......................... 253
Maintenance ...................................... 258
Vehicle care ....................................... 260
219
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Vehicle equipment The first 1000 miles (1500 km) After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may gradu-
ally increase vehicle and engine speeds to the
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle permissible maximum.
tures, standard or optional, potentially during the break-in period, the more satisfied ! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
available for your vehicle at the time of pur- you will be with its performance later on.
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
chase. Please be aware that your vehicle RDrive your vehicle during the first
might not be equipped with all features do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but mod-
described in this manual. (140 km/h).
erate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
throttle driving) and excessive engine
RShift gears in a timely manner.
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
in each gear). All of the above instructions, as may apply to
RVehicles with automatic transmission: your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
- Select C as the preferred shift program first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine
(Y page 102) for the first 1 000 miles or the rear differential has been replaced.
(1 500 km). i Always obey applicable speed limits.
- Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down
by shifting to a lower gear using the gear
selector lever.
- Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1
(Y page 101) only when driving at mod-
erate speeds (for hill driving).
- Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
RVehicles with manual transmission:
Shift gears in a timely manner.
220
Operation
At the gas station

At the gas station engine. Damage resulting from the use of contact gas station personnel in case
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or labels on the pump cannot be found.
Refueling resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel For more information on gasoline, see “Pre-
fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
G Warning! mium unleaded gasoline” (Y page 355),
Limited Warranty. see “Fuel requirements” (Y page 355), or
Gasoline is highly flammable and poison-
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ous. It burns violently and can cause seri- ! If you have accidentally filled the tank ter, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
ous personal injury. with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- switch on the ignition. Otherwise the incor- The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
rials near gasoline! rect or non-approved fuel will get into the side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Turn off the engine before refueling. fuel lines. The fuel system must be drained Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
completely. Contact an authorized Mer- SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
cedes-Benz Center to have the fuel system fuel filler flap.
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing con-
tact. Extinguish all smoking materials. drained completely. i In case that the central locking system
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- does not release the fuel filler flap, or the
! To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
lation of fuel vapors are damaging your opening mechanism is clamping, contact
verters, only use premium unleaded gaso-
health. Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mer-
line in this vehicle.
cedes-Benz Center.
G Warning! Any noticeable irregularities in engine oper-
ation should be repaired promptly.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
discharge. This could cause the gas to reach the catalytic converter, causing it to
spray back out when removing the fuel overheat and potentially start a fire.
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
injury.
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON / 86 MON).
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of die- Information on gasoline quality can nor-
sel fuel will damage the fuel system and mally be found on the fuel pump. Please
221
Operation
At the gas station

X Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise. Check regularly and before a long trip
X Take off fuel filler cap 2. For information on quantities and require-
X
ments of operating agents, see “Fuels, cool-
Place fuel filler cap 2 in direction of arrow
ants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 351).
into the holder located on the inside of fuel
filler flap. Check the following:
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
REngine oil level (Y page 224)
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 237)
cuts out – do not top off or overfill. RCoolant level (Y page 227)
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap 2 clockwise RVehicle lighting (Y page 81), (Y page 312)
1 Fuel filler flap
until it audibly engages. RWasher system and headlamp cleaning sys-
2 Fuel filler cap
tem (Y page 228)
X
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap
Turn off the engine.
before locking your vehicle as the flap lock- RBrake fluid (Y page 254), (Y page 279) and
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel ing pin prevents closing after you have (Y page 298)
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel locked the vehicle.
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the X Close fuel filler flap 1.
malfunction indicator lamp ? (USA
only) or ± (Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 304).
switch.
X Opening: Push fuel filler flap 1 at the
point indicated by the arrow.
222
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment nents on the vehicle. Comply with all rele-
vant safety precautions.
Hood
G Warning!
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
of moving parts when the hood is open and
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
the engine is running.
be forced open by passing air flow.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
This could cause the hood to come loose
approximately 30 seconds or may even
and injure you and/or others.
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades. 1 Hood lock release lever
Opening
G Warning! X Pull release lever 1.
G Warning! The engine is equipped with a transistorized The hood is unlocked.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the ignition system. Because of the high volt-
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- age it is dangerous to touch any compo- ! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers
perature display indicates that the engine nents (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, or hood, never open the hood if the wiper
is overheated, do not open the hood. Move diagnostic socket) of the ignition system arms are folded forward away from the
away from vehicle and do not open the Rwith the engine running windshield.
hood until the engine has cooled. If neces-
Rwhile starting the engine
sary, call the fire department.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
G Warning! engine is turned manually
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot.
To prevent burns, let the engine cool off
completely before touching any compo-
223
Operation
Engine compartment
erwise come loose while the vehicle is in For further information contact an author-
motion and injure you and/or others. ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Let the hood drop from a height of approx- Notes on checking engine oil level
imately 1 ft (30 cm).
X
When checking the oil level
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
If you can raise the hood at a point above Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
the headlamps, then it is not properly the vehicle must have been stationary for
closed. Open it again and let it drop with at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
2 Handle for opening the hood somewhat greater force. off
Rwith the engine not at operating tempera-
X Push handle 2 under the hood upwards.
ture, the vehicle must have been stationary
X Lift the hood at the front edge. Engine oil for at least 30 minutes with the engine
The hood will be automatically held open at The amount of oil your engine needs will turned off
shoulder height by gas-filled struts. depend on a number of factors, including driv-
ing style. Increased oil consumption can Checking engine oil level with the oil
Closing occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle dipstick
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
G Warning! Engine oil consumption checks should only On the SLK 300 and SLK 350, you can check
When closing the hood, use extreme cau- be made after the vehicle break-in period. the engine oil level with the oil dipstick.
tion not to catch hands or fingers. Be care- ! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
ful that you do not close the hood on
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
anyone.
Using special additives not approved by
Make sure the hood is securely engaged Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
before driving off. Do not continue driving covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
if the hood can no longer engage after an Warranty.
accident, for example. The hood could oth-
224
Operation
Engine compartment
X Open the hood (Y page 223). i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approxi-
mately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants
etc.” (Y page 351). One of the following messages will subse-
For information on messages in the multi- quently appear in the multifunction display:
function display concerning engine oil, see REngine Oil Level
the “Practical hints” section (Y page 289). OK
RAdd 1.0 qt. (Canada: 1.0 liter)
1 Oil dipstick Checking engine oil level with the con- to reach max. oil level.
2 Upper (max) mark trol system
RAdd 1.5 qts. (Canada: 1.5 liters)
3 Lower (min) mark On the SLK 55 AMG, you can check the to reach max. oil level.
X Pull out oil dipstick 1. engine oil level with the control system.
RAdd 2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters)
X X Switch on the ignition.
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. to reach max. oil level.
The standard display appears in the multi-
X Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
function display (Y page 112). i If you want to interrupt the checking pro-
guide tube.
X Press button k or j on the multi- cedure, press button k or j on the
X Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approxi-
function steering wheel repeatedly until the multifunction steering wheel.
mately 3 seconds to obtain accurate read-
following message appears in the multi-
ing. X If necessary, add engine oil.
function display.
The oil level is correct when it is between For more information on engine oil, see
lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark “Fuels, coolants, lubricants
2 of oil dipstick 1. etc.” (Y page 351).
Z
225
Operation
Engine compartment
Other display messages i If you want to interrupt the checking pro- Mercedes-Benz Center or visit
If the ignition is not switched on, the following cedure, press button k or j on the www.mbusa.com (USA only).
message appears in the multifunction dis- multifunction steering wheel. Using engine oils and oil filters of specifi-
play: If there is excess engine oil with the engine at cation other than those expressly required
Turn on ignition normal operating temperature, the following for the Maintenance System, or changing
to see engine oil level. message appears in the multifunction dis- of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer
play: than those called for by the Maintenance
System will result in engine or emission
If you see the message: Engine Oil Level
control system damage not covered by the
Reduce Oil Level
Observe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
Waiting Time
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X If the engine is at operating temperature,
Center.
wait 5 minutes before repeating check pro-
cedure. ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
X If the engine is not at operating tempera- off. It could cause damage to the engine
ture yet, you must wait 30 minutes before and emission control system not covered
checking oil. by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If you see the message: For information on messages in the multi-
Cannot check engine oil level function display concerning engine oil, see
with engine on. the “Practical hints” section (Y page 290).
X Turn off the engine. Example illustration SLK 350
Adding engine oil 1 Filler cap
X If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before checking oil. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil fil-
X
ters required for vehicles with Maintenance
If the engine is not at operating tempera-
System. For a listing of approved engine
ture yet, you must wait 30 minutes before
oils and oil filters, contact an authorized
checking oil.
226
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level before removing cap. The coolant reser-
voir contains hot fluid and is under pres-
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
sure.
The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the sure. If opened immediately, scalding hot
transmission. fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure.
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine
Coolant level
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
SLK 55 AMG The engine coolant is a mixture of water and col which may burn if it comes into con-
1 Filler cap anticorrosion/antifreeze. tact with hot engine parts.
X Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the cool-
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not ant temperature must be below 158‡
to overfill with oil. (70†).
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. G Warning!
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil In order to avoid any potentially serious
entering the ground or water. burns:
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained RUse extreme caution when opening the
off. It could cause damage to the engine hood if there are any signs of steam or
and emission control system not covered coolant leaking from the cooling system,
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. or if the coolant temperature indicator
X Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. indicates that the coolant is overheated. SLK 350 (example illustration)
RDo not remove pressure cap on coolant 1 Coolant expansion tank
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 351) and reservoir if coolant temperature is above 2 Cap
(Y page 354). 158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool down 3 Marking bar in the expansion tank
227
Operation
Engine compartment
X Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approxi- Washer system and headlamp clean-
mately 1/2 counterclockwise to release any ing system
excess pressure.
G Warning!
X Continue turning cap 2 counterclockwise Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
and remove it. mable. Do not spill washer solvent/anti-
The coolant level is correct if the level freeze on hot engine parts, because it may
Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar ignite and burn. You could be seriously
3 in expansion tank 1 burned.
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
(1.5 cm) higher SLK 350 (example illustration)
where temperatures may fall below freez-
X ing point. Failure to do so could result in 1 Cap for washer fluid reservoir
Add coolant as required.
X Replace and tighten cap 2. damage to the washer system/fluid reser- Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
voir. cleaning system is supplied from the washer
For more information on coolant, see the fluid reservoir.
“Technical data” section (Y page 356). ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for During all seasons, add MB Windshield
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
damage the plastic lenses of the head- water. Premix the washer fluid in a suitable
lamps. container.
! Do not use distilled or de-ionized water in X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the of cap 1 upwards.

washer fluid level sensor could be dam- X Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
aged. Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Sum-
merFit” and water (or commercially availa-
ble premixed washer solvent/antifreeze,
228
Operation
Tires and wheels

depending on ambient temperatures) Tires and wheels result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
(Y page 358). accident.
Safety notes
X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press cap Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
1 onto filler hole until it engages. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
for information on tested and recommended damage cannot always be recognized on
For more information, see “Washer system
rims and tires for summer and winter opera- retreads. The operating safety of the vehi-
and headlamp cleaning sys-
tion. They can also offer advice concerning cle cannot be assured when such tires are
tem” (Y page 353).
tire service and purchase. used.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same desig-
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
nation, manufacturer and type as shown on
ride disturbance, or you suspect that pos-
the original part. For further information
sible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
you should turn on the hazard warning
ter. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
with caution to an area which is a safe dis-
components can be damaged. Also, the
tance from the road.
correct operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
G Warning! appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, Center or tire dealer for repairs.
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them. G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
When replacing rims, only use genuine Mer-
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
cedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
Z
229
Operation
Tires and wheels

speed with a flat tire will cause excessive Tire care and maintenance Replace the tire if you find any of the above
heat build-up and possibly a fire. conditions.
G Warning! Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure tires will age and become worn over time even
Important guidelines
loss. As a result, you could lose control of if never used, and thus should be inspected
ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same your vehicle. and replaced when necessary.
type and make. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim. tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, Life of tire
RBreak
or if the tires have sustained damage,
in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
replace them. G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced
RRegularly check the tires and rims for dam- Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
age. Dented or bent rims can cause tire other week. For more information on check-
tread.
inflation pressure loss and damage to the ing tire inflation pressure, see “Recom-
tire beads. mended tire inflation pres- The service life of a tire is dependent upon
RIf
sure” (Y page 235). varying factors including but not limited to:
vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire infla-
tion pressure and correct as required. RDriving style
Tire inspection
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too RTire inflation pressure
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are Every time you check the tire inflation pres-
RDistance driven
sharply reduced at tread depths of less sure, you should also inspect your tires for the
than 1/8 in (3 mm). following:
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 230) Tread depth
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
mount new tires on the front wheels first Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s G Warning!
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all rubber Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
around). Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
tread or side of the tire when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
230
Operation
Tires and wheels

(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not Direction of rotation
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), such as better hydroplaning performance. To
the adhesion properties on a wet road are benefit, however, you must make sure the
sharply reduced. tires rotate in the direction specified.
Depending upon the weather and/or road An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
widely. the tire.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Spare wheels may be mounted against the
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator) unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
(3 mm). The treadwear indicator appears as a solid the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
band across the tread. replaced. Always observe and follow applica-
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by ble temporary use restrictions and speed lim-
law. These indicators are located in six places itations indicated on the spare wheel.
on the tread circumference and become visi- Storing tires
ble at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
(1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered with as little exposure to light as possible. Loading the vehicle
worn and should be replaced. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease Two labels on your vehicle show how much
The recommended minimum tire tread depth and fuels. weight it may properly carry.
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The rec-
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
ommended minimum tire tread depth for win- Cleaning tires can be found on the driver’s door
ter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm). B-pillar. This placard tells you important
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
information about the number of people
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
that can be in the vehicle and the total
damage to the tire.
weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
Always replace a damaged tire. It also contains information on the proper
size and recommended tire inflation pres-
231
Operation
Tires and wheels

sures for the original equipment tires on can overheat them, possibly causing a
your vehicle. blowout. Overloading the tires can also
(2) The certification label, also found on the result in handling or steering problems, or
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the brake failure.
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
Tire and Loading Information placard
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and i Data shown on Tire and Loading Informa-
cargo. The certification label also tells tion placard example are for illustration
you about the front and rear axle weight purposes only. Load limit data are specific
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight to each vehicle and may vary from data
Rating (GAWR). shown in the following illustration. Refer to
The GAWR is the total allowable weight Tire and Loading Information placard on
that can be carried by a single axle (front vehicle for actual data specific to your vehi-
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or cle.
GAWR for either the front axle or rear 1 Driver’s door B-pillar
axle.
Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information

G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the 1 Load limit information on the Tire and
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires Loading Information placard
232
Operation
Tires and wheels

The Tire and Loading Information placard X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
showing the load limit information is located the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 231). grams or XXX lbs.
X Locate the statement “The combined X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
weight of occupants and cargo should available amount of cargo and luggage load
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
on the Tire and Loading Information plac- equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
ard. 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of all occupants, amount of available cargo and luggage load
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if capacity is 650 lbs
applicable) should never exceed the weight 1 Seating capacity information on the Tire (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
referenced in that statement. and Loading Information placard X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
Seating capacity Steps for determining correct load limit vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
The seating capacity gives you important The following steps have been developed as capacity calculated in step 4.
information on the number of occupants that required of all manufacturers under Title 49, X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
can be in the vehicle. The Tire and Loading Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
Information placard showing the seating be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
capacity is located on the driver’s door will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
B-pillar (Y page 231). this manual to determine how this reduces
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The com- the available cargo and luggage load
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Informa- bined weight of occupants and cargo capacity of your vehicle (Y page 234).
tion placard example are for illustration should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
purposes only. Seating capacity data are The following table shows examples on how
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informa-
specific to each vehicle and may vary from to calculate total and cargo load capacities
tion placard.
data shown in the following illustration. with varying seating configurations and num-
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of ber and size of occupants. The following
Refer to Tire and Loading Information plac- the driver and passengers that will be riding
ard on vehicle for actual data specific to examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
in your vehicle. is for illustration purposes only. Make sure Z
your vehicle.
233
Operation
Tires and wheels

you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Load-
ing Information placard (Y page 233).
Example Combined weight Number of Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and
limit of occupants and occupants weight of all trailer tongue weight (total load
cargo from Tire and (driver and occupants limit from Tire and Loading Infor-
Loading Information passengers) mation placard minus combined
placard weight of all occupants)
1 1 500 lbs 1 Occupant 1: 175 lbs 175 lbs 1 500 lbs - 175 lbs = 1 325 lbs
2 1 500 lbs 2 Occupant 1: 175 lbs 370 lbs 1 500 lbs - 370 lbs = 1 130 lbs
Occupant 2: 195 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
less cargo and luggage load capacity is avail- You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the have the loaded vehicle (including driver, pas-
able. certification label. The certification label can sengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer
For more information, see “Trailer tongue be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see the fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commer-
load” (Y page 234). “Technical data” section (Y page 341). cial scale.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
Certification label total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all Trailer tongue load
cargo, and the trailer tongue load must never
Even after careful determination of the com- exceed the GVWR. The tongue load of any trailer is an important
bined weight of all occupants, cargo and the weight to measure because it affects the load
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
trailer tongue load (if applicable) allowable weight that can be carried by a sin-
(Y page 234) as to not exceed the permissi- towed, the tongue load must be added to the
gle axle (front or rear). weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
ble load limit, you must make sure your vehi-
cle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight To assure that your vehicle does not exceed you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight the maximum permissible weight limits
234
Operation
Tires and wheels

load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and can overheat them, possibly causing a purposes only. Tire data are specific to
everything loaded in it. blowout. Overloading the tires can also each vehicle and may vary from data shown
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed pri- result in handling or steering problems, or in the following illustration. Refer to Tire
marily to carry passengers and their cargo. brake failure. and Loading Information placard on vehicle
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer for actual data specific to your vehicle.
towing with your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 231).
Recommended tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
G Warning! tires. The tires can be considered cold if the
Follow recommended tire inflation pres- vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
sures. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated Follow recommended cold tire inflation pres-
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, sures listed on Tire and Loading Information
adversely affect handling and fuel econ- placard on the driver’s door B-pillar.
omy, and are more likely to fail from being Keeping the tires properly inflated provides 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with
overheated. the best handling, tread life and riding com- recommended cold tire inflation pres-
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires fort. sures
can adversely affect handling and ride com- In addition to the Tire and Loading Informa-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
tion placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also the recommended cold tire inflation pres-
tance, and result in sudden deflation consult the tire inflation pressure label (if
(blowout) because they are more likely to sures for maximum loaded vehicle weight.
available) on the inside of the filler flap for any The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the
become punctured or damaged by road additional information pertaining to special
debris, potholes etc. tires installed as original equipment.
driving situations. For more information, see
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the “Important notes on tire inflation pres-
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire sure” (Y page 236).
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires i Data shown on Tire and Loading Informa- Z
tion placard example are for illustration
235
Operation
Tires and wheels

Important notes on tire inflation pres- (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
sure pressure label located on the inside of the tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
fuel filler flap. adversely affect handling and fuel econ-
G Warning! omy, and are more likely to fail from being
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation pres-
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeat- overheated.
sure for normal driving speeds. You should
edly, check the tires for punctures from
wait until the tires are cold before adjusting
foreign objects and/or whether air is leak- Underinflated tires can
the tire inflation pressure.
ing from the valves or from around the rim. Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure inflation pressure information for vehicle Radversely affect fuel economy
are also increased while driving, depending loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
on the driving speed and the tire load. condition. If such information is provided, it
Radversely affect handling characteristics
If you will be driving your vehicle at high can be found on the tire inflation pressure
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 221). Overinflated tires
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi- G Warning!
of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18‡ (10†) of air Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you temperature change. Keep this in mind when sures.
do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, checking tire inflation pressure where the Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
excessive heat can build up and result in sud- temperature is different from the outside can adversely affect handling and ride com-
den tire failure. temperature. fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire tance, and result in sudden deflation
inflation pressure label on the inside of the Potential problems associated with (blowout) because they are more likely to
fuel filler flap, contact an authorized Mer- underinflated and overinflated tires become punctured or damaged by road
cedes-Benz Center for proper tire inflation debris, potholes etc.
pressure. Underinflated tires
Overinflated tires can
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the G Warning!
Radversely affect handling characteristics
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
value for speeds above 100 mph sures. Rcause uneven tire wear
236
Operation
Tires and wheels

Rbe more prone to damage from road haz- driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
ards can overheat them, possibly causing a gauge and check against the recom-
Radversely affect ride comfort blowout. Overloading the tires can also mended tire inflation pressure on the Tire
result in handling or steering problems, or and Loading Information placard on the
Rincrease stopping distance
brake failure. driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 231). If nec-
essary, add air to achieve the recom-
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every mended tire inflation pressure.
Checking tire inflation pressure other week.
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure inflation pressure by pushing the metal
Safety notes when the tires are cold. The tires can be con- stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
G Warning! for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pres- with the tire gauge.
(1.6 km).
sures. X Install the valve cap.
If you check the tire inflation pressure when
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated the tires are warm (the vehicle has been X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, driven for several miles or sitting less than
adversely affect handling and fuel econ- 3 hours), the reading will be approximately
omy, and are more likely to fail from being Tire Pressure Monitoring System
4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. (TPMS), (USA only)
overheated. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires specified cold tire inflation pressure. Other- i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
can adversely affect handling and ride com- wise, the tire will be underinflated. (TPMS) is equipped with a combination low
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in
tance, and result in sudden deflation Checking tire inflation pressure man- the instrument cluster. Depending on how
(blowout) because they are more likely to ually the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low
become punctured or damaged by road tire pressure condition or a malfunction in
debris, potholes etc. Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire the TPMS system itself:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the inflation pressure:
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously,
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
one or more of your tires is significantly
and Loading Information placard on the X Z
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
237
Operation
Tires and wheels

underinflated. There is no malfunction in according to the Tire and Loading Informa- your tires are significantly underinflated.
the TPMS. tion placard or, if available, on the supple- Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and mental tire inflation pressure information telltale illuminates, you should stop and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system on the inside of the fuel filler flap. check your tires as soon as possible, and
itself is not operating properly. The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. on a significantly underinflated tire causes
i This device complies with Part 15 of the tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- ure.
lowing two conditions: fully applying the brakes and avoiding Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
abrupt steering maneuvers. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
1. This device may not cause harmful cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
interference, and G Warning! note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
2. this device must accept any interfer- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), proper tire maintenance, and it is the
ence received, including interference should be checked every other week when driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
that may cause undesired. cold and inflated to the inflation pressure tire pressure, even if underinflation has not
Any unauthorized modification to this recommended by the vehicle manufacturer reached the level to trigger illumination of
device could void the user’s authority to on the Tire and Loading Information placard the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
operate the equipment. on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires when the system is not operating properly.
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. of a different size than the size indicated on The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as the Tire and Loading Information placard or, bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warn- if available, the tire inflation pressure label, When the system detects a malfunction,
ing is issued to alert you to a decrease in you should determine the proper tire infla- the telltale will flash for approximately
pressure in one or more of the tires. tion pressure for those tires. 1 minute and then remain continuously illu-
G Warning! As an added safety feature, your vehicle has minated. This sequence will continue upon
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for been equipped with a tire pressure moni- subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
wrongly selected inflation pressures. toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low malfunction exists. When the malfunction
Always adjust tire inflation pressure tire pressure telltale when one or more of indicator is illuminated, the system may not
238
Operation
Tires and wheels

be able to detect or signal low tire pressure Tire inflation pressure warnings X Using the Tire and Loading Information
as intended. If the system detects a significant loss of tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety inflation pressure in one or more than one (Y page 231) or, if available, the supple-
of reasons, including the installation of tire, a message appears in the multifunction mental tire inflation pressure information
incompatible replacement or alternate tires display. on the inside of the fuel filler flap
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the (Y page 221), make sure the tire inflation
TPMS from functioning properly. Always pressure of all four tires is correct.
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
recommended for the vehicle operating
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
condition. Tire pressure should only be
TPMS to continue to function properly.
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recom-
Example illustration
mended tire inflation pressure on the Tire
i If a condition causing the TPMS to mal- In addition, a warning signal sounds. and Loading Information placard on the
function develops, it may take up to driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
10 minutes for the system to signal a mal- Restarting the TPMS have supplemental tire pressure informa-
function using the TPMS telltale flashing G Warning! tion for driving at high speeds or for vehicle
and illumination sequence. loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
The telltale extinguishes after a few the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- cle condition. If such information is pro-
minutes driving if the malfunction has been tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the vided, it can be found on the inside of the
corrected. ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You fuel filler flap.
i Operating radio transmission equipment might lose control over the vehicle. X Switch on the ignition.
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in The TPMS must be restarted when you have X Press button è or ÿ on the multi-
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new function steering wheel repeatedly until the
to malfunction. level (e.g. because of different load or driving standard display appears in the multifunc-
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to tion display (Y page 112).
the current tire inflation pressures.
Z
239
Operation
Tires and wheels

X Press button j or k repeatedly until Tire labeling 5 Manufacturer
you see the current inflation pressures for 6 Tire ply material (Y page 247)
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
each tire appear in the display or the fol- 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rat-
manufacturer name, a number of markings
lowing message appears in the display ing (Y page 241)
can be found on a tire.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Following are some explanations for the 8 Load identification (Y page 243)
Active
markings on your vehicle’s tires: 9 Tire name
Menu: R-Button
X Press the reset button (Y page 107). i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
The following message will appear in the on tires are specific to each vehicle and
multifunction display: may vary from data shown in above illus-
Restart tire tration.
pressure monitor? For more information, see “Rims and
X If you wish to confirm: Press button tires” (Y page 345).
æ.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system veri-
fies that the current tire inflation pressures
are within the system’s specified range.
Afterwards the current tire inflation pres- 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
sures are accepted as reference values and (Y page 246)
then monitored. 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number
X If you wish to cancel: Press button (Y page 244)
ç. 3 Maximum tire load (Y page 245)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 245)
240
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire size designation, load and speed No letter preceding the size designation (as “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
rating illustrated above): Passenger car tire based letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
on European design standards. At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: with a speed capability above 149 mph
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
standards. designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: additional information, see “Tire speed rat-
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standing” (Y page 242).
ards.
Rim diameter
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high pres- Rim diameter 4 is the diameter of the bead
sure compact spares designed for temporary seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
emergency use only. rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in % Tire width Tire load rating
3 Radial tire code Tire width 1 indicates the nominal tire width G Warning!
4 Rim diameter in millimeters. The tire load rating must always be at least
5 Tire load rating half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Other-
Aspect ratio wise, tire failure may be the result which
6 Tire speed rating Aspect ratio 2 is the dimensional relation- may cause an accident and/or serious
ship between tire section height and section injury to you or others.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
width and is expressed in percentage. The Always replace rims and tires with the same
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section designation, manufacturer and type as
may vary from data shown in above illus-
height by section width. shown on the original part.
tration.
General: Depending on the design standards Tire code G Warning!
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall Tire code 3 indicates the tire construction Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
may have no letter or a letter preceding the type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
tire size designation. Z
241
Operation
Tires and wheels

and Loading Information placard on the serious personal injury and possible death, Index Speed rating
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires for you and for others.
can overheat them, possibly causing a ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
blowout. Overloading the tires can also Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
result in handling or steering problems, or speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
brake failure. driving speeds appropriate to prevailing con-
ditions.
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
Tire load rating 5 is a numerical code asso- Tire speed rating 6 indicates the approved with a speed capability above 149 mph
ciated with the maximum load a tire can sup- maximum speed for the tire. (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
port. Summer tires designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds To determine the maximum speed capabil-
to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the Index Speed rating
ity of the tire, the service description for the
tire is designed to support. See also “Maxi- tire must be referred to.
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
mum tire load” (Y page 245) where the max-
The service description is comprised of tire
imum load associated with the load index is R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) load rating 5 and tire speed rating 6.
indicated in kilograms and lbs.
For additional information on tire load rating, S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) If your tire includes “ZR” in the size desig-
see “Load identification” (Y page 243). nation and no service description is given,
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the tire manufacturer must be consulted
Tire speed rating for the maximum speed capability.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) If a service description is given, the speed
G Warning!
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
Even when permitted by law, never operate V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
the service description. Example:
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
mum speed rating of the tires. W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
is the service description. The letter “Y”
Exceeding the maximum speed for which Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) designates the speed rating and the speed
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) (300 km/h).
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
RAny tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
242
Operation
Tires and wheels

in the size designation AND the service (RAC) and have been designed specifically If you are uncertain about the correct reading
description must be placed in parenthesis. for use in snow conditions. of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” An electronic speed limiter prevents your any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
speed rating in parenthesis designates the vehicle from exceeding a speed of: glad to assist you.
maximum speed capability of the tire as
R149 mph (240 km/h):
being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult
the tire manufacturer for the actual maxi- - SLK 300 Load identification
mum permissible speed of the tire. - SLK 300 (Sport Package)
All-season and winter tires - SLK 300 (Appearance Package)
Index Speed rating - SLK 350
Q M+S15 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) - SLK 350 (Sport Package)
- SLK 350 (Appearance Package)
T M+S15 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
R155 mph (250 km/h):
H M+S15 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) - SLK 55 AMG
V M+S15 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) R174 mph (280 km/h):
1 Load identification
- SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
winter performance. Make sure the tires may have a tire speed rating above the max- on tires are specific to each vehicle and
you use show M+S and the mountain/ imum speed permitted by the electronic may vary from data shown in above illus-
snowflake.marking on the tire side- speed limiter. tration.
wall. These tires meet specific snow trac- Make sure your tires have the required tire In addition to tire load rating, special load
tion performance requirements of the speed rating as specified for your vehicle in identification 1 may be molded into the tire
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) the “Technical data” section (Y page 345), sidewall following the letter designating the
and the Rubber Association of Canada for example when purchasing new tires. tire speed rating 6 (Y page 241).
Z
15 or M+S.for winter tires
243
Operation
Tires and wheels

RNo specification given: absence of any text Manufacturer’s identification mark
(like in above example) indicates a stand-
Manufacturer’s identification mark 2
ard load (SL) tire.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load New tires have a mark with two symbols.
(or reinforced) tire.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
RLight Load: designates a light load tire. bols. For more information on retreaded tires,
RC, D, E: designates load range associated see (Y page 229).
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure. Tire size
1 DOT Code 3 indicates the tire size.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size Tire type code
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire Tire type code 4 may, at the option of the
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. manufacturer) manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
5 Date of manufacture for identifying significant characteristics of
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates
efforts by tire manufactures to notify pur- the tire.
chasers in recall situations or other safety
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
matters concerning tires and gives purchas- Date of manufacture
ers the means to easily identify such tires.
tration. The date of manufacture 5 identifies the
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s iden-
week and year of manufacture.
tification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”. DOT (Department of Transportation) The first two figures identify the week, start-
ing with “01” to represent the first full week
Tire branding symbol 1 denotes that the tire of the calendar year. The second two figures
meets requirements of the U.S. Department represent the year.
of Transportation.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
244
Operation
Tires and wheels

Maximum tire load The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
G Warning! For more information on tire load rating, see
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the (Y page 241).
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire For information on calculating total and cargo
and Loading Information placard on the load capacities, see (Y page 233).
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also Maximum tire inflation pressure
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure. G Warning!
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pres-
pressure. Follow recommended tire infla- sure
tion pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated on tires are specific to each vehicle and
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, may vary from data shown in above illus-
adversely affect handling and fuel econ- tration.
omy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure for the tire.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com- Always follow the recommended tire inflation
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- pressure (Y page 235) for proper tire infla-
tance, and result in sudden deflation tion.
1 Maximum tire load rating
(blowout) because they are more likely to
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data become punctured or damaged by road
on tires are specific to each vehicle and debris, potholes etc.
tration.
245
Operation
Tires and wheels

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- may vary from data shown in above illus- Traction
ards tration.
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. Quality grades can be found, where applica-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Government requirement designed to give ble, on the tire sidewall between tread
based on straight-ahead braking traction
drivers consistent and reliable information shoulder and maximum section width. For
tests, and does not include acceleration,
regarding tire performance. Tire manufactur- example:
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
ers are required to grade tires based on three Treadwear Traction Temperature characteristics.
performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. Although not a 200 AA A The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
Government of Canada requirement, all tires are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
made for sale in North America have these the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
All passenger car tires must conform to fed- measured under controlled conditions on
grades branded on the sidewall.
eral safety requirements in addition to these specified government test surfaces of asphalt
grades. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Treadwear
G Warning!
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested will be substantially reduced. Under such
under controlled conditions on a specified weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
U.S. Government test course. For example, a with extreme caution.
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
course as a tire graded 100. road is always lower than on a dry road.
1 Treadwear You should pay particular attention to the
The relative performance of tires depends
2 Traction upon the actual conditions of their use, how- condition of the road whenever the outside
3 Temperature resistance ever, and may depart significantly from the temperature is close to the freezing point.
norm due to variations in driving habits, serv- Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data ice practices and differences in road charac- (Y page 251) with a minimum tread depth of
on tires are specific to each vehicle and teristics and climate. approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels
246
Operation
Tires and wheels

for the winter season to ensure normal bal- can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C This marking tells you about the type of cord
anced handling characteristics. On packed corresponds to a level of performance which and number of plies in the sidewall and under
snow, they can reduce your stopping distance all passenger car tires must meet under the the tread.
compared to summer tires. Stopping dis- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
tance, however, is still considerably greater No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
than when the road is not covered with snow levels of performance on the laboratory test Tire and loading terminology
or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. wheel than the minimum required by law.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may Accessory weight
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Tire ply material The combined weight (in excess of those
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz standard items which may be replaced) of
Limited Warranty. automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
Temperature
items are available as factory-installed equip-
G Warning! ment (whether installed or not).
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and Air pressure
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
The amount of air inside the tire pressing out-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
ward on each square inch of the tire. Air
rately or in combination, can cause exces-
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
sive heat build-up and possible tire failure. 1 Plies in sidewall inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), 2 Plies under tread
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to Aspect ratio
the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled con- on tires are specific to each vehicle and Dimensional relationship between tire sec-
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test may vary from data shown in above illus- tion height and section width expressed in
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tration. percentage.
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
247
Operation
Tires and wheels

Bar GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Another metric unit for air pressure. There are The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. must never exceed the GAWR for the front Maximum load rating
and rear axle indicated on the certification The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
Bead label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. that can be carried by the tire.
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum loaded vehicle weight
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
Cold tire inflation pressure including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed total load limit, and production options
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if weight.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no never exceed the GVWR indicated on the cer-
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). tification label located on the driver’s door
Maximum permissible tire inflation
B-pillar.
pressure
Curb weight This number is the greatest amount of air
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity This is the maximum permissible vehicle
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Normal occupant weight
air conditioning and additional optional equip- the vehicle including all options, passengers, The number of occupants the vehicle is
ment, but without passengers and cargo. fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
tongue load). It is indicated on certification (150 lb).
DOT (Department of Transportation) label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire Occupant distribution
meets requirements of the U.S. Department Kilopascal (kPa)
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
of Transportation. The metric unit for air pressure. There are their designated seating positions.
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
248
Operation
Tires and wheels

Production options weight Rim tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also
must indicate the ply materials in the tire and
The combined weight of those installed reg- A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly-
ular production options weighing over 5 lbs assembly upon which the tire beads are
ester, and others.
(2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard seated.
items which they replace, not previously con-
sidered in curb weight or accessory weight, Tire speed rating
Sidewall
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, Part of tire designation; indicates the speed
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special The portion of a tire between the tread and
range for which a tire is approved.
trim. the bead.
Total load limit

PSI (Pounds per square inch) TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-
A standard unit of measure for air pressure. Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
grams (150 lb) times the vehicle’s designated
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
seating capacity.
recall situations or other safety matters con-
Recommended tire inflation pressure
cerning tires and gives purchasers the means
The recommended tire inflation pressure for to easily identify such tires. The TIN is com- Traction
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire prised of “Manufacturer’s identification Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
and Loading Information placard located on mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date the tires. The amount of grip provided.
the driver’s door B-pillar and provides best of manufacture”.
handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so
equipped, supplemental information pertain-
Tread
Tire load rating
ing to special driving situations can be found The portion of a tire that comes into contact
on the tire inflation pressure label on the Numerical code associated with the maxi- with the road.
inside of the fuel filler flap. mum load a tire can support.
Treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and material used
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
This indicates the number of plies or the num- that show across the tread of a tire when only
ber of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire 1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
249
Operation
Tires and wheels

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards loose if not tightened with a torque of on front tires and tread center wear on rear
96 lb-ft (130 Nm). tires).
A tire information system that provides con-
sumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, tem- Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
perature and treadwear. Ratings are deter- bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
mined by tire manufacturers using U.S. wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
government testing procedures. The ratings
with tires of the same dimension all around. For information on wheel change, see “Flat
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the tire” (Y page 317).
same dimension all around, tires can be
Vehicle maximum load on the tire rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
Load on an individual tire that is determined pattern that will maintain the intended rota-
by distributing to each axle its share of the tion (spinning) direction of the tire
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing (Y page 231).
it by two. In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
Rotating tires possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configura-
G Warning!
tion, tires can be rotated according to the tire
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires manufacturer’s recommended intervals in
are of the same dimension. the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. none is available, tires should be rotated
rear), tire rotation is not possible. every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
G Warning! to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
Have the tightening torque checked after (spinning) direction must be maintained.
changing a wheel. Wheels could become Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
250
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving sure the tires you use show the mountain/ Snow chains
snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall.
General information These tires meet specific snow traction per- ! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
formance requirements of the Rubber Manu- clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Association of Canada (RAC) and have been make sure the use of snow chains is per-
designed specifically for use in snow condi- missible as specified in the “Technical
Winter tires tions. Use of winter tires is the only way to data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
achieve the maximum effectiveness of your Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
G Warning! vehicle’s driving safety systems such as the covered roads at speeds not to exceed
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than ABS and the ESP® in winter operation. 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
6 For safe handling, make sure all mounted as possible when driving on roads without
no longer suitable for winter operation. winter tires are of the same make and have snow.
the same tread design. Observe the following guidelines when using
G Warning! snow chains:
Always observe the speed rating of the winter
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
tires are fitted on the other wheels, be speed for which your tires are rated is below
aware that the difference in tire character- all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 345).
the speed rating of your vehicle, you must RUse
istics may very well impair turning stability snow chains in pairs and on rear
place a notice to this effect where it will be
and that overall driving stability may be wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
seen by the driver. Such notices are available
reduced. Adapt your driving style accord- mounting instructions.
at your tire dealer or any authorized Mer-
ingly. cedes-Benz Center.
Have the spare wheel replaced by regular
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest wheels, they may scrape against the body
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
Always use winter tires at temperatures ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
251
Operation
Winter driving
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on G Warning! i For information on driving with snow
this subject. The outside temperature indicator is not chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 251).
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited designed to serve as an ice-warning device Road salts and chemicals can adversely
depending on location. Always check local and is therefore unsuitable for that pur- affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
and state laws before installing snow pose. force may become necessary to produce the
chains. Indicated temperatures just above the normal brake effect.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel. freezing point do not guarantee that the Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
road surface is free of ice. The road may still traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
i When driving with snow chains, you may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 60) bridges. back to normal.
before setting the vehicle in motion. This If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
will improve the vehicle’s traction. G Warning! salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift should be tested as soon as possible after
in order to obtain braking action. This could driving is resumed.
Winter driving instructions result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- G Warning!
G Warning! vent this type of loss of control. Make sure not to endanger any other road
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make users when carrying out these braking
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe The most important rule for slippery or icy maneuvers.
and from around the vehicle with the engine roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox- acceleration, braking and steering maneu-
ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior vers. Do not use the cruise control system
resulting in unconsciousness and death. under such conditions.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
open a window slightly on the side of the move gear selector lever to position N or
vehicle not facing the wind. declutch in case of manual transmission. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by correc-
tive steering action.
252
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions Drinking and driving or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
Drive sensibly – save fuel G Warning!
To save fuel you should: Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation Power assistance
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions G Warning!
RRemove unnecessary loads. and judgment. There is no power assistance for the steer-
RAllow engine to warm up under low load The possibility of a serious or even fatal ing and the service brake when the engine
use. accident are greatly increased when you is not running.
RAvoid
drink or take drugs and drive. Steering and braking requires significantly
frequent acceleration and decelera-
tion. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow more effort and you could lose control of
anyone to drive who has been drinking or the vehicle and cause an accident as a
RHave all maintenance work performed at taking drugs. result.
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle
Booklet and as required by the Mainte-
is in motion.
nance system. Contact an authorized Mer-
Pedals
cedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving G Warning!
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on Make sure absolutely no objects are
short trips and in mountanous areas. obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets
in the footwell, make sure that the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneu-
vers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
253
Operation
Brakes After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on Salt-covered roads
for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the G Warning!
Downhill grades
brakes faster. A layer of salt on the brake discs and the
! When driving down long and steep brake linings may cause a delay in the brak-
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by Wet roads ing effect, resulting in a significantly
shifting into a lower gear to use the increased braking distance, which could
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent G Warning! lead to an accident.
overheating of the brakes and reduces After driving in heavy rain for some time To avoid this danger, you should:
wear. without applying the brakes or through Roccasionally brake carefully when you
When using the engine’s braking power, a water deep enough to wet brake compo- are driving on salt-covered roads, so that
drive wheel may not spin for an extended nents, the first braking action may be some- any layer of salt that may have built up
period of time, e.g. on slippery road surfa- what reduced and increased pedal pres- on the brake discs and the brake linings
ces. This may cause serious damage to the sure may be necessary to obtain expected is removed without putting other road
drivetrain which is not covered by the Mer- brake effect. Maintain a safe distance from users at risk
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. vehicles in front.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
The first time the brakes are applied after a ahead and drive with particular care
Continuous or hard braking long period of driving in heavy rain without Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
braking, it is possible that there will be a
G Warning! delayed braking response and that you will
trip and immediately after commencing a
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will new trip, so that salt residues are
need to depress the brake pedal more firmly. removed from the brake disc
cause excessive and premature wear of the
You should therefore maintain a greater dis-
brake pads.
tance from the vehicle in front.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Brake service
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
advisable to brake the vehicle with consider-
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
able force prior to parking. The heat gener-
dent. instrument cluster comes on and an acous-
ated serves to dry the brakes.
tic warning sounds although the parking
254
Operation
brake is released. Observe additional mes- when the vehicle is being towed with the they provide optimum braking efficiency.
sages in the multifunction display that may front axle raised. Until that time, you may need to use
appear. Active braking action through the ESP® increased brake pedal pressure while brak-
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may may otherwise seriously damage the brake ing. Please be aware of this and adjust your
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res- system which is not covered by the Mer- driving and braking accordingly during this
ervoir. cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. break-in period.
Have the brake system inspected immedi- If your brake system is normally only sub- Excessive high-demand braking will cause
ately. Contact an authorized Mercedes- jected to moderate loads, you should occa- correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
Benz Center. sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
All checks and service work on the brake sys- by applying above-normal braking pressure at instrument cluster and brake condition
tem should be carried out by qualified tech- higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip messages in the multifunction display.
nicians only. Contact an authorized Mer- of the brake pads. Especially for high performance driving, it
is important to maintain and have the brake
cedes-Benz Center. G Warning! system checked regularly.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec- Make sure not to endanger any other road
ommended by Mercedes-Benz. users when carrying out these braking The high-performance brake system is
G Warning! maneuvers. designed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to accommo-
If other than recommended brake pads are Refer to the description of the Brake Assist date the performance capabilities of the vehi-
installed, or other than recommended System (BAS) (Y page 60). cle.
brake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
that safe braking is substantially impaired. High-performance brake system noise depending on the
This could result in an accident. The high-performance brake system is only Rvehicle speed
available on SLK 55 AMG. Rbrake force applied
! Because the ESP® operates automati- G Warning! Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
cally, the engine and ignition must be shut
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and humidity
off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0
replacement brake pads and discs may
or 1) when the parking brake is being As with any brake system, the wear of indi-
take several hundred miles of driving until Z
tested on a brake test dynamometer or vidual brake system components such as
255
Operation
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your Hydroplaning Driving abroad
driving style and the conditions under which
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style Depending on the depth of the water layer on If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the US
calling for high demand braking will cause the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low or Canada, you should request dealer net-
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly. speeds and with new tires. work information for your destination from
X Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
in the road and apply brakes cautiously in
Driving off the rain.
Control and operation of radio trans-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place mitter
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached. Standing water
Safety notes
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do ! Do not drive through flooded areas.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an Before driving through water, determine its G Warning!
extended period with the ESP® switched depth. Please do not forget that your primary
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to If you must drive through standing water, responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
the drivetrain which is not covered by the drive slowly to prevent water from entering Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the passenger compartment or the engine agement and Data system), radio or tele-
compartment. Water in these areas could phone16 if road, weather and traffic condi-
! Simultaneously depressing the accelera- cause damage to electrical components or tions permit. Otherwise, you may not be
tor pedal and applying the brakes reduces wiring of the engine or transmission, or able to observe traffic conditions and could
engine performance and causes premature could result in water being ingested by the endanger yourself and others.
brake and drivetrain wear which is not cov- engine through the air intake causing Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- severe internal engine damage. Any such (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
ranty. damage is not covered by the Mercedes- covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi-
Benz Limited Warranty. mately 14 m) every second.
16 Observe all legal requirements.
256
Operation
Telephones and two-way radios Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Engine adjustments should not be altered in
using a mobile telephone while driving a any way. Moreover, the specified service pro-
G Warning! vehicle. cedures must be carried out regularly accord-
Never operate radio transmitters equipped ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-
Only operate the audio system or
with a built-in or attached antenna, such as ments. For details refer to the Maintenance
COMAND17 (Cockpit Management and
a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, Booklet.
Data System) if road, weather and traffic
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
conditions permit. G Warning!
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
sibly resulting in an accident and/or (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is your health. All exhaust gas contains car-
serious personal injury. Radio transmitters covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi- bon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
should only be used inside the vehicle if mately 14 m) every second. cause unconsciousness and possible
they are connected to an antenna that is death.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
installed on the outside of the vehicle. Do not run the engine in confined areas
instructions regarding use of an external
(such as a garage) which are not properly
antenna.
G Warning! ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Please do not forget that your primary fumes are entering the vehicle while driv-
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A Emission control ing, have the cause determined and cor-
driver’s attention to the road must always rected immediately. If you must drive under
be his/her primary focus when driving. For Certain systems of the engine serve to keep these conditions, drive only with at least
your safety and the safety of others, we the toxic components of the exhaust gases one window fully open at all times.
recommend that you pull over to a safe within permissible limits required by law.
location and stop before placing or taking These systems will function properly only
a telephone call. when maintained strictly according to factory
If you choose to use the telephone17 while specifications. Any adjustments on the
driving, please use the hands-free device engine should, therefore, be carried out only
and only use the telephone when road, by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center author-
weather and traffic conditions permit. ized technicians.
17 Observe all legal requirements
257
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance service indicator mes- (approximately 1 hour)
sage to Service H
Notes
The maintenance service indicator message (approximately 8 hours)
The Maintenance System in your vehicle will notify you when the next maintenance
tracks distance driven and the time elapsed Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of
service is due. maintenance services and intervals they need
since the last maintenance service, calcu-
Starting approximately 1 month before the to be performed at.
lates other maintenance service work
next maintenance service is due, one of the
required, and calls for the next maintenance
following messages will appear in the multi- Clearing the maintenance service indi-
service accordingly.
function display while you are driving or when cator message
We strongly recommend that you have your you switch on the ignition (example serv-
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes- ice A): The maintenance service indicator message
Benz Center, in accordance with the Mainte- is automatically cleared
nance Booklet at the times called for by the Service A Due In XXXX Miles (Km)
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
maintenance service indicator. Service A Due In XXX Days
switch on the ignition
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A Due In X Day
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Service A Due Now
reaching the service threshold while driving
and maintenance service indicator at the
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
designated times/mileage (kilometers) will
result in vehicle damage not covered by the suggested maintenance service term has
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. passed
X To clear the maintenance service indi-
cator message: Press reset button J on
the instrument cluster.
The maintenance services will be indicated by The standard display appears in the multi-
showing a service type A through type H in the function display.
multifunction display. Types A through H are
classified based on estimated time needed to
perform the maintenance service, ranging:
from Service A
258
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service term exceeded standard display (Y page 112) appears in Resetting the maintenance service
the multifunction display. indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested mainte-
nance service term, you will see the following X Press button k or j on the multi- In the event that the maintenance service on
message in the multifunction display: function steering wheel until the mainte- your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles nance service indicator display with the Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
(Km) service symbol 9 and the maintenance maintenance service indicator reset.
service deadline appears in the multifunc- The automotive maintenance facility carrying
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
tion display. out the maintenance service will find the
Service A Exceeded By X Day
information for resetting the maintenance
In addition, a signal sounds when the mes- i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
sage appears. disconnection will not be included in the
literature for your vehicle.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will count shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance Such literature is available from any author-
reset the maintenance service indicator fol- ized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
lowing a completed maintenance service. service deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the Mercedes-Benz.
maintenance service indicator message or i If the maintenance service indicator was
Calling up the maintenance service maintenance service indicator display. inadvertently reset, have an authorized
indicator display Do not confuse the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
i The menu overview can be found on indicator with the engine oil level indicator Only reset if the proper maintenance serv-
N. ice has been performed. Resetting the sys-
(Y page 111).
tem without performing the proper mainte-
You can call up the maintenance service indi- nance service as called for by the
cator display at any time to check when the maintenance service indicator will result in
next maintenance service is due. engine damage and/or other vehicle dam-
X Switch on the ignition. age not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
X Press button è or ÿ on the multi- Limited Warranty.
function steering wheel repeatedly until the
259
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care the paintwork as well as the vehicle under- More frequent washings are necessary to
body and cause lasting damage. deal with unfavorable conditions:
Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by extreme Rnear the ocean
and varying climatic conditions, but also by: Rin
Notes industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emis-
RAir pollution sions)
Regular and proper care will help to maintain RRoad salt Rduring winter operation
the value of your vehicle.
RTar You should check your vehicle from time to
G Warning!
RGravel and stone chipping time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. damage should be repaired as soon as pos-
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. To avoid paint damage, you should immedi-
sible to prevent corrosion.
Always follow the instructions on the par- ately remove:
ticular container. Always open your vehi- In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
RGrease and oil
cle’s doors or windows when cleaning the the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
inside.
RFuel check is a washing of the underbody followed
RCoolant
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
Never use fluids or solvents that are not need to be re-undercoated.
designed for cleaning your vehicle. RBrake fluid Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
Always lock away cleaning products and RBird droppings with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cav-
keep them out of reach of children. ities which will last for the lifetime of the
RInsects
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use RTree resins etc. necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-
scouring agents. Never apply strong force Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates Benz because of the possibility of incompati-
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge. the aggressiveness and potency of the above bility between materials used in the produc-
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the adverse influences. tion process and others applied later.
surface to be cleaned.
We have selected vehicle-care products and
While in operation, even while parked, your compiled recommendations which are spe-
vehicle is subjected to varying external influ- cially matched to our vehicles and which
ences which, if gone unchecked, can attack always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
260
Operation
Vehicle care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Tar stains Engine cleaning
Center.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or become more difficult to remove. A tar make sure to protect electrical components
damage due to negligent or incorrect care remover is recommended. and connectors from contact with water and
cannot always be removed or repaired with cleaning agents.
the vehicle-care products recommended
Paintwork, painted body components Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorro-
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
sion Wax should be applied to the engine
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape compartment after every engine cleaning.
The following topics deal with the cleaning or similar materials to painted body com- Before applying, all control linkage bushings
and care of your vehicle and give important ponents may damage the paintwork. and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-
“how-to” information as well as references to belt and all pulleys should be protected from
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care prod- any wax.
be applied when water drops on the paint
ucts.
surface do not “bead up”. This should nor-
mally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending Vehicle washing
Power washer on the climate and washing detergent used.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
! Follow the instructions provided by the Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
road salt as soon as possible.
power washer manufacturer on maintain- should be applied if the paint surface shows
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
ing a distance between the vehicle and the forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
nozzle of the power washer. Do not apply any of these products or wax if
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood Hand-wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in is still hot. Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in
damage to the tire. X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for direct sunlight.
Always replace a damaged tire. quick and provisional repairs of minor paint X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
Always keep the jet of water moving across damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle clean the vehicle.
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical doors, etc.).
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
rubber parts.
Z
261
Operation
Vehicle care
Do not spray directly towards the ventila- spray. Otherwise the caustic spray will ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
tion intake. damage the paint or ornamental moldings. moldings. Although ornamental moldings
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent, If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before may have chrome appearance, they could
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car running it through the automatic car wash. be made of anodized aluminum that will be
Shampoo. damaged when cleaned with chrome
! Make sure the combination switch is set cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- to wiper setting 0. Otherwise, the rain sen- those ornamental moldings.
fused jet of water. sor could activate and cause the wipers to For very dirty ornamental moldings of
X Do not spray directly towards the ventila- move unintentionally. This may lead to vehi- which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
tion intake. cle damage. a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exte- ornamental molding is chrome-plated, con-
and chamois frequently. rior rear view mirrors prior to running the tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle through an automatic car wash to
X Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry prevent damage to the mirrors.
with a chamois. Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
When leaving the automatic car wash, make side markers, turn signal lenses
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the sure the mirrors are folded out.
finish. X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
After running the vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
Automatic car wash with plenty of water.
shield and the wiper blade inserts. This will
You can have your vehicle washed in an auto- prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
matic car wash from the start. Brushless car ! Only use window cleaning solutions that
which can be caused by residual wax on the
washes are preferable. are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Win-
windshield.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
dow cleaning solutions which are not suit-
recirculation mode using button , on able may damage the plastic lamp lenses
Ornamental moldings of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use
the climate control panel.
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic moldings, use a damp cloth. solvents.
touchless car wash which uses caustic
262
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap Rear window cleaning
blades into place. Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully
! The windshield wipers must be in a verti- X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade raised and closed.
cal position before folding them away from inserts with a clean cloth and mild deter- G Warning!
the windshield. They could otherwise dam- gent solution. Do not clean the rear window with the hard-
age the hood. X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window top in a position other than the fully raised
Never open the hood when the wiper arms cleaning solution on all outside and inside and closed position. Otherwise, the hard-
are folded forward. glass surfaces. top may move unexpectedly which may
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- result in personal injury to you or others.
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
mended.
X Switch on the ignition. X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto cleaning solution on all outside and inside
X Turn combination switch to wiper setting
the windshield before turning the SmartKey glass surfaces.
II (Y page 88).
in the starter switch. An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch mended.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
off the ignition. arm back. If released, the force of the
G Warning! impact from the tensioning spring could Light alloy wheels
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and crack the windshield.
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
remove SmartKey from starter switch
! To clean the window interior, do not use X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
before cleaning the windshield and/or the
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor
containing solvents. Do not touch the water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
could suddenly turn on and cause injury.
inside of the front, rear or side windows
with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. ring. Doing so may damage the windows. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
They could tear.
clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an

Z
extended period of time immediately after
263
Operation
Vehicle care
it has been cleaned, especially not after the G Warning! X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays with light pressure.
rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
increased corrosion of the brake disks and the steering wheel. Cleaners containing Steering wheel and gearshift/gear
brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners solvents will make the surface porous and selector lever
may also damage the wheel paint if the vehicle occupants could suffer serious inju-
vehicle is not driven after cleaning. X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
ries from plastic parts coming loose in the
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system event of air bag deployment. or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
should always be warmed-up before it is Leather Care.
parked after cleaning. To do so, please ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
drive your vehicle for several minutes to Carpets
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
allow the brakes to dry. When applying Mer-
surface. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
cedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mer-
cedes-Benz approved Wheel Care prod- Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Hard plastic trim items
ucts, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
Headliner
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
pressure. X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
Plastic and rubber parts cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild Audio or COMAND display
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing Seat belts
solution. ! You must switch off the audio or
COMAND display and allow it to cool prior X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
to cleaning.
solution. ! The seat belts must not be treated with
The surface may temporarily change color. ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents. chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
If this is the case, wait for it to dry. These can damage or even destroy the seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
audio display screen. (80†) or in direct sunlight.
264
Operation
Vehicle care
G Warning! as high humidity or high temperature by Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may showing wrinkles for example.
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
severely weaken them. In a crash they may X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
not be able to provide adequate protection. and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes- and the classy appearance.
Benz approved Leather Care.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome Pol-
Upholstery ! To avoid damage to leather upholstery: ishing Paste each time the vehicle has been
washed, especially during the winter.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing RWipe with light pressure only.
clothing that have the tendency to give off RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning ! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the agents such as scouring milk or powder. wheel cleaners as they could cause corro-
upholstery to become permanently discol- sion.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
ored. By lining the seats with a proper inter-
mediate cover, contact-discoloration will be As leather is a natural product, it could
prevented. otherwise harden or become porous.
G Warning! RExercise particular care when cleaning
Only use seat covers which have been perforated leather as its underside
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for should not become wet.
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
may interfere with or prevent the deploy-
Wood trims
ment of the head-thorax air bags. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
availability. wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or

Leather upholstery
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
Please note that leather upholstery is a natu- these may be abrasive.
ral product and is therefore subject to a nat-
ural aging process. Leather upholstery may
also react to certain ambient influences such
265
266
Practical hints

Where will I find ...? .......................... 268
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 271
What to do if … .................................. 297
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 308
Opening/closing manually .............. 310
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 311
Replacing bulbs ................................. 312
Replacing wiper blades .................... 315
Flat tire .............................................. 317
Battery ............................................... 328
Jump starting .................................... 330
Towing the vehicle ............................ 332
Fuses .................................................. 335
267
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Vehicle equipment Where will I find ...? X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 69).
First aid kit X Lift the trunk floor.

i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea-
tures, standard or optional, potentially i Check expiration dates and contents for X Remove the spare wheel (if so equipped)
available for your vehicle at the time of pur- completeness at least once a year and (Y page 270).
chase. Please be aware that your vehicle replace missing/expired items.
might not be equipped with all features
The first aid kit is located in a parcel net
described in this manual.
behind the driver’s seat.
Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
RAlignment bolt
RCollapsible wheel chock Vehicles with spare wheel
1 Collapsible wheel chock
RElectric air pump
2 Jack
RJack
3 Protective wrap
RProtective wrap18 4 Alignment bolt
RTIREFIT kit19 5 Towing eye bolt
RTowing eye bolt 6 Wheel wrench
RValve 7 Valve extractor
extractor
8 Electric air pump
RWheel wrench
18 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

19 SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package only.
268
Practical hints

Jack
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes.
If you use the jack for any other purpose,
you or others could be injured, as the jack
is designed only for the purpose of chang-
ing a wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety
notes in the “Mounting the spare wheel”
Vehicles with TIREFIT section and the notes on the jack.
1 TIREFIT kit
2 Jack X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
3 Collapsible wheel chock (Y page 268).
4 Towing eye bolt
1 Tilt the plates upward
5 Alignment bolt
2 Fold the lower plate outward
6 Wheel wrench
3 Insert the plate
7 Valve extractor
8 Electric air pump X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward 1.
X Fold the lower plate outward 2.
Collapsible wheel chock X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure into the openings of base plate 3.
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel. For information on where to place wheel
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting Storage position
vehicle tool kit (Y page 268). the vehicle” (Y page 322).
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of
arrow as far as it will go.
269
Practical hints

Spare wheel X Take off the spare wheel bolts.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 317).
page 317.
The spare wheel is located in the space under-
Storing the spare wheel after use
neath the trunk floor.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 69). If you wish to store the spare wheel after use,
carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the
X Lift the trunk floor. spare wheel may not fit the spare wheel well.
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before
Operational position storing it.
X Turn the crank handle clockwise. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the
collapsible tire.
Before placing the jack back in the vehicle
X Take the valve extractor from the vehicle
tool kit:
tool kit (Y page 268).
X Fully collapse the jack.
X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and
X Fold in the crank handle (storage position). allow the air to escape.
1 Spare wheel
i It may take a few minutes for the collaps-
ible tire to deflate completely.
2 Retaining screw
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X Remove retaining screw 2 by turning it
X Place the valve extractor back in the vehicle
counterclockwise.
tool kit.
X Remove spare wheel 1. X Screw the valve cap back on the valve.
The spare wheel bolts are located under a X Take the protective wrap from the vehicle
plastic cover on the outside of the spare tool kit.
wheel rim.
270
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

X Pull the protective wrap over the spare Vehicle status messages in the multi- tion steering wheel. They are then stored in
wheel. function display the Vehicle status message memory menu
X Place the spare wheel in the spare wheel (Y page 118). Remember that clearing a mes-
Notes sage will only make the message disappear.
well.
Warning and malfunction messages appear in Clearing a message will not correct the con-
X Pierce the protective wrap with retaining
the multifunction display located in the instru- dition that caused the message to appear.
screw 2.
ment cluster. G Warning!
X Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining Certain warning and malfunction messages All categories of messages contain impor-
screw 2 clockwise. are accompanied by an audible signal. tant information which should be taken
Address these messages accordingly and fol- note of and, where a malfunction is indi-
low the additional instructions given in this cated, addressed as soon as possible at an
Operator’s Manual. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Selecting the Vehicle status message Failure to repair condition noted may cause
memory menu in the control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
(Y page 118) displays both cleared and Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
uncleared messages. age or personal injury.
High-priority messages appear in the multi-
function display in red color.
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
cleared from the multifunction display using
play is inoperative.
the reset button J (Y page 107) or button
j, k, · or è on the multifunc- As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
tion steering wheel. mation about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/
Other messages of high priority and mes-
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
sages of less immediate priority can be
messages or the failure of any systems.
cleared from the multifunction display using
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
the reset button J (Y page 107) or button
j, k, · or è on the multifunc- Z
271
Practical hints

If you must continue to drive, please do so On the pages that follow, you will find a com- For your convenience the messages are div-
with added caution. Contact an authorized pilation of the most important warning and ided into text messages (Y page 272) and
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. malfunction messages that may appear in the Symbol messages (Y page 279).
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS ABS, ESP Inopera- The brake system is still functioning nor- X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
tive mally but due to a malfunction, the ABS, may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
See Operator’s the BAS and the ESP® are unavailable. ing capability.
Manual X Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
ESP ESP Inoperative The brake system is still functioning nor- X Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s mally but due to a malfunction the ESP® X Have the system checked at an authorized
Manual is unavailable. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The BAS may not be operational.
272
Practical hints

ESP ESP Unavailable The brake system still functions normally X Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s but due to insufficient power supply the When the voltage is above the required value
Manual ESP® is unavailable. again, the ESP® is operational again and the mes-
The BAS may not be operational. sage in the multifunction display should disap-
pear.
If the message in the multifunction display does
not disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
X Have the system checked at an authorized
ESP ESP Unavailable The ESP® is temporarily not available. X Drive a short distance with added caution at a
See Operator’s The self-diagnosis might not be com- vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual pleted yet. When the message disappears, the ESP® is
The BAS may not be operational. available again.
The brake system is still functioning nor- If the message does not disappear:
mally but without the systems specified X Continue driving with added caution.
above available.
X Have the system checked at an authorized
273
Practical hints

Front-passenger The passenger front air bag and the pas- X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
Airbag Enabled senger-side knee bag are activated while possible.
See Operator’s driving even though a child, small individ- X Engage the parking brake.
Manual ual, or object below the system’s weight
threshold is on the passenger seat, or the
passenger seat is empty. Objects on the X Open the passenger door.
seat or forces acting on the seat may X Remove child and child restraint from passen-
make the system sense supplemental
ger seat.
weight.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present. The system may recognize
such forces as supplemental weight and sense
that an occupant on the passenger seat is of a
greater weight than actually present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 48) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 28) for
the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 75 indicator lamp in the cen-
ter console should illuminate and remain illu-
minated, indicating that the OCS (Y page 46)
274
Practical hints

has deactivated the passenger front air bag
and the passenger-side knee bag.
Rthe message Front-passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front-passenger Airbag Disa-
bled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time
the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 sec-
onds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the passen-
ger classification sensed by the OCS, the
75 indicator lamp will remain illu-
minated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 75 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old
and under and other small individuals use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Z
275
Practical hints

Front-passenger The passenger front air bag and the pas- X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
Airbag Disabled senger-side knee bag are deactivated possible.
See Operator’s while driving even though an adult or X Engage the parking brake.
Manual someone larger than a small individual is
occupying the passenger seat. Forces act-
ing on the seat may make the system X Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit
sense a decrease in weight. the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 48) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 28) for
the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 75 indicator lamp in the cen-
ter console should illuminate and remain illu-
minated, indicating that the OCS (Y page 46)
has deactivated the passenger front air bag
and the passenger-side knee bag.
276
Practical hints

Rthe message Front-passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front-passenger Airbag Disa-
bled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time
the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 sec-
onds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the passen-
ger classification sensed by the OCS, the
75 indicator lamp will remain illu-
minated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 75 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the passenger seat even after performing the above
corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
277
Practical hints

Driving systems
Cruise Control Inoperative The cruise control is malfunctioning. X Have cruise control checked at an authorized
Cruise Control - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruise X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if the sit-
(USA only) control has not been fulfilled. For exam- uation allows, and set the speed.
- - - Km/h ple, you attempted to set a speed below X Check the activation conditions for cruise con-
(Canada only) 20 mph (30 km/h). trol (Y page 185).
Tires
Tire Pressure Inoperative The TPMS is malfunctioning. X Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Mer-
Monitor cedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure Inoperative There are wheels without appropriate X Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Mer-
Monitor No Wheel Sensors wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires). cedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure Currently Unavail- The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
Monitor able pressure due to a nearby radio interfer- been removed, the TPMS automatically becomes
ence source or insufficient power supply. active again after a few minutes driving.
278
Practical hints

G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as pos-
2 limit. sible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
279
Practical hints

Release Parking You are driving with the parking brake X Release the parking brake.
; Brake engaged.
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
; Check Brake Fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- Risk of accident!
Level ervoir. X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
(USA only)
as it is safe to do so.
3 X Do not drive any further.
(Canada only)
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
280
Practical hints

Safety systems
Tele Aid Inopera- One or more main functions of the Tele Aid X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an author-
L tive system are malfunctioning. ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Restraint System There is a malfunction in the supplemental X Drive with added caution to the nearest author-
1 Malfunction restraint systems. The air bags or the ized Mercedes-Benz Center and have the sys-
Service Required emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) tem checked immediately.
could deploy unexpectedly or fail to acti-
vate in an accident.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Vehicle
The trunk is open. X Close the trunk.

Ê
You are driving with the hood open. X Close the hood (Y page 224).
O
Z
281
Practical hints

You are driving with at least one door X Close the door(s).
J open.
Retractable Roof The on-board voltage is too low. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
K Operation Please X Start the engine.
Wait
The hardtop drive system was shut down After about 10 minutes you can open or close the
for safety reasons after multiple, consec- retractable hardtop.
utive attempts to raise or lower the hard- X Switch on the ignition.
top.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
X If the retractable hardtop still does not open or

close properly, have the hardtop system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Retractable Roof The retractable hardtop is not completely X Make sure the retractable hardtop is com-
K Lowering opened or closed. The roof hydraulics will pletely opened or closed (Y page 199).
start to lose pressure.
Retractable Roof You have attempted to open the retracta- X Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to
K Operation Only At ble hardtop while driving. open the hardtop again.
Standstill
282
Practical hints

Retractable Roof You are driving with the retractable hard- X Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Observe the
K Not Opened/Closed top not properly locked. traffic situation around you.
Completely X Push the retractable hardtop switch forward or
rearward until the retractable hardtop is com-
pletely closed or open (Y page 199).
X If the retractable hardtop still does lock prop-
erly, have the hardtop system checked at an
Trunk Partition You are trying to open or close the retract- X Close the luggage cover (Y page 202).
M Open able hardtop even though the luggage
cover in the trunk is not closed and/or
properly engaged.
Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the Smart- X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
I Key.
Please get a new The SmartKey is malfunctioning. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
I key.
Bluetooth Ready The telephone has not yet been con- X Connect the telephone to the audio system or
t nected to the audio system or COMAND COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
system via Bluetooth®.
Top Up Washer Fluid The washer fluid in the washer fluid res- X Add washer fluid (Y page 228).
W ervoir has fallen below the minimum level.
283
Practical hints

Engine
Engine Service There may be a malfunction in: X Have the engine checked as soon as possible
ú at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RThe fuel management system
(USA only)
± RThe ignition system
(Canada only) RThe exhaust system
RThe fuel system
Display Malfunc- Certain electronic systems are unable to X Have the electronic systems checked at an
± tion relay information to the control system. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drive To Workshop The coolant temperature display or the
tachometer may have failed.
Top Up Coolant The coolant level is too low. X Add coolant (Y page 227).
B See Operator’s X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
Manual cooling system checked at an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
284
Practical hints

Coolant X
Ì Stop, turn engine
The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as possible.
off. X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multi-
function display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-
and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
Z
285
Practical hints

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
286
Practical hints

Coolant X
Ì Stop, turn engine
The poly-V-belt could be broken. Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as possible.
off. X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Oth-
erwise the engine will overheat due to an inop-
erative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the
vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multi-
function display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
287
Practical hints

X
Ì The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc-
tioning.
Observe the coolant temperature in the multi-
function display.
If the coolant temperature is under 248‡
(120†), you may continue driving to an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g.
by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
The battery is no longer charging. X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon

# as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Oth-
Rbroken
erwise the engine will overheat due to an inop-
poly-V-belt
erative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
288
Practical hints

Check engine oil SLK 300 and SLK 350 only: X Check the engine oil level (Y page 224) and add
N level at next refu- The engine oil has dropped to a critical engine oil as required (Y page 226).
eling. level. X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
Add 1 qt. engine SLK 55 AMG only: X Add engine oil (Y page 226) and check the
N oil at next refuel- The engine oil level is too low. engine oil level (Y page 224).
ing.
(USA only)
Add 1 liter engine
oil at next refuel-
ing.
(Canada only)
If the message Add 1 qt. (Canada: The message will be stored in the vehicle sta- For information on approved engine oils con-
1 liter) engine oil at next refuel- tus message memory after you have cleared tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
ing (SLK 55 AMG) or Check engine oil it from the multifunction display. visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
level at next refueling (SLK 300, Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
SLK 350) appears while the engine is running obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
and at operating temperature, the engine oil station to refill your engine oil to the required displayed could result in serious engine
level has dropped to approximately the mini- level. damage that is not covered by the Mer-
mum level. cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
289
Practical hints

Cannot Measure SLK 55 AMG only: X Have the measuring system checked at an
N Engine Oil Level authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
Engine Oil Level SLK 55 AMG only: X Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all
N Reduce Oil Level legal requirements with respect to its disposal.
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging the engine or
the catalytic converter.
Engine Oil Level There is no oil in the engine. There is a X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
N Stop, turn engine danger of engine damage. as it is safe to do so.
off. X Turn off the engine.
X Add engine oil (Y page 226) and check the
engine oil level (Y page 224).
The fuel level has dropped below the X Refuel at the next gas station.
¿ reserve mark.
Reserve Fuel The fuel level has dropped below the X Refuel at the next gas station.
4 reserve mark.
290
Practical hints

Gas Cap Is Open A loss of pressure has been detected in X Check the fuel cap (Y page 221).
4 the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
closed properly or the fuel system may be
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system
leaky.
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Lamps
Reverse Lamp Left The left or right backup lamp is malfunc- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. or tioning. as soon as possible.
Reverse Lamp Right
Brake-/Tail Lamp The left or right brake lamp is malfunc- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Left tioning. This message will only appear if as soon as possible.
or all LEDs have stopped working.
Brake-/Tail Lamp
Right
3rd Brake Lamp The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunc- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. tioning. This message will only appear if as soon as possible.
all LEDs have stopped working.
291
Practical hints

Front Foglamp Left The left or right front fog lamp is malfunc- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. or tioning. as soon as possible.
Front Foglamp
Right
Marker Lamp Front The front left side or right side marker X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Left lamp is malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
or
Marker Lamp Front
Right
Marker Lamp Rear The rear left side or right side marker lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Left is malfunctioning. This message will only as soon as possible.
or appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Marker Lamp Rear
Right
Parking Lamp, The left or right front parking lamp is mal- X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
. Front Left functioning. A substitute bulb is being (Y page 312).
Auxiliary Bulb On used.
or
Parking Lamp,
Front Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
292
Practical hints

High Beam Left The left or right high-beam lamp (halogen X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
. or headlamps)/high-beam flasher lamp (Bi- (Y page 312).
High Beam Right Xenon headlamps) is malfunctioning.
License Plate Lamp The left or right license plate lamp is mal- X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
. Left functioning. (Y page 312).
or
License Plate Lamp
Right
AUTO-Light The light sensor is malfunctioning. The X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Inoperative headlamps come on automatically. as soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running
lamp mode to manual (Y page 122).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (Y page 82).
Low Beam Left The left or right low-beam lamp is mal- X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon
. or functioning. as possible (Y page 312).
Low Beam Right X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized
Rear Foglamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Auxiliary Bulb On substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Z
293
Practical hints

Switch Off Lights You have removed the SmartKey from the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to M or
. starter switch, opened the driver’s door U (Y page 81).
and left the headlamps on.
Switch off lights The exterior lamp switch is set to U X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
. or remove key and you have forgotten to remove the or
SmartKey from the starter switch. The X Switch off the headlamps.
parking lamps remain switched on.
Tail Lamp, Left The left or right tail lamp is malfunction- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Auxiliary Bulb On ing. This message will only appear if all as soon as possible.
or LEDs have stopped working. A substitute
Tail Lamp, Right bulb is being used.
Auxiliary Bulb On
Rear Left Turn Sig- The left or right rear turn signal lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. nal malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being as soon as possible.
Auxiliary Bulb On used.
or
Rear Right Turn
Signal
Auxiliary Bulb On
294
Practical hints

Turn Signal Front The left or right front turn signal lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
. Left malfunctioning. (Y page 314).
or
Turn Signal Front
Right
Left Mirror Turn The turn signal in the left or right exterior X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
. Signal rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This as soon as possible.
or message will only appear if all LEDs have
Right Mirror Turn stopped working.
Signal
Tires
Please correct the The tire pressure is too low in one or more X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
H tire pressure. tires. required (Y page 237).
or
The tire pressure of the individual tires dif-
fer from each other significantly.
Tire Pressure One or more tires are deflating. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
H Caution - Tire abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Defect X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 322).
Z
295
Practical hints

Tire Pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires is X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
H Check Tires already below the minimum value. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 322).
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
296
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if … check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
Lamps in instrument cluster necessary.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
Notes (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp,
If any of the following lamps in the instrument and turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- vated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on, have it
checked and replaced if necessary.
297
Practical hints
What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

- The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has detected a malfunc- X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
lamp comes on while the tion and switched off. The BAS braking, reducing steering capability.
engine is running. and ESP® are also switched off X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
(see messages in multifunction display (Y page 271).
display).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
The brake system is still function-
as soon as possible.
ing normally but without the sys-
tems specified above available. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
If the ABS control unit is malfunc-
tioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the
automatic transmission may also
be malfunctioning.
- The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has switched off due to When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is opera-
lamp comes on while the insufficient power supply. tional again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
engine is running. The battery might not be charged X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator and
sufficiently. the battery checked.
- The yellow ABS indicator The self-diagnosis has not yet The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a vehicle
lamp comes on while the been completed yet. speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
engine is running.
298
Practical hints
What to do if …
; (USA only) You are driving with the parking X Release the parking brake.
3 (Canada only) brake engaged.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
; (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in X Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe
3 (Canada only) the reservoir. location as soon as it is safe to do so.
The red brake warning lamp X Engage the parking brake.
comes on while the engine is run- X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
ning. display (Y page 271).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning
lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously
burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
299
Practical hints
What to do if …
Safety systems

< The red seat belt telltale The seat belt telltale reminds you X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on for a maximum and your passenger to fasten Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
of 6 seconds after starting your seat belts before driving off. belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
the engine. starting the engine.
< You hear a warning chime You have forgotten to fasten your X Fasten your seat belt.
for a maximum of 6 sec- seat belt. The warning chime stops sounding.
onds after starting the
engine.
< The red seat belt telltale You and/or your passenger have X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on while the vehicle forgotten to fasten your seat The seat belt telltale goes out.
is standing still and the belts.
engine is running or during
driving. There are items placed on the X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
passenger seat and therefore the a safe place.
system senses the passenger The seat belt telltale goes out.
seat as being occupied.
300
Practical hints
What to do if …
< During driving the red seat The vehicle’s speed once X Fasten your seat belts.
belt telltale flashes and exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sound-
you additionally hear an you and/or your passenger have ing.
intermittent warning forgotten to fasten your seat
chime with increasing belts.
intensity.
There are items placed on the X Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a safe
passenger seat and therefore the place.
system senses the passenger The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sound-
seat as being occupied. ing.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened.

1 The red SRS indicator There is a malfunction in the X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
lamp comes on while driv- restraint systems. The air bags or Center.
ing. Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs) could deploy unexpect-
edly or fail to activate in an acci-
dent.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
Z
301
Practical hints
What to do if …
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® has been switched off. X Switch the ESP® back on.
lamp comes on while the Risk of accident! Exceptions: (Y page 61).
engine is running.
When the ESP® is switched off it X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
will not stabilize the vehicle if the the prevailing road and weather conditions.
system recognizes that the vehi-
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
cle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The cruise control is deactivated
and cannot be switched on.
v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® is not operational due X Read and Observe additional messages that may appear in the
lamp comes on while the to a malfunction. multifunction display.
engine is running. Risk of accident! X Continue driving with added caution.
The cruise control is deactivated X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
and cannot be switched on. conditions.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
302
Practical hints
What to do if …
v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® or Electronic Traction X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
lamp flashes while driving. System (ETS) has come into oper- X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
ation because of detected trac-
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
tion loss in at least one tire.
conditions.
The cruise control is deactivated.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 61).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Vehicle

4 The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the X Refuel at the next gas station.
reserve warning lamp reserve mark. After refueling you will see the message 1 Message in the multi-
comes on when the engine function display.
is running.
X Press reset button J to confirm the message (Y page 107).
In addition the message
Reserve Fuel appears in
4 The yellow fuel tank The fuel cap is not closed prop- X Close the fuel cap.
reserve warning lamp erly.
comes on when the engine
is running.
303
Practical hints
What to do if …
Engine
? (USA only) There may be a malfunction in: X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
± (Canada only) RThe fuel management system Mercedes-Benz Center.
The yellow engine malfunction RThe ignition system i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon
indicator lamp comes on when as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local
RThe emission control system
the engine is running. requirements.
RSystems which affect emis-
sions
Such malfunctions may result in
excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-
home (emergency operation)
mode.
304
Practical hints
What to do if …
Tires
H USA only: The TPMS detects a loss of pres- X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
Combination low tire pressure in at least one tire. braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
sure telltale/TPMS mal- X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
function telltale for the (Y page 271).
TPMS illuminates continu-
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
ously.
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction tell-
tale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
H USA only: There is a malfunction in the X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
Combination low tire pres- TPMS. (Y page 271).
sure telltale/TPMS mal- X Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
function telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
TPMS flashes 60 seconds
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of
and then stays illumi-
driving.
nated.
G Warning! the tire inflation pressure label on the inside As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires been equipped with a tire pressure moni-
should be checked every other week when of a different size than the size indicated on toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure the Tire and Loading Information placard or, tire pressure telltale when one or more of
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer if available, the tire inflation pressure label, your tires are significantly underinflated.
on the Tire and Loading Information placard you should determine the proper tire infla- Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, tion pressure for those tires. telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and Z
305
Practical hints
What to do if …
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving Your vehicle has also been equipped with a be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly underinflated tire causes TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate as intended.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail- when the system is not operating properly. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
ure. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- of reasons, including the installation of
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency bined with the low tire pressure telltale. incompatible replacement or alternate tires
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- When the system detects a malfunction, or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please the telltale will flash for approximately TPMS from functioning properly. Always
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for 1 minute and then remain continuously illu- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
proper tire maintenance, and it is the minated. This sequence will continue upon replacing one or more tires or wheels on
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
tire pressure, even if underinflation has not malfunction exists. When the malfunction or alternate tires and wheels allow the
reached the level to trigger illumination of indicator is illuminated, the system may not TPMS to continue to function properly.
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Lamp in center console

75 The system is malfunctioning. X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The indicator lamp illuminates Mercedes-Benz Center.
and remains illuminated with the X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
weight of a typical adult or some- corrective steps (Y page 271).
one larger than a small individual
on the passenger seat.
306
Practical hints
What to do if …
G Warning!
If the 75 indicator lamp illu-
minates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the passenger
seat, do not have any passenger use the
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.

75 The system is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The indicator lamp does not illu- and check installation of the child seat.
minate and/or does not remain X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
illuminated with the weight of a are present.
typical 12-month-old child in a
X If the indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon
standard child restraint or less on
as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not trans-
the passenger seat.
port a child on the passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 271).
G Warning! senger seat, do not transport a child on the

If the 75 indicator lamp does passenger seat until the system has been
not illuminate or remains out with the repaired.
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the pas-
307
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking/locking manually X Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow. Unlocking the trunk
X Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing. A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft
Unlocking the vehicle
(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey, open the driver’s door and the Unlocking the driver’s door
trunk using the mechanical key.
i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechani-
cal key and opening the driver’s door or the
trunk will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key $ Unlocking
$ Unlocking 2 Handle
2 Mechanical key 3 Mechanical key
X Insert mechanical key 3 into the trunk lid

X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s
door lock until it stops. lock until it stops.
X Turn mechanical key 3 counterclockwise
X Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise
to position $ until the locking knob moves to position $ and simultaneously pull han-
up. dle 2 and lift trunk lid.
The driver’s door is unlocked. ! Always make sure there is sufficient over-
X Pull the door handle to open the driver’s head clearance.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
door.
2 Mechanical key X Turn mechanical key 3 back and remove
it from the trunk lid lock.
308
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Locking the vehicle Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key, lock it as follows: If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunc-
X Close the passenger door and the trunk. tioning, the gear selector lever could remain
locked in park position P. In this case the gear
X Press the central locking switch selector lever can be unlocked manually, e.g.
(Y page 69). to tow the vehicle.
X Check to see whether the locking knob on
the passenger door has moved down.
X If necessary, push it down manually.
$ Locking
X Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door.
2 Mechanical key
X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 308). X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s
X
door lock until it stops.
Check whether the trunk is locked.
X Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise to posi-
X If it is not locked, lock it with the mechan-
tion $.
ical key (Y page 71).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle The driver’s door is locked.
1 Gear selector lever cover
should now be locked. i This procedure does not arm the anti- 2 Release
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel X Engage the parking brake.
filler flap and the storage compartments.
! Do not use sharp objects to loosen the
gear selector lever cover in the center con-
sole, as this could damage the gear selec-
tor lever cover or the center console.
309
Practical hints
Opening/closing manually
X Insert a flat, blunt object into the left edge Opening/closing manually G Warning!
of gear selector lever cover 1 at the posi- To prevent possible accidents, drive the
tion indicated by the arrows. Raising retractable hardtop manually
vehicle only with the retractable hardtop
X Loosen gear selector lever cover 1 using G Warning! either completely closed and locked, or
this object. If the retractable hardtop does not com- fully lowered into its storage compartment.
X Using your hands, pull gear selector lever pletely open or close, the roof hydraulics
cover 1 out and remove. will lose pressure and the retractable hard-
top is lowered
X Simultaneously push down release 2 and
Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the
move the gear selector lever out of park
ignition is switched on
position P.
Rafter approximately 15 seconds when
The gear selector lever is unlocked now.
the ignition is switched off
i The gear selector lever is locked again as Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a
soon as you move it back to park position warning will sound. In the multifunction dis-
P. play you will see K and the message
Retractable Roof Lowering.
Properly lock retractable hardtop before
continuing to drive.
G Warning!
Manually closing the retractable hardtop is
a complicated and technically demanding
procedure and should only be performed by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
qualified technician.
Attempting to manually close the retracta-
ble hardtop may cause damage to the
retractable hardtop and/or personal injury.
310
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries

Replacing SmartKey batteries When inserting the batteries, make sure they X Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
are clean and free of lint. X Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis- When replacing batteries, always replace arrow.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be locked both batteries.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
or unlocked. It is recommended to have the
i The required replacement batteries are X Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
batteries replaced at an authorized Mer-
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz SmartKey housing.
cedes-Benz Center.
Center.
G Warning!
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive CR 2025 or equivalent.
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries
X Remove the mechanical key from the
out of reach of children.
SmartKey (Y page 308).
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning
SmartKey batteries contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special han-
dling and regard for the environment.
3 Batteries
Check with your local government’s dis-
posal guidelines. California residents, see 4 Contact springs
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazardous- X Pull out batteries 3.
Waste /Perchlorate/index.cfm.
X Insert new batteries 3 under contact
Batteries contain materials that can harm the 1 Mechanical key springs 4 with the positive terminal (+)
environment if disposed of improperly. Recy- 2 Battery compartment side facing up.
cling of batteries is the preferred method of
X Return battery compartment 2 into
disposal. Many states require sellers of bat-
teries to accept old batteries for recycling. SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
Z
311
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
X Slide mechanical key 1 back into the Replacing bulbs mend that you have such work done by a
SmartKey. qualified technician.
Safety notes
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Safe vehicle operation depends to a large i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
degree on proper exterior lighting and signal- fogged up on the inside as a result of high
ing. humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely the lights on should clear up the fogging.
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an author- Bulbs
ized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang-
ing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recom-
312
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Rear lamps RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when han-
dling bulbs.
Lamp Type Lamp Type RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
1 Additional turn signal LED 8 High-mounted brake LED grease.

lamp lamp RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
2 High-beam/high-beam H7 (55 W) 9 Side marker lamp LED Center.
flasher lamp
a Tail lamp, parking and LED Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
3 Turn signal lamp 3457 A standing lamp, brake lamps replaced at an authorized Mercedes-
lamp Benz Center:
4 Halogen headlamp: H7 (55 W) RAdditional turn signal lamps in the exterior
Low beam b License plate lamps C5W rear view mirrors
Bi-Xenon headlamp: D2S-35 W c Backup lamp P 21 W RHigh-mounted brake lamp
Low and high beam20 RBi-Xenon lamps
d Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
5 Front fog lamp HB4 (51 W) RFront fog lamps
e Rear fog lamp (driver’s P 21 W RSide marker lamps
Corner-illuminating H7 (55 W) side only)
front fog lamp RRear lamps (except license plate lamps)
6 Parking and standing W5W ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
lamp Notes on bulb replacement could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
ROnly use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced
7 Side marker lamp W5W at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
with the specified watt rating.
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
20 Vehicles
with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D2S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
313
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps G Warning! X Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon 5.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
lamp, do the following first: headlamp. Because of high voltage in X Place bulb socket 5 back into the housing
Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the and turn it clockwise.
bulb or repair the lamp and its components. X
X
Align housing cover 1 and turn it clock-
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position We recommend that you have such work
wise until it engages.
M. done by a qualified technician.
X Open the hood (Y page 223).
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps (halogen headlamps)/high-beam
only) flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps)
X Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb counter-
clockwise and remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
X Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket
3.
X Place bulb socket 3 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
1 Housing cover for low beam (halogen
headlamps only)
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamps. 5 Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp
Do not remove! X Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb counter-
X Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise clockwise and remove it.
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
3 Bulb socket for high beam/high-beam
and remove it. X Press gently onto the bulb and turn it coun-
flasher lamp X Turn bulb socket 5 with the bulb counter- terclockwise out of bulb socket 2.
4 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp clockwise and remove it.
314
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades

X Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket License plate lamps Replacing wiper blades
2 and turn clockwise until it engages.
Safety notes
X Place bulb socket 2 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages. G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
Parking and standing lamp bulb remove SmartKey from starter switch
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise,
X Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb counter- the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
clockwise and remove it. cause injury.
G Warning!
X Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket Wiper blades are components that are sub-
4. 1 Screws
ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
X Place bulb socket 4 back into the housing 2 Lamp cover blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and turn clockwise until it engages. X
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
Switch off the ignition.
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position able to observe surrounding traffic condi-
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps M. tions and could cause an accident.
X Open the trunk.
Tail lamp unit X
! To avoid damage to the hood the wiper
Loosen both screws 1.
arms should only be folded forward when
Since replacing bulbs in the tail lamp unit is a X Remove lamp cover 2. in the vertical position.
technically highly demanding process, we
X Replace the bulb.
recommend to have them replaced at an ! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Reinstall lamp cover 2. folded forward.
X Retighten screws 1. Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
Z
crack the windshield.
315
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades

Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the X With wiper arms 1 in vertical position, turn X Press tabs 2 together and tilt wiper blade
windshield glass without a wiper blade the SmartKey in the starter switch to posi- 1 in direction of arrow.
inserted. tion 0. Tabs 2 on both recesses of attachment
For your convenience, we recommend that X Remove the SmartKey from the starter 3 are detached.
you have this work carried out at an author- switch. X Maintaining its tilted position, remove
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3.
Removing wiper blades
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. Installing wiper blades
They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps
into place.
Wiper arms in vertical position

1 Cover
1 Wiper arms
2 Guide tab
X Make sure the hood is fully closed. 3 Attachment
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to 4 Tabs
1 Wiper blade
position 1.
2 Tabs
X Turn combination switch to wiper setting 3 Attachment
II.
4 Cover
316
Practical hints
Flat tire
X Maintaining a tilted position of the wiper Flat tire Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
blade, place cover 1 onto attachment 3 wheel is mounted.
so that guide tab 2 is under cover 1. Safety notes
X Tilt the wiper blade in direction of the arrow Your vehicle may be equipped with a TIREFIT
towards the wiper arm. kit or a spare wheel with collapsible tire. Vehi- Preparing the vehicle
cles with a TIREFIT kit do not have a spare
X Simultaneously press tabs 4 together and X Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
wheel.
let the wiper blade engage into both moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when
recesses of attachment 3. For information on your vehicle’s equipment,
possible.
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 345).
X Check if the wiper blade is securely fas- X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
tened. G Warning!
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
windshield. result, the vehicle handling characteristics X Engage the parking brake.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm change when driving with a spare wheel X Shift the automatic transmission into park
when folding it back. mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
position P (manual transmission to 1st or
ingly.
! Make sure the wiper blades are properly reverse gear R).
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades X Turn off the engine.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
may cause windshield damage.
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph switch.
(80 km/h). X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes- safe distance from the roadway. Open
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the doors only when conditions are safe to do
spare wheel replaced with a regular road so.
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
317
Practical hints
Flat tire
Sealing tires with TIREFIT If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
This section applies to SLK 55 AMG with Per-
formance Package only. In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult
a physician immediately.
Small tire punctures, particularly those in the
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. G Warning!
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
down to -4‡ (-20†). swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
G Warning! plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT Do not induce vomiting!
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger Two-part sticker Consult a physician immediately.
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire 1 Sticker for instrument cluster Keep away from open flame or heat source.
damage caused by driving with extremely 2 Sticker for wheel
low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire,
X Attach sticker part 1 where it will be easily i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
or a damaged wheel.
seen by the driver on the instrument clus- can then peel it off.
Do not drive the vehicle under such circum-
ter. If clothing has come in contact with TIRE-
stances.
FIT, have it dry-cleaned with perchloroethy-
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes- X Attach sticker part 2 to the damaged tire
lene as soon as possible.
Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside (close to the tire valve).
Assistance. G Warning!
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) Take care not to allow the contents of TIRE- label.
should not be removed from the tire. FIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the lowed or absorbed through the skin -
electric air pump out of the trunk. causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
318
Practical hints
Flat tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of 5 Air hose X Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
two versions of the electric air pump: 6 Flange flange 6 of TIREFIT container 1.
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure 7 Flap X Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside down
gauge and the electrical plug are located into notch 2 of the electric air pump.
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and elec-
trical plug are located at the bottom of the
pump housing.
The following description applies to both ver-
sions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
Version 2
1 TIREFIT container 8 Filler hose
2 Notch 9 Tire valve
3 Electric air pump switch X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire
4 Electrical plug from tire valve 9.
5 Air hose
6 Flange
X Version 1 only: Open flap 7 on the elec-

Version 1
tric air pump.
1 TIREFIT container
X Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the pump
2 Notch
housing.
3 Electric air pump switch
Z
4 Electrical plug
319
Practical hints
Flat tire
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to electric air pump by pressing 0 on electric
position 1. air pump switch 3.
X Press I on electric air pump switch 3. X Detach filler hose 8 from tire valve 9.
The electric air pump is switched on and X Drive vehicle back and forth very slowly
inflates the tire. approximately 30 ft (10 m).
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire. This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
sealant material inside the tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
(5 bar). This is normal and not an indication X Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5 from
of a malfunction. Do not switch off the elec- flange 6 of TIREFIT container 1.
Version 1 tric air pump. X Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 9.
a Vent screw X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for X Inflate the tire again.
b Pressure gauge approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least G Warning!
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw a on
26 psi (1.8 bar). If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
pressure gauge b.
is not attained, the tire is too severely dam-
X Screw filler hose 8 onto tire valve 9. G Warning! aged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire
The air hose can become hot during infla- repair.
X Insert electrical plug 4 into a power outlet
tion. Please exercise appropriate caution. In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
(Y page 208).
the tire.
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for ! Do not operate the electric air pump lon-
Do not drive the vehicle.
use with the electric air pump. Use a power ger than 6 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat. Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
outlet for electric air pump operation. or call Roadside Assistance.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
X If the tire inflation pressure of at least
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained, turn off the
320
Practical hints
Flat tire
X After attaining a tire inflation pressure of Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIRE- If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric air FIT repaired tire may change. Adapt your (1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the cor-
pump switch 3. driving accordingly. rect tire inflation pressure (see Tire and Load-
The electric air pump is switched off. ing Information placard on the driver’s door
X After driving the vehicle for an initial B-pillar):
10 minutes, check the tire inflation pres-
position 0.
sure using pressure gauge on the air pump.
X Detach the electric air pump.
G Warning!
G Warning! If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
proper caution to avoid burning yourself vehicle.
when detaching the electric air pump. Park your vehicle safely away from the
roadway and contact the nearest author-
X Place the electric air pump back in the ized Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
trunk. Assistance.
X Close the trunk. Have the damaged tire replaced. Version 2
X Drive off immediately. a Deflate button
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself b Pressure gauge
evenly inside the tire. X To increase tire inflation pressure: Switch
G Warning! on the electric air pump.
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph X Version 1: To decrease tire inflation pres-
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed sure, open vent screw a on pressure
to operate at higher speeds. gauge b (Y page 320).
The sticker must be attached on the instru- or
ment cluster where it will be easily seen by X Version 2: To decrease tire inflation pres-
the driver. sure, press yellow deflate button a
Z
321
Practical hints
Flat tire
located in air pump housing next to pres- X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz For information on where to find the respec-
sure gauge b. Center as soon as possible to obtain a new tive items, see “Where will I
TIREFIT kit. find ...?” (Y page 268) and (Y page 270).
G Warning!
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an author-
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
ized Mercedes-Benz Center for proper dis- Lifting the vehicle
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires posal.
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) G Warning!
because they are more likely to become X Replace your TIREFIT container every When jacking up the vehicle, only use the
punctured or damaged by road debris, pot- 4 years. Replacement containers are avail- jack which has been specifically approved
holes, etc. able at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated ter.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
tires wear unevenly, adversely affect han- up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
dling and fuel economy, and are more likely built into both sides of the vehicle. Make
to fail from being overheated. Mounting the spare wheel
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the take-up bracket. The jack must always be
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indi- Introduction vertical when in use, especially on inclines
cated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s X Prepare the vehicle as described or declines.
door opening). Overloading the tires can (Y page 317). The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi-
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. X cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
Take the following out of the vehicle:
Rspare wheel
for performing maintenance work under
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop, the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, Rjack use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a
to have the damaged tire replaced. Rwheel wheel change.
wrench
X Recommended duration of use: A maxi- Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
Rcollapsible wheel chock
mum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended Rwheel bolts for spare wheel away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
tire inflation pressure. Ralignment bolt Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
Relectric air pump
322
Practical hints
Flat tire
capacity jackstands before working under When changing wheel on a level surface:
the vehicle. X Place the wheel chock in front of and
Always firmly set the parking brake and another wheel chock or other sizeable
block the wheels with wheel chocks or object behind the wheel that is diagonally
other sizeable objects before raising the opposite to the wheel being changed.
vehicle with the jack. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should circumstan-
Make sure that the ground on which the
ces require you to do so on a hill, place the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
wheel chock and another sizeable object as
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If nec-
follows:
essary, use a large underlay. On slippery 1 Wheel wrench
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
use a non-slip underlay, for example a rub- objects on the downhill side blocking both X On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not
ber mat. wheels of the axle not being worked on. yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately
one full turn with wrench 1).
Do not use wooden blocks or similar G Warning!
objects to support the jack. Otherwise the Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or The jack take-up brackets are located directly
jack may not be able to achieve its load- on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the behind the front wheel housings and in front
bearing capacity if it is not at its full height. vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you of the rear wheel housings.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is or others. G Warning!
raised. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
Also observe the notes on the jack. up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets.
Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by jack take-up bracket.
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
If you do not position the jack correctly in
sizeable objects.
the jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can
One wheel chock is included with the vehi- fall off the jack and seriously or fatally injure
cle tool kit (Y page 268). For information you or others.
on setting up the collapsible wheel chock,
see (Y page 269).
323
Practical hints
Flat tire
! Do not position the jack on the body of Removing the wheel
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
Screw-type jack (example illustration)

X Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3 is 1 Alignment bolt
fully seated in take-up bracket 2 and the
X Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and remove
2 Take-up bracket jack base evenly meets the ground.
it.
3 Jack X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a max-
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt
4 Crank imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
1 supplied with the vehicle tool kit.
X Place jack 3 on firm ground. X Remove the remaining bolts.
X Position jack 3 under take-up bracket
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
2 so that it is always vertical as seen from
This could result in damage to the wheel
the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
bolts and wheel hub threads.
incline.
X Remove the wheel.
324
Practical hints
Flat tire
Attaching the spare wheel ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while instal-
G Warning! ling first wheel bolt.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel
is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsi-
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
ble tire (located under plastic cover on the
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
outside of the spare wheel rim)
drive under these circumstances! Contact
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or ! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when bolt and push it on.
call Roadside Assistance. mounting the spare wheel with collapsible
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight- tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to slightly.
wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with
come off. This could cause an accident. Be collapsible tire will damage the vehicle’s X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
sure to use the correct wheel bolts. brakes. X Install last wheel bolt and tighten it slightly.
G Warning! G Warning! X Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 326).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. bolts when remounting the original wheel
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the after it has been repaired.
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
could fall off the jack.
hub.
325
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the collapsible tire
G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel
is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump
label.
Version 1 Version 2
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating 1 Flap 2 Air pump switch
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may 2 Air pump switch 3 Electrical plug
be damaged. 3 Electrical plug 4 Pressure gauge
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent 5 Union nut
two versions of the electric air pump: screw 6 Deflate button
RVersion
5 Union nut
1: The air hose with pressure X Version 1 only: Open flap 1 on electric
gauge and the electrical plug are located air pump.
behind a flap.
X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located 3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4.
in the pump housing. The air hose and elec-
X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug 3 and
trical plug are located at the bottom of the
pump housing. the air hose out of the pump housing bot-
tom.
The following description applies to both ver-
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
sions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared. hose 4.
326
Practical hints
Flat tire
X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible ! Do not operate the electric air pump lon- (Y page 348), decrease tire pressure using
tire valve. ger than 6 minutes without interruption. deflate button 6.
Otherwise it may overheat.
X Screw union nut 5 onto the collapsible tire G Warning!
valve. You may operate the air pump again after
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
it has cooled off.
X Make sure air pump switch 2 is set to 0. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
X Insert electrical plug 3 into a power outlet ! Compare the recommended tire inflation can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
(Y page 208). pressure for your vehicle with the tire infla- because they are more likely to become
tion pressure on the yellow label located on punctured or damaged by road debris, pot-
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for the spare wheel rim. holes, etc.
use with the electric air pump. Use a power If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
outlet for electric air pump operation. label on the spare wheel rim differs from tires wear unevenly, adversely affect han-
the values given in this Operator’s Manual, dling and fuel economy, and are more likely
inflate the tire to the recommended tire to fail from being overheated.
position 1.
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
X Press I on electric air pump switch 2. on the spare wheel rim. X Detach the electric air pump.
The electric air pump switches on and X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
inflates the collapsible tire. X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug 3
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the recom- and air hose 4 behind flap 1 and place
mended tire inflation pressure as specified position 0.
the electric air pump back in its designated
for your vehicle (Y page 348). X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure storage space.
This should take approximately 5 minutes. is above the recommended tire inflation
X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug 3
pressure as specified for your vehicle
G Warning! (Y page 348), decrease tire pressure using and the air hose back into the pump hous-
The air hose and the union nut can become the vent screw on air hose 4. ing bottom.
hot during inflation. Exercise proper cau- X Place the electric air pump back in its des-
X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
tion to avoid burning yourself when using ignated storage space.
is above the recommended tire inflation
the equipment. X Lower the vehicle.
pressure as specified for your vehicle
327
Practical hints
Battery
Lowering the vehicle G Warning! Battery
G Warning! Have the tightening torque checked after
Safety notes
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel A battery should always be sufficiently
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
is properly attached. charged in order to achieve its rated service
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
air pump before lowering the vehicle. X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded maintenance intervals.
in (storage position), see (Y page 268). If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-
X Lower the vehicle by turning crank coun-
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools tance trips, you will need to have the battery
terclockwise until the vehicle is resting fully
in the designated storage space. charge checked more frequently.
on its own weight.
X Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective When replacing a battery, always use a bat-
X Remove the jack.
wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit and tery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
put the wheel in the trunk. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
The retractable hardtop must be closed. for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
For information on storing the spare wheel in steps you need to observe.
the trunk after it has been replaced by a reg-
ular road wheel, see (Y page 270). G Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
1 – 5 Wheel bolts Fire, open flames and

X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, follow- smoking are prohibited
ing the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to when handling batteries.
5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tight- Avoid creating sparks.
ening torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
328
Practical hints
Battery
Battery acid is caustic. Do G Warning! discharge. You may also connect an acces-
not allow it to come into Failure to follow these instructions can sory battery charge unit expressly
contact with skin, eyes or result in severe injury or death. approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-
clothing. cle model to maintain the battery charge.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
Wear suitable protective Contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz
you might get injured.
clothing, especially Center for further information.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
gloves, apron and face- The battery, the battery ventilation hose
allow this fluid to come in contact with
guard. and the lateral plug must always be
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
securely installed when the vehicle is in
Wear eye protection. immediately flush affected area with water
operation.
Rinse any acid spills and seek medical help if necessary.
immediately with clear A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
water. Contact a physi- which is flammable and explosive. Keep clamps while the engine is running or the
cian if necessary. flames or sparks away from battery, avoid SmartKey is in the starter switch. Other-
Keep children away. improper connection of jumper cables, wise the alternator and other electronic
smoking etc. components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an
G Warning!
Follow the instructions in authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
this Operator’s Manual. Do not place metal objects on the battery
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for mainte-
as this could result in a short circuit.
nance intervals or contact an authorized
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
Batteries contain materials that can harm the risk of acid burns in the event of an acci- tion.
environment if disposed of improperly. Large dent.
12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recy- i Only replace a discharged battery with a
cling of batteries is the preferred method of ! As with any other battery, have the bat- battery recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
disposal. Many states require sellers of battery disconnect at a qualified workshop or
teries to accept old batteries for recycling. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you
do not intend to operate your vehicle for an
extended period of time to prevent battery
329
Practical hints
Jump starting
i After battery power was interrupted, do Have batteries charged at an authorized Mer- Jump starting
the following: cedes-Benz Center. If you charge the batter-
RSet the clock (Y page 121). ies yourself, follow the operating instructions G Warning!
for your charging device.
RSynchronize the power windows Failure to follow these directions will cause
Only use a battery charge unit with a maxi- damage to the electronic components, and
(Y page 91). mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. can lead to a battery explosion and severe
X Charge battery in accordance with the injury or death.
instructions of the battery charger manu- Never lean over batteries while connecting
Charging the battery facturer. or jump starting, you might get injured.
G Warning! Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
Never charge a battery while still installed allow this fluid to come in contact with
in the vehicle unless the accessory battery eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is immediately flush affected area with water,
being used. Gases may escape during and seek medical help if necessary.
charging and cause explosions that may A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
result in paint damage, corrosion or per- which is flammable and very explosive.
sonal injury. Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
An accessory battery charge unit specially avoid improper connection of jumper
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and cables, smoking, etc.
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
available, permitting the charging of the can result in it exploding, causing personal
battery in its installed position. Contact an injury.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for infor- Read all instructions before proceeding.
mation and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the sep- ! Vehicles with automatic transmission:
arate instructions for the accessory battery
Do not tow-start the vehicle. Otherwise, the
charger.
automatic transmission will be damaged.
330
Practical hints
Jump starting
! Jump starting should only be performed ROnly jump start from batteries with the X Open the hood.
using the jump-start terminals located in same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting X Flip up cover of positive under hood termi-
the engine compartment. with a more powerful battery could damage nal 2.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting the vehicle’s electrical system, which will
attempts. not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
Do not attempt to start the engine using a ited Warranty.
battery quick-charge unit. ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
If the engine does not run after several cross-section and insulated terminal
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it clamps.
checked at the nearest authorized Mer- RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
cedes-Benz Center. not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
Excessive unburned fuel generated by that move when an engine is started or run-
repeated failed starting attempts may dam- ning.
age the catalytic converter and may pres-
G Warning!
ent a fire risk. 1 Positive terminal of charged battery
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have 2 Positive under-hood terminal
Do not smoke.
loose or missing insulation. 3 Negative terminal of charged battery
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch 4 Negative under-hood terminal
tions when handling automotive batteries.
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery. X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch. ! Never invert the terminal connections!
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Connect positive terminal 1 of the
started with jumper cables and the battery of
X Engage the parking brake. charged battery with positive under-hood
another vehicle. Observe the following:
terminal 2 with a jumper cable. Clamp the
RJump starting should only be performed X Make sure the automatic transmission is in cable to positive terminal 1 of the charged
when the engine and catalytic converter park position P (manual transmission to battery first.
are cold. Neutral).
X Start engine of the vehicle with the charged
RDo not start the engine if the battery is fro- battery and run at idle speed. Z
zen. Let the battery thaw out first.
331
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

X Connect negative terminal 3 of the Towing the vehicle matic transmission which is not covered
charged battery with negative under-hood by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
terminal 4 with a jumper cable. Clamp the Safety notes RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.
cable to negative terminal 3 of the Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle Towing with sling-type equipment over
charged battery first. be transported with all wheels off the ground bumpy roads will damage radiator and
X Start engine of the vehicle with the dis- using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly supports.
charged battery and run at idle speed. equipment. This method is preferable to other RTowing of the vehicle should only be
You can now turn on the electrical consum- types of towing.
done using the properly installed towing
ers. Do not switch on the headlamps under ! To prevent damage during transport, do eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
any circumstances. not tie down vehicle by its chassis or sus- rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
X Remove the jumper cables first from neg- pension parts. frame or suspension parts.
ative terminals 3 and 4 and then from If circumstances do not permit the recom-
positive terminals 1 and 2. mended towing methods, the vehicle may be i If the battery is disconnected or dis-
You can now switch on the headlamps. towed with all wheels on the ground or front charged
axle raised only so far as necessary to have Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
X Have the battery checked at the nearest
the vehicle moved to a safe location where switch
the recommended towing methods can be Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
employed.
park position P
X Switch off the tow-away alarm before tow-
RFor more information see “Bat-
ing the vehicle with all wheels off the
ground or front axle raised (Y page 63). tery” (Y page 328) or “Jump start-
ing” (Y page 330).
! Before towing the vehicle observe the fol- RVehicles with automatic transmission:
lowing instructions: For information on manually unlocking
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the gear selector lever, see
Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could (Y page 309)
otherwise seriously damage the auto-
332
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

Installing towing eye bolt X Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the X Removing cover: Press mark on cover
arrow. 1 as indicated by the arrow.
Depending on whether you are towing a vehi-
cle or you are being towed, the towing eye X Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole X Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes for the towing eye bolt. for the towing eye bolt.
which are located behind covers on each
bumper. Removing cover in rear bumper Fixing towing eye bolt
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the vehi-
cle tool kit, located in the compartment G Warning!
underneath the trunk floor (Y page 268). In order to avoid possible serious burns or
X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk. injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust
pipe is extremely hot.
Removing cover in front bumper
Example illustration front bumper

1 Towing eye bolt
X Take the towing eye bolt 1 and the wheel

wrench from the vehicle tool kit.
X Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise into
1 Cover 1 Cover threaded hole to its stop.
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt 1 by turning it
clockwise.
333
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

Removing towing eye bolt X If engaged, release the parking brake. Towing with all wheels on the ground
X X Switch off the automatic central locking
Loosen towing eye bolt 1 counterclock- G Warning!
wise with wheel wrench. (Y page 124).
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
X Unscrew towing eye bolt 1. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- with all wheels on the ground, always tow
Key in the starter switch. with a tow bar if:
X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover 1
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher Rthe
(Y page 333) and snap it into place. engine will not run
(Y page 85).
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake sys-
X Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
back into the vehicle tool kit. ! Make sure that the ignition is switched tem
off. If the starter switch is in position 2, Rthere is a malfunction in the power sup-
active braking action through the ESP® ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
Towing with front axle raised may otherwise seriously damage the brake This is necessary to adequately control the
system. towed vehicle.
When towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised, the wheels on the ground have to ! The vehicle may be towed only for distan- Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
move freely. ces up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). in starter switch position 2.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
brake pedal and keep it pressed. position 0 for an extended period of time,
it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
the manual transmission into the neutral remove SmartKey from starter switch and
position (no gear selected). reinsert.
or
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift G Warning!
the automatic transmission into neutral With the engine not running, there is no
position N. power assistance for the brake and steer-
ing systems. In this case, it is important to
X Release the brake pedal.
334
Practical hints
Fuses
keep in mind that a considerably higher right turn signal in the usual manner – only Fuses
degree of effort is necessary to brake and the selected turn signal will operate. Upon
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving canceling the turn signal, the hazard warn- Introduction
accordingly. ing flasher will operate again. The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the tems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
brake pedal and keep it pressed. G Warning!
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
the manual transmission into the neutral with the specified amperage for the system
position (no gear selected). in question and do not attempt to repair or
or bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
the automatic transmission into neutral fuses may cause an overload leading to a
position N. fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
X Release the brake pedal. cause determined and remedied by an
X If engaged, release the parking brake. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro-
(Y page 85). priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or
the fuse rating given on the fuse) of the
! The vehicle may be towed only for distan- amperage recommended in the fuse chart.
ces up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to
not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). advise you on this subject.
i To signal turns while being towed with the i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
hazard warning flasher in use you can acti- Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
vate the combination switch for the left or Benz Center.
335
Practical hints
Fuses
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the Fuse box in passenger compartment ! The fuse box cover must be properly posi-
cause determined and rectified by an author- tioned as described to prevent moisture or
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw- dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly
A fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the driver to open the fuse box cover in the impairing fuse operation.
passenger compartment. The fuse chart dashboard, as this could damage the fuse
explains the fuse allocation and fuse amper- box cover or the dashboard.
ages. Fuse box in engine compartment
The electrical fuses are located in fuse boxes X Opening: Open the hood.
on the driver’s side of the engine compart-
ment or in the passenger compartment.
Before replacing fuses

X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (manual transmission to
Neutral). 1 Fuse box cover
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Opening: Open the driver’s door.
X Turn off the engine. 1 Fuse box
X Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in recess
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter on the edge of cover 1 at the position 2 Clamps
switch. indicated by the arrow. 3 Fuse box cover
X Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard using X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
the lever. the fuse box 1.
X Closing: Hook cover 1 into the opening at X Release clamps 2.
the front.
X Remove fuse box cover 3.
X Press cover 1 back on until it engages.
336
Practical hints
Fuses
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
properly positioned.
X Press fuse box cover 3 down and secure
with clamps 2.
! The fuse box cover must be installed prop-

erly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from
entering the fuse box and possibly impair-
ing fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
337
338
Technical data

Parts service ..................................... 340
Warranty coverage ........................... 340
Identification labels .......................... 341
Engine ................................................ 343
Rims and tires ................................... 345
Electrical system .............................. 349
Main dimensions ............................... 350
Weights .............................................. 351
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ....... 351
339
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Vehicle equipment Parts service Warranty coverage
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main- Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
tures, standard or optional, potentially tain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts warranties printed in the Service and War-
available for your vehicle at the time of pur- required for maintenance and repair work. In ranty Information booklet.
chase. Please be aware that your vehicle addition, strategically located parts distribu- Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
might not be equipped with all features tion centers provide quick and reliable parts exchange or repair any defective parts origi-
described in this manual. service. nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
More than 300 000 different parts for Mer- with the terms of the following warranties:
cedes-Benz models are available. RNew Car Limited Warranty
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected REmission System Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
REmission Performance Warranty
been specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
vehicles. setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts Island, and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
should be installed. tems Warranty
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
parts and accessories not authorized by Laws)
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
the vehicle, which is not covered by the ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it sories warranties, copies of which are availa-
could compromise the vehicle’s durability ble at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
or safety.
340
Technical data
Identification labels
Loss of Service and Warranty Infor- Identification labels
mation booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
ment. It will be mailed to you.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

2 VIN
1 Certification label (on driver’s door 3 Paintwork code
B-pillar)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
Ron the certification label
Rembossed on the center tunnel behind the

passenger seat (Y page 342)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 342)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)

2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
341
Technical data
Identification labels
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to cer-
tification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
6 Engine number (engraved on engine)

7 VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
8 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California cer-
tification exhaust emission standards
i When ordering parts, please specify vehi-

4 Cover
cle identification and engine number.
5 VIN
X Move the passenger seat forward as far as

possible (Y page 73).
X Fold cover 4 upward.
VIN 5 is now visible.
342
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model SLK 300 (171.454)21 SLK 350 (171.458)21 SLK 55 AMG (171.473)21
Engine type 272 272 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6 8
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.23 in (82.10 mm) 3.39 in (86.00 mm) 3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston 182.8 cu in (2 996 cm3) 213.5 cu in (3 498 cm3) 331.9 cu in (5 439 cm3)
displacement
Compression ratio 11.3:1 11.7:1 11:1
Output acc. to 228 hp / 6 100 rpm 300 hp / 6 500 rpm 355 hp / 5 750 rpm
SAE J 1349 (170 kW / 6 100 rpm)22 (224 kW / 6 500 rpm)22 (265 kW / 5 750 rpm)22
Maximum torque acc. to 221 lb-ft / 2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm 266 lb-ft / 4 900 rpm 376 lb-ft / 4 000 rpm
SAE J 1349 (300 Nm / 2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm) (360 Nm / 4 900 rpm) (510 Nm / 4 000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6 500 rpm 7 200 rpm 6 500 rpm
21 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
22 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
343
Technical data
Engine
Model SLK 300 (171.454)21 SLK 350 (171.458)21 SLK 55 AMG (171.473)21
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm 2 404 mm 2 380 mm
344
Technical data
Rims and tires

Rims and tires Rpoor handling characteristics pressure information for special driving sit-
Rincreased noise uations, see (Y page 235).
Notes
Rincreased fuel consumption i The following pages also list the approved
! Only use tires which have been tested and wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires Moreover, tires and rims not approved by vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit not available as standard or optional fac-
to provide best possible performance in dimensional variations and different tire tory equipment, but can be purchased from
conjunction with the driving safety systems deformation characteristics that could an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the Depending on vehicle model and the stand-
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your ard or optional factory-equipped wheel
vehicle and tested and approved by Mer- tires or the vehicle may be the result.
rim/tire configuration on your vehicle
cedes-Benz can be identified by finding the i Further information on tires and rims is (Appearance Package, Sport Package etc.),
following on the tire’s sidewall: equipping your vehicle with winter tires
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original equip- approved for your vehicle model may also
Center. A placard with the recommended
ment tires tire inflation pressures is located on the require the purchase of two or four wheel
AMG vehicles: driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may rims of the recommended size for use with
Does not apply to all approved tires on have supplemental tire inflation pressure these winter tires. For more information
AMG vehicles. For information on tested information for driving at high speeds or for contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
and approved tires for AMG vehicles, vehicle loads less than the maximum ter.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz loaded vehicle condition. If such informa-
Center. tion is provided, it can be found on the
Using tires other than those approved by placard located on the inside of the fuel
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- be checked regularly and should only be
ited Warranty. adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manu-
facturer’s maintenance recommendation
! Using tires other than those approved by included with the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental For information on recommended tire infla-
effects, such as tion pressure and supplemental tire inflation
345
Technical data
Rims and tires

Same size tires
Model SLK 300 SLK 300 SLK 55 AMG SLK 55 AMG

SLK 300 (Sport Package) SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
SLK 350
SLK 350 (Sport Package)
Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2 — —
AMG rims (light alloy) — — 7.5 J x 17 H2 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 1.42 in (36 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Winter tires23,24 205/55 R16 91H 225/45 R17 91H 205/50 R17 89H 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load)
M+S. M+S. M+S.25 M+S.25
Winter tires23,24 — — 225/45 R17 91H —

M+S.25
23 Radial-plytires
24 Not available as factory equipment.
25 For use with snow chains, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
346
Technical data
Rims and tires

Mixed size tires
Model SLK 300 SLK 300 (Sport Package)

SLK 350 SLK 350 (Sport Package)
SLK 55 AMG
SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
Front axle Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires26 225/45 R17 91W 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires26,27 245/40 R17 91W 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
26 Radial-ply tires
27 Must not be used with snow chains.
347
Technical data
Rims and tires

Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare
wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the
tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
i The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package does not have a spare wheel. The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package is equipped with
TIREFIT (Y page 318).
Model All models

(except SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package)
Rim 4.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset 0.47 in (12 mm)
Collapsible tire28 145/70-17 92P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 51 psi (3.5 bar)
28 Must not be used with snow chains.
348
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model SLK 300 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG
Alternator 14 V / 150 A 14 V / 180 A29 14 V / 150 A

14 V / 150 A30
Starter motor 12 V / 1.4 kW 12 V / 1.4 kW 12 V / 1.7 kW
Battery 12 V / 74 Ah 12 V / 74 Ah 12 V / 74 Ah
Spark plugs Type NGK PLKR 6A Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33 NGK IFR 6D10
NGK PLKR 6A
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft 15 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft 18 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft

(20 Nm - 30 Nm) (20 Nm - 30 Nm) (25 Nm - 30 Nm)
29 Vehicles with manual transmission.

30 Vehicles with automatic transmission.
349
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model SLK 300 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length 161.7 in (4 107 mm) 161.7 in (4 107 mm) 161.5 in (4 103 mm)
Overall vehicle width, exterior rear view mirrors folded out 79.2 in (2 012 mm) 79.2 in (2 012 mm) 79.2 in (2 012 mm)
Overall vehicle height 51.0 in (1 296 mm) 51.1 in (1 298 mm) 50.7 in (1 287 mm)
Overall vehicle height when opening/closing hardtop 60.8 in (1 544 mm) 60.8 in (1 545 mm) 60.4 in (1 535 mm)
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2 430 mm) 95.7 in (2 430 mm) 95.7 in (2 430 mm)
Track, front 60.2 in (1 530 mm) 60.1 in (1 526 mm) 60.0 in (1 524 mm)
Track, rear 61.0 in (1 549 mm) 61.0 in (1 549 mm) 61.0 in (1 549 mm)
Turning circle 34.5 ft (10.51 m) 34.5 ft (10.51 m) 34.5 ft (10.51 m)
350
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Weights
Model SLK 300 SLK 55 AMG

SLK 350
Roof load max. 110 lb (50 kg) max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) max. 220 lb (100 kg)
! This vehicle is not designed to carry items Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. of service fluids. Otherwise you could
on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted endanger persons or the environment.
devices, unless expressly approved by Mer- Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil-
cedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, Vehicle components and their respective dren.
must not be used as they will damage the lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
vehicle and retractable hardtop. products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct con-
At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does Benz. tact with your skin or clothing.
not offer any roof racks or any other roof- For information on tested and approved prod- If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
mounted devices for use on this vehicle. ucts, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz physician immediately.
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any
items on its trunk lid or accommodate any G Warning!
type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such Comply with all valid regulations with
devices may damage the vehicle and respect to handling, storing, and disposing
retractable hardtop mechanism.
351
Technical data

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter All models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission SLK 300 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

SLK 350
SLK 55 AMG 9.2 US qt (8.7 l)
Manual transmission SLK 300 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Manual Transmission Fluid

SLK 350
Rear axle SLK 300 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Hypoid Gear Oil (SAE 85W-90)
SLK 350 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
SLK 55 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan EG 5010 D
Power steering All models 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid

(Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)
Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system SLK 300 approx. 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

SLK 350
SLK 55 AMG approx. 11.7 US qt (11.1 l)
352
Technical data

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel tank All models 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
(Minimum Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])
Fuel tank reserve SLK 300 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

SLK 350
SLK 55 AMG 2.6 US gal (10.0 l)
Air conditioning system All models — R-134a refrigerant and special

PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Hydraulic system for retractable All models 0.2 US qt (0.195 l) MB Hydraulic Oil
hardtop
Washer system and headlamp All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concen-
cleaning system trate31
Washer fluid mixing ratio
(Y page 358)
31 UseMB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point.
353
Technical data

Approved engine oils Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our Model Engine type MB sheet
service intervals. Therefore, only use number
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with Maintenance System. SLK 300 272 229.5
Conventional petroleum-based oils must not SLK 350 272 229.5
be used for vehicles with Maintenance Sys-
tem. SLK 55 AMG 113 229.5
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). i MB sheet numbers are printed on the out-
side of oil containers. Engine oil additives
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specifi-
cation other than those expressly required ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
for the Maintenance System, or changing Viscosity grades for engine oils They may damage the engine. Damage or
of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer malfunctions resulting from blending oil
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity additives are not covered by the Mercedes-
than those called for by the Maintenance according to the lowest air temperature
System will result in engine or emission Benz Limited Warranty.
expected before the next oil change.
Please follow Maintenance System recom-
mendations for scheduled oil changes. Fail-
ure to do so will result in engine or emission
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
354
Technical data

Air conditioning refrigerant Premium unleaded gasoline RDo not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG G Warning! light load such as two persons and no
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning Gasoline is highly flammable and poison- luggage.
system. ous. It burns violently and can cause seri- RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum acceler-
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based ous personal injury.
ator pedal position if the vehicle is fully
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the Never allow sparks, flames or smoking loaded or operating in mountainous ter-
system will occur. materials near gasoline! rain.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
Brake fluid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing con- Fuel requirements
G Warning! tact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
During vehicle operation, the boiling point octane number (posted at the pump) must be
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced lation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health. 91 min. It is an average of both the Research
through the absorption of moisture from Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
the atmosphere. Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
Under extremely strenuous operating con- ! To maintain the engine’s durability and
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
ditions, this moisture content can lead to performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used. Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
the formation of bubbles in the system, unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
thus reducing the system’s efficiency. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced able and low octane gasoline is used, follow
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte- these precautions:
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
nance Booklet for replacement interval. RHave the fuel tank only partially filled exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
as possible.
Benz Center will provide you with additional Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
information. RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% etha- Z
acceleration. nol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.
355
Technical data

These blends must also meet all other fuel Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ! Add premixed coolant solution only. Add-
requirements, such as resistance to spark or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a listing water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. ing of approved product(s). Follow directions Antifreeze separately from each other,
on product label. could cause engine damage not covered by
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Gasoline additives This only results in unnecessary cost and may If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
A major concern among engine manufactur- be harmful to the engine operation. (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
ers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. ! Damage or malfunction resulting from pressurized cooling system is reached at
Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of poor fuel quality or from blending additional approximately 266‡ (130†).
quality gasoline containing additives that pre- fuel additives other than those tested and The coolant solution must be used year round
vent the build-up of carbon deposits. approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz to provide the necessary corrosion protection
After an extended period of using fuels with- vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes- and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
out such additives carbon deposits can build Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
up, especially on the intake valves and in the or Extended Limited warranties. interval.
combustion area, leading to engine perform- Coolant system design and coolant used
ance problems such as: determine the replacement interval. The
RWarm-up hesitation Coolants replacement interval published in the Main-
RUnstable idle The engine coolant is a mixture of water and tenance Booklet is only applicable if
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
RKnocking/pinging
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
RCorrosion protection
RMisfire of equal specification are used to renew the
RPower
RFreeze protection coolant concentration or bring it back up to
loss
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
the proper level.
In areas where carbon deposits may be For information on other Mercedes-Benz
encountered due to lack of availability of gas- point)
approved products of equal specification,
oline which contains these additives, Mer- The cooling system was filled at the factory contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
cedes-Benz recommends the use of additives with a coolant providing freeze protection to or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
To provide important corrosion protection,
vehicles. protection.
the solution must be at least 50% anticorro-
356
Technical data

sion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protec- The water in the cooling system must meet corrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a
tion to approximately -35‡ [-37†]). minimum requirements, which are usually significantly shortened service life.
If you use a solution that is more than 55% satisfied by normal drinking water. Therefore, the following product is strongly
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection If you are not sure about the water quality, recommended for use in your vehicle:
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
temperature will increase due to the lower ter. Before the start of the winter season (or once
heat transfer capability of the solution. There- a year in hot southern regions), you should
fore, do not use more than this amount of Anticorrosion/antifreeze have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentra-
anticorrosion/antifreeze. tion checked.
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 parts. The use of aluminum components in The coolant is also regularly checked each
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to motor vehicle engines necessitates that anti- time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling corrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
system checked for signs of leakage). Please engines be specifically formulated to protect
make sure the mixture is in accordance with the aluminum parts. Failure to use such anti-
label instructions.
Model Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system SLK 300 5.2 US qt (4.9 l) 5.7 US qt (5.4 l)

SLK 350
SLK 55 AMG 5.9 US qt (5.55 l) 6.5 US qt (6.1 l)
357
Technical data
Washer system and headlamp clean-

ing system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer solvent/anti-
freeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and water:
R1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and commercially available pre-
mixed washer solvent/antifreeze:
R1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts sol-
vent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
358
359
360
Service and Literature Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has differ from your vehicle.
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes- Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly. excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
For expert advice and quality service, contact authorization in writing.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Press time February 07, 2008
If you are interested in obtaining service lit- GSP / TID
erature for your vehicle, please contact an Printed in U. S. A.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca (Can-
ada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work
or repairs. Improper or incomplete service
or the use of incorrect or inappropriate
parts or materials may damage the vehicle
or its equipment, which may in turn result
in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying
out any type of service, turn to the advice
of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment.

É1715841183fËÍ
1715841183
Order no. 6515 3286 13 Part no. 171 584 11 83 Edition 2009 A USA

2009 SLK Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 SLK Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

1, 2, 3 ... Passenger front air bag off indica- Aquaplaning

Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Batteries, SmartKey C

Climate control Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 D

Messages in the multifunction dis- Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 F Front seat head restraints

Gear range H High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 84, 312

Instrument panel Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 302

Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Menus Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293

Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Steering column

Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 249 Transmission gear selector lever U

Vehicle loading Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Reporting safety defects

Vehicle data recording

Exterior view ....................................... 24

1 Trunk 6 Retractable hardtop 199 d Tires and wheels 229,

5 Exterior rear view mirrors 79

1 Steering wheel gearshift c Steering wheel adjustment,

5 Lever for Voice Control Sys- g Combination switch

6 Overhead control panel 36 • Wipers 87

7 Sun sensor (automatic cli- • High beam 84

b Steering wheel adjustment,

1 Multifunction display H Combination low tire L Left turn signal indi-

2 Tachometer with: 5 Speedometer with: • Resetting all settings 119

? Engine malfunction 1 Supplemental 7 Knobs for instrument

1 Glove box 204

Luggage cover 202

5 Cup holders 205

6 Parcel net in passenger

9 Storage compartment 204

Multifunction steering wheel

1 Multifunction display 110 Press button æ or ç

2 Press button s • to select submenus in

1 Function only available in telephone menu.

Multifunction steering wheel

Press button j or k Press and hold button

• to move within a menu • to select previous or

4 Seat heating switch, pas- Rear window defroster

5 Central unlocking switch 69 d Cigarette lighter 207

6 Hazard warning flasher e Ashtray 206

7 Central locking switch 69

8 Electronic Stability Pro-

1 Gearshift lever (manual

2 Retractable hardtop switch 199

3 Tow-away alarm off switch 64

4 Parking brake lever 95

5 Storage compartment 204

7 Driver’s side exterior rear

8 Exterior rear view mirror

9 Program mode selector

Overhead control panel

1 Interior lighting switch 86

2 Automatic interior lighting 86

3 Right reading lamp switch 86

4 Tele Aid (emergency call

5 Garage door opener 214

6 Sensor for auto-dimming